2014 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training

Transcription

2014 Huawei Product and Knowledge
Enterprise Customer Training Manual
Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department
2014
2014 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual
CONTENTS
1
2
Huawei Training&Certification Service ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1
ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution ...................................................................................... 1
1.2
Huawei Training Service............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3
Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products and solutions........................ 2
1.4
Learning Path ............................................................................................................................................. 4
1.5
Huawei's Career Certification ..................................................................................................................... 5
1.6
Training Instructors ..................................................................................................................................... 6
1.7
Training Methods........................................................................................................................................ 6
1.8
Huawei online learning center (Learning Website) ..................................................................................... 7
1.8.1
How to register for a website account? .............................................................................................. 7
1.8.2
How to get online learning resource?................................................................................................. 7
1.8.3
Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website .............................................................................. 8
Enterprise IP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1
Enterprise IP Training Path ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.1
Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ............................................................................. 9
2.1.2
WLAN Certification Training Path..................................................................................................... 10
2.1.3
Security Certification Training Path .................................................................................................. 11
2.1.4
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path .......................................................... 12
2.1.5
IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path ........................................................................ 13
2.1.6
NE Routers Training Path ................................................................................................................ 14
2.1.7
AR G3 Routers Training Path .......................................................................................................... 15
2.1.8
AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ...................................................................................... 16
2.1.9
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path .............................................................................. 17
2.1.10
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ................................................................................. 18
2.1.11
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path .............................................................. 19
2.1.12
WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path .................................................................................................. 20
2.1.13
MSCG(ME60) Training Path ............................................................................................................ 21
2.1.14
PTN Product Training Path .............................................................................................................. 22
2.1.15
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ...................................................... 23
2.1.16
Enterprise Network Design Training Path ........................................................................................ 24
2.1.17
Firewall Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 25
2.1.18
Security Management Software Training Path ................................................................................. 26
2.1.19
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ............................................................................ 27
2.1.20
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path ........................................................... 28
2.2
List of Enterprise IP Training Programs .................................................................................................... 29
2.3
Certification Training Programs ................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.1
HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training .......................................................... 35
2.3.2
HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days) ............................... 36
2.3.3
HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training .................... 37
2.3.4
HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training............................................ 38
2.3.5
HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training ......................................... 39
-1-
2.3.6
HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ......................................... 40
2.3.7
HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training (Fast-Track 5
days)
41
2.3.8
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training .............................................. 42
2.3.9
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ............................................. 44
2.3.10
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network Training .............................. 45
2.3.11
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training .......................................... 46
2.3.12
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training .......................................... 47
2.3.13
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ................................................................... 48
2.4
IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs ........................................................................ 50
2.4.1
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ................................................................................. 50
2.4.2
Huawei VRP System Training .......................................................................................................... 51
2.4.3
Enterprise LAN Technology Training ................................................................................................ 52
2.4.4
Enterprise WAN Technology Training............................................................................................... 53
2.4.5
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ...................................................................................... 54
2.4.6
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) ....................................................................................... 55
2.5
Advanced Technology Training Programs ................................................................................................ 56
2.5.1
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training.................................................................................. 56
2.5.2
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ........................................................................................... 57
2.5.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .................................................................................. 59
2.5.4
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ..................................................................................... 61
2.5.5
Enterprise QoS Technology Training ................................................................................................ 62
2.5.6
Enterprise HA Technology Training .................................................................................................. 63
2.5.7
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training ................................................................................................ 64
2.6
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ........................................................................................... 65
2.6.1
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ...................................................................... 65
2.6.2
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 66
2.6.3
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ..................... 67
2.6.4
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ....................................................... 69
2.6.5
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 70
2.6.6
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................ 71
2.6.7
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................ 72
2.6.8
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ............... 73
2.6.9
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ................................................. 75
2.6.10
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)................................... 77
2.7
AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs ...................................................................................... 79
2.7.1
2.8
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................. 79
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs ..................................................................................... 82
2.8.1
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training .................................... 82
2.8.2
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 83
2.8.3
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
84
-2-
2.8.4
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ..................... 86
2.8.5
S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training............................................... 88
2.8.6
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ................................... 89
2.8.7
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 90
2.8.8
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
91
2.8.9
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ............................. 93
2.9
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs ............................................................................. 95
2.9.1
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training .................... 95
2.9.2
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................ 96
2.9.3
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training) ............................................................................................................................................ 97
2.9.4
2.10
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ..... 99
WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs ................................................................................................. 101
2.10.1
WLAN Technology Basics Training ................................................................................................ 101
2.10.2
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................................................ 102
2.10.3
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 103
2.10.4
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ........................... 104
2.10.5
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................... 106
2.10.6
WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training ....................................................................... 108
2.11
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs .......................................................................................................... 109
2.11.1
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 109
2.11.2
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 110
2.11.3
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training .............................................................................111
2.11.4
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training ...................................................................................... 112
2.11.5
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training ...................................................................... 113
2.12
PTN Products Training Programs ........................................................................................................... 114
2.12.1
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................ 114
2.12.2
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 115
2.12.3
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 116
2.12.4
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 117
2.12.5
PTN Network Planning and Design Training .................................................................................. 118
2.13
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs ..................................................... 119
2.13.1
eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 119
2.13.2
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ... 120
2.13.3
eSight WLAN Management Training .............................................................................................. 121
2.13.4
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training ...................................................................................... 122
2.13.5
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training ................................................................................... 123
2.13.6
eSight SLA Management Training.................................................................................................. 124
2.13.7
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training ...................................................................................... 125
2.13.8
eSight Smart Report Management Training ................................................................................... 126
2.13.9
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training ........................................................ 127
-3-
2.13.10
eSight Access Management Training ............................................................................................. 128
2.13.11
eSight Data Center Management Training ..................................................................................... 129
2.13.12
eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training ....................................................................... 130
2.13.13
eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training ............................................................................ 131
2.14
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs ...................................................................................... 132
2.14.1
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training ................................................................................ 132
2.14.2
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training ................................................................................ 133
2.14.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training.......................................................................................... 134
2.14.4
Data Center Network Design Training............................................................................................ 135
2.15
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs ......................................................................... 136
2.15.1
2.16
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training .................................................................................. 136
Security Technology Topic Training Programs ........................................................................................ 138
2.16.1
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training ........................................................................................... 138
2.16.2
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training ........................................................................................... 139
2.16.3
Firewall Advanced Technology Training ......................................................................................... 140
2.17
Firewall Training Programs..................................................................................................................... 141
2.17.1
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ...................... 141
2.17.2
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ........................................ 142
2.17.3
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ............................... 143
2.17.4
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include USG6600 Next
Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ......................................................................... 144
2.17.5
USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training .......................................... 145
2.17.6
USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include High-end Firewall
Installation and Commissioning Training) ......................................................................................................... 146
2.17.7
USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) .......... 147
2.17.8
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................................................... 148
2.17.9
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and Commissioning Training)
149
2.18
Security Management Software Training Programs ............................................................................... 150
2.18.1
Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training ....................................................... 150
2.18.2
Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM Installation and
Commissioning Training) .................................................................................................................................. 151
2.18.3
2.19
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................................... 152
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs .......................................................................... 153
2.19.1
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................. 153
2.19.2
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and Commissioning Training) . 154
2.20
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs ......................................................... 155
2.20.1
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training..................................................................... 155
2.20.2
Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 156
2.21
Security Planning and Design Training Programs .................................................................................. 157
2.21.1
Firewall Planning and Design Training ........................................................................................... 157
-4-
3
Enterprise IT Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 160
3.1
Enterprise IT Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 160
3.1.1
Storage Certification Training Path ................................................................................................ 160
3.1.2
Cloud Computing Certification Training Path ................................................................................. 161
3.1.3
Unified Storage Training Path ........................................................................................................ 162
3.1.4
NAS and Data Protection Training Path ......................................................................................... 163
3.1.5
Cloud Storage Training Path .......................................................................................................... 164
3.1.6
Server Products Training Path ....................................................................................................... 165
3.1.7
Cloud Computing Training Path ..................................................................................................... 166
3.1.8
Data Center Training Path ............................................................................................................. 167
3.2
List of Enterprise IT Training Programs .................................................................................................. 168
3.3
Storage Certification Training Programs................................................................................................. 171
3.3.1
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training.................................... 171
3.3.2
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training ......................................... 172
3.3.3
HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training .................................................... 173
3.3.4
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training........................................... 174
3.4
Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs ................................................................................. 175
3.4.1
3.5
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training ................................................. 175
IT Technology Foundation Training Programs ........................................................................................ 176
3.5.1
3.6
Storage Technology Foundation Training ....................................................................................... 176
IT Advanced Technology Training Programs .......................................................................................... 177
3.6.1
Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training ......................................................... 177
3.6.2
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training .................................................. 178
3.6.3
Backup Advanced Technology Training ......................................................................................... 179
3.7
Unified Storage Training Programs ........................................................................................................ 180
3.7.1
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training ... 180
3.7.2
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training
(Fast-Track) ...................................................................................................................................................... 182
3.7.3
T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and Management Training .............. 183
3.7.4
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....... 185
3.7.5
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment and Management
Training
187
3.7.6
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management Training ................... 188
3.7.7
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and Management Training ......... 189
3.8
NAS and Data Protection Training Programs ......................................................................................... 191
3.8.1
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training .................................... 191
3.8.2
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training .................................... 193
3.8.3
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training ............................. 194
3.8.4
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training............................................. 195
3.9
Cloud Storage Training Programs .......................................................................................................... 196
3.9.1
3.10
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training .............................. 196
Server Products Training Programs ....................................................................................................... 198
-5-
3.10.1
RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ................................................... 198
3.10.2
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 199
3.10.3
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ............................................. 200
3.10.4
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ............................................. 201
3.11
Cloud Computing Training Programs ..................................................................................................... 202
3.11.1
Desktop Cloud Solution(R2) Deployment and Management Training ............................................ 202
3.11.2
Desktop Cloud Solution(R3) Deployment and Management Training ............................................ 203
3.11.3
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 204
3.11.4
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training .................................................... 205
3.12
Data Center Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 206
3.12.1
Micro DC Deployment and Management Training ......................................................................... 206
3.12.2
ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 207
3.13
4
IT Design Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 208
3.13.1
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training ............................................................... 208
3.13.2
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training ....................................................... 209
3.13.3
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training .............................................................. 210
3.13.4
Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training .......................................................................... 211
3.13.5
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training ...................................... 212
Enterprise UC&C Training Courses ........................................................................................................................ 213
4.1
Enterprise UC&C Training Path .............................................................................................................. 213
4.1.1
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path ........................................................... 213
4.1.2
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path ......................................................... 214
4.1.3
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Path ........................ 215
4.1.4
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path ....................................................... 216
4.1.5
Contact Center Certification Training Path ..................................................................................... 217
4.1.6
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path ...................................... 218
4.1.7
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Training Path
219
4.1.8
Video Conference Certification Training Path ................................................................................ 220
4.2
List of Enterprise UC&C Training Programs ........................................................................................... 221
4.3
Certification Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 223
4.3.1
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration ............................. 223
4.3.2
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions .................................................... 224
4.3.3
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Protocol & Principal on Huawei Voice Solution ................................................ 225
4.3.4
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration .......................................... 226
4.3.5
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access Platform ......................... 227
4.3.6
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution ................................................ 228
4.3.7
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference ............................................... 229
4.3.8
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference ........................................... 231
4.3.9
HCS-Field-IVS training................................................................................................................... 233
4.4
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs ......................................................... 234
4.4.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ....................... 234
-6-
4.5
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs ........................ 236
4.5.1
4.6
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation .............................................. 236
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs ....................................................... 238
4.6.1
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Basic Configuration and Operation .............................................. 238
4.6.2
ESpace U2980 All in One Solution................................................................................................. 240
4.7
CC General Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 241
4.7.1
Contact Center Management and Monitoring ................................................................................ 241
4.7.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation ................................. 242
4.8
CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................ 243
4.8.1
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 243
4.8.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
245
4.9
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance
Training
247
4.9.1
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation ........................................................................................................ 247
4.9.2
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation) ............................................................................................................................ 249
4.10
VC Operation and Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 251
4.10.1
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and Maintenance .............................. 251
4.10.2
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation and Maintenance
253
4.10.3
4.11
5
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance ....................................................................... 254
Huawei eSpace IVS system operation and maintenance training programs .......................................... 255
4.11.1
Huawei eSpace IVS service management and routine maintenance documentation .................... 255
4.11.2
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training ............................ 256
Network Energy Training Courses .......................................................................................................................... 257
5.1
Network Energy Training Path ................................................................................................................ 257
5.1.1
Power Supply Training Path ........................................................................................................... 257
5.1.2
Data Center Facility Training Path ................................................................................................. 258
5.1.3
UPS Training Path ......................................................................................................................... 259
5.2
List of Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs ............................................................................ 260
5.3
Power Supply Training Programs ........................................................................................................... 261
5.3.1
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 261
5.3.2
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................... 262
5.3.3
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 263
5.3.4
PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training ....................................................... 264
5.4
Data Center Facility Training Programs.................................................................................................. 265
5.4.1
IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................... 265
-7-
5.4.2
IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 266
5.4.3
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 267
5.4.4
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training.............................................. 268
5.5
6
UPS Training Programs.......................................................................................................................... 269
5.5.1
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training..................................................................................... 269
5.5.2
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ................................................................. 270
Transmission Network Training Courses................................................................................................................. 271
6.1
Transmission Network Training Path ...................................................................................................... 271
6.1.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path ........................................................................ 271
6.1.2
Transmission Network Principle Training Path ............................................................................... 272
6.1.3
Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Path ........................................................... 273
6.1.4
MSTP Products Training Path(TDM) .............................................................................................. 274
6.1.5
MSTP Products Training Path(Packet) .......................................................................................... 275
6.1.6
MSTP Products Training Path(Packet+TDM) ................................................................................. 276
6.1.7
MSTP Products Training Path(OSN 500/550/580) ......................................................................... 277
6.1.8
MSTP Products Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000) .................................................... 278
6.1.9
WDM Products Training Path(OSN3800680088009800) ............................................................... 279
6.1.10
WDM Products Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet)) ........................................................ 280
6.1.11
WDM Products Training Path(OSN3800A6800A) .......................................................................... 281
6.1.12
WDM Products Training Path(BWS 1600G) .................................................................................. 282
6.1.13
RTN Products Training Path(RTN 900) .......................................................................................... 283
6.1.14
RTN Products Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002) .................................................... 284
6.1.15
RTN Products Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600) ......................................................................... 285
6.1.16
Transmission Network OSS Training Path ..................................................................................... 286
6.1.17
Planning and Design Training Path ................................................................................................ 287
6.1.18
Assessment and Optimization Training Path ................................................................................. 289
6.2
List of Training Program(s) for Transmission Network Project ................................................................ 290
6.3
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs ......................................................................... 296
6.3.1
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device Training.................. 296
6.3.2
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission Network Training ... 297
6.3.3
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission Network Training ...... 298
6.4
Transmission Network Principle Training Training Programs ................................................................. 299
6.4.1
SDH Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................ 299
6.4.2
WDM Fundamental Training .......................................................................................................... 300
6.4.3
Ethernet Fundamental Training ...................................................................................................... 301
6.4.4
ASON Fundamental Training ......................................................................................................... 302
6.4.5
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training .............................................................................................. 303
6.5
Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Training Programs ............................................. 304
6.5.1
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training.......................................................................................... 304
6.5.2
40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology ........................................................................................... 305
6.6
MSTP Products Training Training Programs .......................................................................................... 306
6.6.1
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training ............................................................... 306
-8-
6.6.2
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training .......................................................................... 307
6.6.3
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training............................................... 308
6.6.4
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training ..................................... 309
6.6.5
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training .............................................. 310
6.6.6
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................... 312
6.6.7
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training..................................... 314
6.6.8
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training ....................................................... 316
6.6.9
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training .............................................. 317
6.6.10
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training ....................................................... 318
6.6.11
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................. 320
6.6.12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training .............................................. 322
6.6.13
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................... 324
6.6.14
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training ............................................. 325
6.6.15
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................... 327
6.6.16
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 329
6.6.17
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 330
6.6.18
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................. 331
6.6.19
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................... 332
6.6.20
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 333
6.6.21
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 334
6.6.22
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 335
6.6.23
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training .................................................................................... 336
6.6.24
OptiX Metro 1000 1st Line Maintenance Training .......................................................................... 337
6.6.25
OptiX Metro 1000 2nd Line Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 338
6.7
WDM Products Training Training Programs ........................................................................................... 339
6.7.1
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training ..................................................... 339
6.7.2
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training .................................................................................. 340
6.7.3
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training ......................................................... 341
6.7.4
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................... 343
6.7.5
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) NMC Operation Training ........................................................ 344
6.7.6
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................. 345
6.7.7
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................... 347
6.7.8
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................ 349
6.7.9
OptiX OSN 68008800 100G O&M Training .................................................................................... 351
6.7.10
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training ........................................................... 352
6.7.11
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 353
6.7.12
OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................... 354
6.7.13
OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 356
6.7.14
OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training ............................................................................................ 358
6.7.15
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Field Deployment Training ..................................................................... 359
6.7.16
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................................... 360
6.7.17
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................................. 361
-9-
6.7.18
OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training.......... 362
6.7.19
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training ...... 364
6.7.20
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training .................................................................................. 366
6.7.21
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 367
6.7.22
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training ................................................................................. 368
6.7.23
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 369
6.7.24
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 371
6.7.25
OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training ............................................................. 373
6.7.26
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................. 374
6.8
RTN 900 Products Training Programs.................................................................................................... 375
6.8.1
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training
(Hybrid) .............................................. 375
6.8.2
(Packet) .............................................. 377
6.8.3
(Hybrid+Packet) ................................. 378
6.8.4
OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 380
6.8.5
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid) ............................................................... 381
6.8.6
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Packet) .............................................................. 382
6.8.7
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet) .................................................. 383
6.8.8
OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training.............................................................................. 385
6.8.9
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................. 386
6.8.10
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................................ 387
6.8.11
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................... 388
6.8.12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................ 389
6.8.13
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................................ 390
6.8.14
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................... 391
6.9
6.9.1
OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training .............................................................. 393
6.9.2
6.9.3
OptiX RTN 300 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 395
6.10
6.10.1
OptiX RTN 600 Installation and Commissioning Training .............................................................. 396
6.10.2
6.10.3
OptiX RTN 600 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 399
6.11
Transmission Network OSS Training Training Programs ....................................................................... 402
6.11.1
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only) ............................................... 402
6.11.2
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training ...................................................................................... 403
6.11.3
iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training.................................................................. 404
6.11.4
OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training ................................................................................... 405
6.11.5
OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training .............................................................................. 406
6.11.6
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training ........................................................................... 407
6.11.7
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training ................................................................................... 408
6.12
Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Training Programs .............................................. 409
6.12.1
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training .................................................................................... 409
- 10 -
6.12.2
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training ........................................................................................... 410
6.12.3
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training ................................................................................ 411
6.12.4
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training ......................................... 412
6.12.5
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training .................................................................. 413
6.12.6
OptiX WDM Network Design Training ............................................................................................ 414
6.12.7
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training ...................................................................................... 415
6.12.8
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training ....................................... 416
6.12.9
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training ................................................................................. 417
6.12.10
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)....................................................................... 418
6.12.11
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid) ....................................................................... 419
6.12.12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid) .......................................................... 420
6.12.13
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training ................................................................... 421
6.12.14
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training ................................................................ 422
6.12.15
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training ................................................. 423
6.12.16
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training .................................................... 424
6.13
Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Training Programs ................................ 425
6.13.1
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training ..................................................................................... 425
6.13.2
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training ..................................................................................... 426
6.13.3
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training ........................................................ 427
6.13.4
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training .................................................................................... 428
6.13.5
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training ................................................................................... 429
6.13.6
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training ...................................................................................... 430
6.13.7
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training ............................................................................... 431
6.14
7
Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Programs .............................................. 432
6.14.1
OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training ..................................................................................... 432
6.14.2
OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training ..................................................................................... 433
Access Network Training Courses .......................................................................................................................... 434
7.1
Access Network Training Path ............................................................................................................... 434
7.1.1
Principle Training Path ................................................................................................................... 434
7.1.2
Evolution and Trends Training Path ............................................................................................... 435
7.1.3
MA5600T Products Training Path .................................................................................................. 436
7.1.4
FTTx PON Products Training Path(GPON) .................................................................................... 437
7.1.5
FTTx PON Products Training Path(ODN) ...................................................................................... 438
7.1.6
DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path ......................................................................................... 439
7.1.7
DSLAM MA5100 Training Path ...................................................................................................... 440
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.1.10
MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path ................................................................................. 443
7.1.11
MSAN UA5000 Training Path ........................................................................................................ 444
7.1.12
HONET Series Training Path ......................................................................................................... 445
7.1.13
BITS Training Path ......................................................................................................................... 446
7.1.14
OSS N2000 Training Path .............................................................................................................. 447
- 11 -
7.1.15
OSS N2510 Training Path .............................................................................................................. 448
7.2
List of Access Network Training Programs ............................................................................................. 449
7.3
Principle Training Programs ................................................................................................................... 453
7.3.1
IP Basis Training ............................................................................................................................ 453
7.3.2
Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training ......................................................................... 454
7.3.3
IPTV (IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training ................................................................................. 455
7.3.4
VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training ..................................................................................................... 456
7.3.5
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training ........................................................ 457
7.3.6
VDSL2 Fundamental Training ........................................................................................................ 458
7.3.7
GPON Fundamental Training ......................................................................................................... 459
7.3.8
GPON Fundamentals(WBT) .......................................................................................................... 460
7.4
Evolution and Trends Training Programs ............................................................................................... 461
7.4.1
FTTx System Overview(WBT) ....................................................................................................... 461
7.4.2
FTTx Network Overview Training ................................................................................................... 462
7.4.3
FTTO Solution Overview Training .................................................................................................. 463
7.4.4
FTTM Solution Overview Training .................................................................................................. 464
7.4.5
xDSL Access Network Overview Training ...................................................................................... 465
7.4.6
ODN Overview Training ................................................................................................................. 466
7.4.7
10G/40G PON Network Overview Training .................................................................................... 467
7.4.8
Vectoring Overview Training .......................................................................................................... 468
7.4.9
G.fast Overview Training ................................................................................................................ 469
7.4.10
iODN Solution Overview Training................................................................................................... 470
7.4.11
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training ................................................................................................. 471
7.4.12
MSO CMTS Solution Training ........................................................................................................ 472
7.5
Planning Training Programs ................................................................................................................... 473
7.5.1
FTTx Planning Training .................................................................................................................. 473
7.5.2
ODN Planning Training .................................................................................................................. 474
7.5.3
iODN Planning Training ................................................................................................................. 475
7.5.4
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training ................................................................... 476
7.5.5
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training ........................................................... 477
7.5.6
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training .................................................................................................. 478
7.6
MA5600T Products Training Programs .................................................................................................. 479
7.6.1
MA5600T Hardware Installation Training ....................................................................................... 479
7.6.2
MA5600T Commissioning Training ................................................................................................ 480
7.6.3
MA5600T 1st Line Maintenance Training ....................................................................................... 481
7.7
FTTx PON Products Training Programs ................................................................................................. 482
7.7.1
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................................... 482
7.7.2
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................................. 484
7.7.3
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................... 486
7.7.4
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 488
7.7.5
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 489
7.7.6
FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 490
- 12 -
7.7.7
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training .................................................. 491
7.7.8
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training ............................................. 492
7.7.9
U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training......................................................................................... 493
7.7.10
U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training.................................................................................................... 494
7.7.11
U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training .............................................................. 495
7.7.12
ODN Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................................................... 496
7.7.13
ODN Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................................... 497
7.7.14
iODN Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 498
7.7.15
iODN NMS Administrator Training.................................................................................................. 499
7.7.16
MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 500
7.7.17
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 501
7.8
DSLAM Products Training Programs...................................................................................................... 503
7.8.1
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................. 503
7.8.2
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................... 505
7.8.3
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 506
7.8.4
DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 507
7.8.5
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 508
7.8.6
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training ........................................................... 509
7.8.7
7.8.8
7.8.9
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 512
7.8.10
7.8.11
7.8.12
7.9
MSAN Products Training Programs ....................................................................................................... 516
7.9.1
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training ...................................... 516
7.9.2
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training ................................................ 517
7.9.3
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................ 518
7.9.4
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training .............................................................................. 519
7.9.5
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training ....................................................................................... 520
7.9.6
MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 521
7.9.7
MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 522
7.9.8
MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 523
7.9.9
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 524
7.9.10
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 525
7.10
BITS Training Programs ......................................................................................................................... 526
7.10.1
SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 526
7.10.2
SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 527
7.10.3
SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 528
7.11
OSS Training Programs ......................................................................................................................... 529
7.11.1
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .............................................................................. 529
7.11.2
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 530
- 13 -
8
7.11.3
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) ....................................................................... 531
7.11.4
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)...................................................................... 532
7.11.5
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN) ....................................................................... 533
7.11.6
iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training ....................................................................... 534
7.11.7
iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training ...................................................................... 535
7.11.8
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training ...................................................................................... 536
7.11.9
iManager N2510 Administration Training ....................................................................................... 537
GSM Training Courses............................................................................................................................................ 538
8.1
GSM Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 538
8.2
List of GSM Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 539
8.3
GSM Product Technology Training Programs ........................................................................................ 540
8.3.1
GSM-R BSS basic O&M training (BSC6000 V901R013) ..................................................................... 540
8.3.2
GSM-R BSS O&M Training (BSC6000V901R013) (Including GSM-R BSS Basic O&M Training) ......... 541
8.4
GSM RNP/RNO Training Programs ....................................................................................................... 543
8.4.1
GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training....................................................................... 543
8.4.2
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ................................................................... 544
8.4.3
BSC6900/BSC6910 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ................................................... 545
8.4.4
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training .......................................................... 546
8.4.5
GSM Indoor Coverage Training ..................................................................................................... 547
8.4.6
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training ........................................................................................... 548
8.4.7
GSM BSS15.0 Feature Delta Training ........................................................................................... 549
8.4.8
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training............................................................. 550
8.4.9
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training .......................................................................................... 551
8.5
9
GPRS/EDGE RNP/RNO Training Programs .......................................................................................... 552
8.5.1
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training ................................ 552
8.5.2
GSM BSC6900/BSC6910 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training ....... 553
8.5.3
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training .................................................................................................... 554
8.5.4
Evolved EDGE Training ................................................................................................................. 555
8.5.5
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training ............................................................................. 556
CDMA Training Courses ......................................................................................................................................... 557
9.1
CDMA Training Path ............................................................................................................................... 557
9.2
List of CDMA Product Technology Training Programs ............................................................................ 558
9.3
CDMA Training Programs....................................................................................................................... 559
9.3.1
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training ................................................................. 559
9.3.2
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................. 560
9.3.3
CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training ................................................................................... 561
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Advanced Training .............................................................................. 564
9.3.7
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training ......................................................... 565
9.3.8
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training ...................................................................... 566
9.3.9
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training .................................... 567
- 14 -
10
9.3.10
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training ................................................. 568
9.3.11
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training ........................................................... 569
9.3.12
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning................................................................................ 570
9.3.13
9.3.14
CDMA-LTE Network Construction Solutions Training .................................................................... 572
9.3.15
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Network Topics Optimization Training ................................................ 573
9.3.16
CDMA BSS IPRAN Training ........................................................................................................... 574
eLTE Training Courses ........................................................................................................................................... 575
10.1
eLTE Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 575
10.2
List of eLTE Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 575
10.3
eLTE
10.3.1
11
12
Product Technology Training ...................................................................................................... 576
eNodeB O&M Training..................................................................................................................... 576
Wireless OSS Training Courses ............................................................................................................................. 577
11.1
Wireless OSS Training Path ................................................................................................................... 577
11.2
List of Wireless OSS Training Programs ................................................................................................ 578
11.3
M2000 Training Programs ...................................................................................................................... 579
11.3.1
iManager M2000V200R013 System Administration Training(Sun) ................................................ 579
11.3.2
iManager M2000V200R013 System Administration Training(ATAE Cluster).................................. 581
11.3.3
iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 582
11.3.4
iManager M2000V200R013 New Features Training ...................................................................... 583
11.3.5
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training(Sun) ................................................ 584
11.3.6
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training(ATAE Cluster).................................. 586
11.3.7
11.3.8
11.3.9
iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration Training(Sun) ................................................. 589
11.3.10
iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration Training(ATAE Cluster) .................................. 591
11.3.11
11.3.12
PS Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................... 594
12.1
PS Training Path .................................................................................................................................... 594
12.2
List of PS Training Programs.................................................................................................................. 594
12.3
PS Training Programs ............................................................................................................................ 597
12.3.1
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training ........................................................................................ 597
12.3.2
EPC Principle Fundamental Training ............................................................................................. 598
12.3.3
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training ...................................................................................... 599
12.3.4
USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G ) ........................................ 600
12.3.5
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G) ....................................................................... 601
12.3.6
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) ................................................ 602
12.3.7
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) ............................................................... 603
12.3.8
USN9810 Delta and new feature Training ...................................................................................... 604
12.3.9
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training ............................................................................. 605
12.3.10
The Difference between ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training .............................................................. 606
- 15 -
12.3.11
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G) .................................................. 607
12.3.12
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G) .................................................................... 608
12.3.13
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) ............................................. 609
12.3.14
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) ...................................................................... 610
12.3.15
UGW9811 Delta and new feature Training ..................................................................................... 611
12.3.16
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (Windows) ............................................................. 612
12.3.17
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (UNIX) ................................................................... 613
12.3.18
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA) ................................................................... 614
12.3.19
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training ................................................................................................ 615
12.3.20
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training ............................................................................ 616
12.3.21
EPC Alarm Monitoring and Management Training ......................................................................... 617
12.3.22
PS Performance Monitoring and Management Training ................................................................ 618
12.3.23
PS Performance Analysis Training ................................................................................................. 619
12.3.24
EPC Performance Monitoring and Management Training .............................................................. 620
12.3.25
PS Emergency Recovery Training ................................................................................................. 621
12.3.26
EPC Emergency Recovery Training............................................................................................... 622
12.3.27
GUL Convergence Training............................................................................................................ 623
12.3.28
EPC VOLTE Solution Training (CSFB) .......................................................................................... 624
12.3.29
EPC VOLTE Solution Training (SRVCC)........................................................................................ 625
12.3.30
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training ......................................................................... 626
12.3.31
PS IPv6 Feature Training ............................................................................................................... 627
12.3.32
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training .............................................................................................. 628
12.3.33
MME POOL Training ...................................................................................................................... 629
12.3.34
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training .................................................................................. 630
12.3.35
PS QOS Training ........................................................................................................................... 631
12.3.36
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training ...................................................................................... 632
12.3.37
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training .................................................... 633
12.3.38
PS Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training ...................................................... 634
12.3.39
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................... 635
12.3.40
EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training ....................................................................................... 636
12.3.41
EPC Signaling Analysis Training .................................................................................................... 637
12.3.42
EPC Troubleshooting Training ....................................................................................................... 638
12.3.43
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training ................................................................................. 639
12.3.44
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training .............................................................. 640
12.3.45
EPC Network Planning and Design Training .................................................................................. 641
12.3.46
iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 642
12.3.47
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 643
12.3.48
uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 644
12.3.49
WASN Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................. 645
12.3.50
MAG9811 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 646
12.3.51
TGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 647
12.3.52
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 648
- 16 -
13
14
12.3.53
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 649
12.3.54
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training ....................................................... 650
12.3.55
PS Nastar Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 651
12.3.56
PS PRS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 652
12.3.57
HCNA LTE HUAWEI Certification................................................................................................... 653
12.3.58
HCNP EPC HUAWEI Certification ................................................................................................. 655
12.3.59
HCIE EPC HUAWEI Certification ................................................................................................... 657
Mobile Softswitch(GSM/UMTS) Training Courses .................................................................................................. 658
13.1
WCDMA-CS Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 658
13.2
List of Mobile Softswitch(GSM/UMTS) Training Programs ..................................................................... 659
13.3
GSM-R Training Programs ..................................................................................................................... 660
13.3.1
GTSOFTX3000 Product Training ................................................................................................... 660
13.3.2
GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training............................................................................................... 662
13.3.3
GSM-R Feature Training ................................................................................................................ 663
Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Courses ......................................................................................................... 664
14.1
Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Path ............................................................................................... 664
14.2
List of Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Programs ............................................................................ 665
14.3
CSOFTX3000 Training ........................................................................................................................... 666
14.3.1
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training ............................................................................... 666
14.3.2
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 667
14.3.3
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training ......................................................................................................... 669
14.3.4
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 670
14.3.5
CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 672
14.3.6
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training......................................................................................... 673
14.3.7
CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training .......................................................................... 674
14.4
15
16
UMG8900 Training ................................................................................................................................. 675
14.4.1
CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................ 675
14.4.2
CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 677
C＆C08 Training Courses ....................................................................................................................................... 678
15.1
C＆C08 Training Path ............................................................................................................................ 678
15.2
List of C＆C08 Training Programs .......................................................................................................... 679
15.3
C&C08 Training Programs ..................................................................................................................... 680
15.3.1
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 680
15.3.2
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............... 681
15.3.3
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 682
IMS Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................. 683
16.1
IMS Training Path ................................................................................................................................... 683
16.2
List of IMS Training Programs ................................................................................................................ 685
16.3
List of IMS Training Programs ................................................................................................................ 687
16.3.1
IMS System Overview Training ...................................................................................................... 687
16.3.2
Core Network Technology Evolution Training ................................................................................ 688
16.3.3
IMS Overview Training ................................................................................................................... 689
- 17 -
17
16.3.4
IMS ATCA Platform (Hardware/CGP) Training ............................................................................... 690
16.3.5
CSC3300/MRP6600 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................ 691
16.3.6
HSS9820 (IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 692
16.3.7
ENS Operation and Maintenance Training..................................................................................... 693
16.3.8
IMS Service Provisioning (SPG2800) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 694
16.3.9
iCG9815 (offline charging) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 695
16.3.10
UGC3200 (MGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 696
16.3.11
UMG8900(IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 697
16.3.12
ATS9900 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 698
16.3.13
OSG9930&Convergent Centrex Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 699
16.3.14
IMS Convergent Conference Operation and Maintenance(MediaX3600) Training ........................ 700
16.3.15
SE2300 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 701
16.3.16
16.3.17
SoftX3000 (AGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 703
16.3.18
UAC3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 704
16.3.19
RCS9880 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 705
16.3.20
iManager M2000 (IMS) Client Application Operation and Maintenance Training ........................... 706
16.3.21
IMS Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training ............................................................... 707
16.3.22
IMS Signaling Analysis Training ..................................................................................................... 708
16.3.23
IMS Number Analysis Training ....................................................................................................... 709
16.3.24
IMS Network Key Technology Training .......................................................................................... 710
16.3.25
IMS Maintenance in-depth and Advanced Troubleshooting Training ............................................. 711
16.3.26
SE2600 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 712
16.3.27
IMS IP Technology Training ........................................................................................................... 713
16.3.28
IMS Network Migration Technology Training .................................................................................. 714
16.3.29
IMS Network Planning and Design Training ................................................................................... 715
16.3.30
VoLTE Technology Training............................................................................................................ 716
16.3.31
VoLTE In-depth Key Technology Training ...................................................................................... 717
NGN & STP Training Courses................................................................................................................................. 718
17.1
NGN & STP Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 718
17.1.1
NGN Training Path ......................................................................................................................... 718
17.1.2
STP Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 721
17.2
List of NGN & STP Training Programs ................................................................................................... 722
17.3
NGN Training Programs ......................................................................................................................... 724
17.3.1
NGN System Overview Training .................................................................................................... 724
17.3.2
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 725
17.3.3
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 726
17.3.4
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 727
17.3.5
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 728
17.3.6
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training.................................................................... 729
17.3.7
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................... 730
17.3.8
- 18 -
17.3.9
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 732
17.3.10
IAD Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................................................... 733
17.3.11
U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................. 734
17.3.12
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 735
17.3.13
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 736
17.3.14
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 737
17.3.15
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 738
17.3.16
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 739
17.3.17
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 740
17.3.18
SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 741
17.3.19
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 742
17.4
18
STP Training Programs .......................................................................................................................... 743
17.4.1
STP Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 743
17.4.2
SANEX Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 744
17.4.3
SPS V3 (DRA) Operation and Maintenance Training..................................................................... 745
CN OSS Training Courses ...................................................................................................................................... 746
18.1
CN OSS Training Path ........................................................................................................................... 746
18.1.1
iManager M2000 Training Path ...................................................................................................... 746
18.2
List of CN OSS Training Programs ......................................................................................................... 747
18.3
iManager M2000 Training Programs ...................................................................................................... 748
18.3.1
iManager M2000V2 Client Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 748
18.3.2
iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (SUN) ............................................................ 749
18.3.3
iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (HP) ............................................................... 751
18.3.4
iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster) ............................................... 753
18.3.5
iManager PRS Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 754
- 19 -
1 Huawei Training&Certification Service
1.1 ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution
With the constant development of the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, IP, IT, and CT
applications gradually converge. New technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT) and mobile broadband will bring
an infinite number of opportunities to the ICT industry. The growing convergence of ICT technologies will trigger
tremendous industry transformations, challenging the knowledge system and skills of those working in the industry,
"Knowledge convergence, cross-field skills, and standards evolution" have become new criteria for assessing
qualified ICT talents.
Huawei launches its training solution covering all ICT technical fields. Huawei developed this training solution by
leveraging its years of experience in developing ICT talent and its deep insight into industry trends. This solution fully
encompasses Huawei's Cloud-Pipe-Device convergence technology and covers IP, IT, CT, and ICT convergence
technologies. It is the only training program of its kind in the industry that covers all ICT technical fields. Additionally,
this training solution is a sophisticated training program that covers new technologies, new ideas, and new industry
trends, leading the way in ICT technical certification to help enterprises enhance the all-round development.
1.2 Huawei Training Service
 Product technical training (Capability development based on customer positions and learning levels)
The product technical training targets product users and enables them to understand product positioning, functions,
features, and use methods (installation, deployment, configuration, and maintenance) and perform maintenance
when the equipment breaks down.
 Career certification (Building Huawei's talent ecological chain)
The career certification targets a wide range of users, teaches common theories and skills, and equips trainees with
the theoretical foundations and skills required to enter specific career fields. It is the foundation of product technical
training and specialist certification.
 Specialist certification (Improving the capabilities of partners)
The specialist certification targets channel partners, provides professional skills for specific positions, and provides
channel partners with the support and resources required. It verifies the capabilities of partners required in specific
1
fields through certification exams to help partners sharpen their competitive edge.
1.3 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei
products and solutions
Training services as an important part of Huawei solutions, relying on the platform of Huawei overall, focus on
human capacity development needs, to help customer improve their employees' professional skills, team capacity
and organizational performance, to be the most reliable partner for customer.
Huawei relying on a deep understanding of the ICT industry, based on the service lifecycle PDIOI (Plan, Design,
Implement, Operate and Improve) model, through a series of modular product training, technical topics, solution
training to meet government, power, financial, energy, transportation, health care, education and enterprise ICT
employee cultivation requirement, and help customers successfully deploy, operation and optimization of Huawei's
products and solutions.
Huawei training services provide customers with professional, practical, effectiveness learning and development
solutions; learning brings capacity development, the capacity development bring enterprise growth

Through a full range of product training to help customer quickly understand the product characteristics,
become competent in using;

Through the matching technical topic and product character, grasp the products and solutions deployment, and
operation and maintenance capability;

Through simulating real solutions scenarios training, fast, accurate, practical way to enhance customer.
The figure below shows that based on the service lifecycle PDIOI model, Huawei provide matching product and
2
knowledge training solution, including installation and commissioning, operation and maintenance, advanced
technical topic and planning and design training. Each stage in the full life cycle of PDIOI,Huawei has different kinds
of innovative patented tools and standard processes during each stage of full lifecycle, which can ensure we deliver
the service to you with high quality and efficiency and save your cost.
3
1.4 Learning Path
For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;
After you master general technology, you can select the corresponding product operation and maintenance training
base on specific product;
After you master the basic technical and familiar with the product characteristics, you can choose the advanced
technical training and planning&design training for further enhance.
Plan & Design
Planning and Design Training
XXX Design Training
Xd
Implement & Operate
Improve
Operation and Maintenance Training
Advanced Technology Training
XXX Product Installation and
Commissioning Training
Xd
XXX Product Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
Xd
XXX Advanced Technology
Training
Xd
XXX Product Features
Training
Xd
XXX Product Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including
the Basic O/M Training)
Xd
Fast-Track
XXX Product Operation and
Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Xd
Technical Fundamental
Training
Xd
4
1.5 Huawei's Career Certification
 Huawei Certified Network Associate (HCNA)
The HCNA certification validates knowledge and skills
required for the basic configuration and maintenance of small
and midsize networks. After passing the HCNA certification,
you demonstrate (1) a preliminary understanding of small and
midsize networks, including common technologies for small
and midsize networks, and (2) the abilities to assist in
designing small and midsize networks and implementing
design using Huawei's equipment.
 Huawei Certified Network Professional (HCNP)
The HCNP certification validates knowledge and skills
required for the building and management of small and
midsize networks. After passing the HCNP certification, you
demonstrate (1) an all-round and in-depth understanding of
small and midsize networks, (2) mastery of general
technologies for small and midsize networks, and (3) the
abilities to independently design small and midsize networks
and implement this design using Huawei's equipment.
 Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert (HCIE)
The HCIE certification validates knowledge and skills required for the building, optimization, and management of
midsize and large complex networks. After passing the HCIE certification, you demonstrate (1) an all-round and
in-depth understanding of midsize and large complex networks, (2) mastery of technologies for midsize and large
complex networks, and (3) the abilities to independently design various complex networks and implement this design
using Huawei's equipment.
 After passing Huawei's career certification, trainees will possess technical theories and related skills, and master
the following:
 How technologies and protocols are incorporated into Huawei's products and solutions
 The knowledge and skills required for deploying, operating, and maintaining networks using Huawei's products
and solutions
5
1.6 Training Instructors
Huawei instructor: More than 500 full time instructors, 70% of them are 10 years working experience on developing,
project management and excellent teaching skills.
Huawei Authorized Learning Partner (HALP) instructor: HALP refers to a professional training organization that is
authorized by Huawei to implement Huawei's product Training Courses under Huawei's supervision and
management after passing its assessment. The HCSI refers to an instructor who is certificated by Huawei and
employed by an HALP, Authorized Learning Partner information Query click
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi%5Bid%5D=_trainingsearch&navi%5Bt%5D=
1349689093661&params%5Btab%5D=tab_org
1.7 Training Methods
For the convenience of customer, Huawei and HALP may offer on-site training, localize training, centralize training
and E-Learning;

Centralized training: Face-to-face training in authorized training partner or in Huawei training center can be
more comprehensive, in-depth grasp of Huawei's products and technical knowledge and skills.

Localize training: Localized face-to-face training in the partner lab, training courses should be partner demand
design, has a strong relevance and timeliness.

On-site training: on-site face-to-face training focused on hardware installation, routine maintenance, practical
and targeted content.

E-Learning Training: can get a quick, convenient learning service by the electronic platform
6
1.8 Huawei online learning center (Learning Website)
Huawei online learning center (Learning Website), provides rich teaching resources, where enterprise customers,
partners and ICT practitioners can enjoy interactive and customized learning services anytime and anywhere.
1.8.1
How to register for a website account?
First, visit to http://learning.huawei.com/en.
Second, click "log in", then click "Register Now" and fill in information: ①Account, which is recommended to be the
same with the registered e-mail; ②E-mail, which must be your own e-mail you use in your work.
Third, login your email and activate the account. Then a Huawei official website account is registered successfully.
1.8.2
How to get online learning resource?
On learning website, users can download Huawei official training materials, learn e-learning courses, join in Live
Virtual Class, and download eNSP (Enterprise Network Simulation Platform) which can not only simulate single
router or switch device but also large network to do some.
On support website, users can get product support and cases, download software and tools, and interact and
communicate with experts.
1) Download Training Materials
Download E-course list which is updated monthly, and you can get the download address of training materials.
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/bbs/10150675.html
2）Learn E-Learning course online
Log in website and find out the E-learning course needed, then click "play video" to start learning.
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
3）Join in Live Virtual Class
Join in LVC on class time:
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
4）Download eNSP
Download address：
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/softdownload?pid=9017384&idAbsPath=fixnode01|7919710|9856717|792312
3|9858914|9017384
5）Download product documentation
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=productsupport
6）Browse Cases and Technical Notes
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=servicescenter
7）Download software
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=softwaredownload
8）Download Tools
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/toolsinfo
9）Get help on Support Community
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/
7
1.8.3
Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website
Frequently-Use
Website
d Function
How to find
training
http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-01
Find Huawei training courses, know more about the course content, training
duration……
How to find the
training plan
Find the Training Plan provide by Huawei and Huawei Learning Partners
How to find
HALPs
Find Huawei Authorized Learning Partners, know more about the contact
methods.
How to
participate in
certification
training
Know more about Huawei Certification Training, such as how to participate.
How to
participate in
certification
Know more about the process of certification such as how to schedule exam ……
Description of the
access to
Learning website
For more functions, please visit “Website Help”:
8
2 Enterprise IP Training Courses
2.1 Enterprise IP Training Path
2.1.1
Routing and Switching Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN
Implementing Enterprise
Routing Network
6d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
Implementing Enterprise
Switching Network
4d
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Huawei Networking
Technology and Device
10d
Associate
Elective Guide

Follow the parts to learn.
9
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP
Improving Enterprise
Network Performance
5d
2.1.2
WLAN Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Associate
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to
Medium-sized Business WLAN
5d
Elective Guide

HCNA(HCDA) or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.
10
2.1.3
Security Certification Training Path
Expert
1d
Professional
ssional
HCNP-Security-CISN
Constructing Infrastructure
of Security Network
5d
HCNP-Security-CTSS
Constructing Terminal
Security System
5d
HCNA-Security-CBSN
Constructing Basic
Security Network
Associate
Elective Guide:

HCNP-Security-CSSN
Constructing Service
Security Network
Follow the paths to learn
11
5d
5d
2.1.4
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path
HCNA (HCDA)
Huawei Certified Network Associate
8d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)
Huawei Certified Network Professional
- Routing and Switching
15d
Huawei Routing and
Switching Field Engineer
Training
5d
Huawei Certified Routing and
Switching Field Engineer
Advanced Technology
Training
Routing and Switching Expert
25d
HCIE-RS
Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert
- Routing and Switching
15d
Elective Guide

HCNA(HCDA) is required and HCNP-RS(HCDP) is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer
Training.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
12
2.1.5
IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Network Technology
Fundamental Training
1d
Huawei VRP System
Training
1d
IP Technology Fundamentals
Training (Fast-Track)
5d
Enterprise LAN
Technology Training
Enterprise WAN
Technology Training
2d
5d
Enterprise Network Engineer
Enterprise IP Routing
Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
5d
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technologies Training
Enterprise IP VPN
5d
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technical Expert
Enterprise QoS
Enterprise MPLS VPN
5d
Enterprise IP VPN
Technical Expert
5d
Enterprise MPLS TE
Enterprise HA
1d
Enterprise QoS
Technical Expert
3d
1d
Enterprise HA
Technical Expert
Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert
Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert
Elective Guide

HCNP-RS(HCDP) or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training programs.
13
2.1.6
NE Routers Training Path
Plan & Design
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
NE Routers Installation and
Advanced Technology
Training
1d
1d
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
25d
NE Routers Basic Operation
1d
2d
2d
NE Routers Operation and
10d
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
1d
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service
Routers Operation and
5d
Fast-Track
NE Routers Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

14
2.1.7
AR G3 Routers Training Path
Plan & Design
Outlines Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
AR G3 Routers Installation and
1d
1d
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation
2d
2d
AR G3 Routers Operation and
10d
Design Training
Training
Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
AR G3 Routers Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
5d
14d
Elective Guide



15
2.1.8
AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path
Plan & Design
Outlines Training
1d
Implement & Operate
Improve
AR Series Industrial Routers
Training
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Design Training
1d
Training
2d
Training
1d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide


16
2.1.9
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Chassis Switches
(S97/S93/S77) Installation and
1d
1d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)
Basic Operation and
2d
2d
Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
10d
Outlines Training
Design Training
Training
Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
S12700 Series Agile Switches
Training
3d
Fast-Track
5d
Campus Switches (S series)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide



17
2.1.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)
Installation and Commissioning
Training
1d
1d
Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
2d
Training (Including the Basic
O/M Training)
5d
Outlines Training
Design Training
Training
Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
Campus Switches (S series)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide



18
2.1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Data Center Switches
(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
1d
Data Center Switches (CE128/
CE68/CE58) Basic Operation
2d
2d
CE68/CE58) Operation and
10d
Outlines Training
Design Training
Training
Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
CE68/CE58) Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide



19
2.1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path
Plan & Design
WLAN Planning and Design
Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
WLAN Installation and
1d
5d
WLAN Basic Operation and
2d
WLAN Operation and
5d
Chassis Switches WLAN
Features (ACU) Operation and
5d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
WLAN Technology Basics
Training
2d
Elective Guide


20
2.1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
ME60 Products 1st Line
Outlines Training
Advanced Technology
Training
1d
1d
ME60 Products 2nd Line
Design Training
25d
ME60 Products
Troubleshooting Training
10d
1d
5d
ME60 Products IPTV Service
Features Training
Training
4d
2d
Training
iManager U2000 ME60 Product
Operation Training
2d
1d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
21
2.1.14 PTN Product Training Path
Plan & Design
PTN Network Planning and
Design Training
3d
Implement & Operate
Improve
PTN Products Installation and
2d
PTN Products 3rd Line
5d
PTN Products 1st Line
2d
PTN Products 2nd Line
10d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
22
2.1.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training
eSight Basic Operation
eSight Operator
1d
Training Path
Target Audience
eSight Operation and
2d
eSight Operation and
Maintenance Engineer
eSight Advanced Feature Training
eSight WLAN
Management Training
0.5d
WLAN Administrator
eSight IPSec VPN
Management Training
0.5d
eSight MPLS VPN
Management Training
0.5d
MPLS VPN Administrator
eSight Smart Report
Management Training
0.5d
eSight SLA Management
Training
0.5d
SLA Administrator
eSight NTA (Network Traffic
Analyzer) Management
Training
0.5d
IPSec VPN Administrator
Report Administrator
Network Monitor /
Traffic Analyzer
eSight MPLS Tunnel
Management Training
0.5d
eSight Access
Management Training
0.5d
eSight Data Center
Management Training
0.5d
MPLS Tunnel Administrator
End User Administrator
eSight SecureCenter (VSM)
Management Training
eSight LogCenter (eLog)
Management Training
2d
2d
VSM Administrator
Data Center Administrator
eLog Administrator
eSight Product Expert
Elective Guide

eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.

Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.
23
2.1.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path
Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training
Enterprise Network
Design Engineer
1d
Enterprise Campus
Network Design Training
1d
Enterprise Network
Design Expert
Enterprise MPLS VPN
Design Training
Data Center Network
Design Training
1d
WLAN Planning and
Design Training
2d
Enterprise MPLS
VPN Design Expert
Data Center Network
Design Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.
24
5d
Enterprise WLAN
Design Expert
2.1.17 Firewall Training Path
Plan / Design
Firewall Planning and Design
1d
Implement / Operate
Improve
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle
Firewall Installation and
1d
Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
Commissioning Training)
5d
USG6600 Next Generation
SVN Installation and
1d
SVN Operation and
SVN Installation and
1d
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
Training
3d
Firewall UTM Technical Topic
Training
3d
Firewall Advanced Technology
Training
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall
Training (include USG6600 Next
Generation Firewall Installation and
5d
USG9500 High-end Firewall
Training
1d
USG9500 High-end Firewall
Training (include High-end Firewall
Training)
5d
3d
Fast-Track
Firewall Operation and
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
3d
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Training
Training
2d
Elective Guide:


25
2d
2.1.18 Security Management Software Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
Policy Center(TSM) Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
Policy Center(TSM) Operation and
Policy Center(TSM) Installation and
3d
DSM Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
Technology
Fundamentals
Firewall Technology
Training
2d
Elective Guide:


TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals
26
2.1.19 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
NIP Installation and
1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance
Training (include NIP Installation
and Commissioning Training)3d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Elective Guide:

27
2.1.20 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
Planning and Design
Operation and
Advanced Technology
Training
DDoS Solution Operation and
3d
Anyoffice Solution Operation and
3d
Technology
Fundamentals
Firewall Technology
Training
2d
Elective Guide:

28
Training
2.2 List of Enterprise IP Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Certification Training Programs
Ⅱ
8
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
15
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
6
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Huawei VRP System Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
(Fast-Track 5 days)
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional Routing and Switching Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network
Performance Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network
Performance Training
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN
Training
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network
Training
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security
Network Training
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System
Training
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network
Training
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs
29
Enterprise LAN Technology Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track)
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Enterprise QoS Technology Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
Enterprise HA Technology Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Advanced Technology Training Programs
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training)
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance
AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance
Training
30
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
WLAN Technology Basics Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance
S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance
Training
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training)
31
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
5
4 ~ 12
PTN Network Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
3
4 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
eSight WLAN Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight SLA Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Smart Report Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Access Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Data Center Management Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
PTN Products Training Programs
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs
eSight Enterprise Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O/M Training)
32
Ⅱ
eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training
2
6 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
Data Center Network Design Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Firewall Advanced Technology Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
Security Technology Topic Training Programs
Firewall Training Programs
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training(include USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle
Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training(include USG6600 Next Generation
Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training
USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and
USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and
Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
33
Installation and Commissioning Training)
Security Management Software Training Programs
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
AnyOffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
Firewall Planning and Design Training
Level Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course
Ⅱ: Intermediate Course
34
Ⅲ: Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
2.3 Certification Training Programs
2.3.1
HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
Training Path
application layer services including DHCP, FTP
and Telnet.
HCNA-HNTD
Huawei Networking Technology and Device
OARS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Establish a fundamental network capable of
supporting basic communications.
10d
 Enhance link layer performance the through
Target Audience
implementation of features and services
including link aggregation, VLAN technologies
Those who wish to become a network associate
and GVRP.
Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification
 Manage and support Wide Area Network
Prerequisites
communications over serial links for a range of
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
 A working knowledge of networks and IT
Frame Relay.
technologies.
 Apply Network Address Translation (NAT)
Objectives
solutions for private networks.
On completion of this program, the participants will
 Provide Wireless WAN network backup
be able to:
solutions over 3G cellular networks.
 Explain the intricacies of data transmission
 Provide effective IP security solutions using
over IP networks, for competency in supporting,
various security architectures including Access
maintaining and troubleshooting IP networks.
Control Lists (ACL), AAA, and IPsec with GRE
 Perform IP address planning for establishing
support solutions.
well designed networks.
 Describe and implement solutions for unified
 Navigate and manage Huawei products
enterprise network management, including
through the virtual routing platform (VRP).
SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology
 Build efficient data switching environments
solutions.
through the management of switching products
 Establish truly business capable enterprise
and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link
networks for real-world industries.
layer protocols.
Duration
 Explain the principles of routing and configure
10 working days
(RIP/OSPF) routing protocols for
Class Size
implementation and support of effective
enterprise network routing solutions.
Max 16
 Establish solutions for enterprise network
administration and management through
35
2.3.2
HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days)
Training Path
 Build efficient data switching environments
through the management of switching products
HCNA-Fast
Huawei Networking Technology and Device
(Fast-Track 5 days)
OARSA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
5d
and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link
layer protocols.
 Explain the principles of routing and configure
(OSPF) routing protocols for implementation
and support of effective enterprise network
Target Audience
routing solutions.
Those who wish to become a network associate
 Manage and support Wide Area Network
Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification
communications over serial links for a range of
Prerequisites
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
Frame Relay. Provide Wireless WAN network
 Those who have obtained the same level
backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.
technical certificate in the industry, and hope to
 Describe and implement solutions for unified
obtain Huawei certificate
enterprise network management, including
Objectives
SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology
solutions.
be able to:
 Supporting IPv6 Networks.
 Navigate and manage Huawei products
Duration
through the virtual routing platform (VRP).
5 working days
 Enhance link layer performance the through
Class Size
implementation of features and services
including link aggregation, VLAN technologies
Max 16
and GVRP.
36
2.3.3
HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching
Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
OPRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Configure OSPF
6d
 Configure BGP
 Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
 Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
RSTP and MSTP
4d
 Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and
QinQ
 Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
 Describe the basic principle of network security
 List the features of USG
5d
 Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
Target Audience
 List High Availability technology
Duration
Those who hope to become a network
professional
15 working days
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Class Size
Prerequisites
Max 16
 HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
37
2.3.4
HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
be able to:
 Configure OSPF
6d
 Configure BGP
Target Audience
 Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Duration
professional
6 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Max 16
38
2.3.5
HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
be able to:
 Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
4d
RSTP and MSTP
Target Audience
 Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and
QinQ
professional
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
Max 16
39
2.3.6
HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
be able to:
5d
 List the features of USG
Target Audience
 Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
 List High Availability technology
Duration
professional
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Max 16
40
2.3.7
HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching
Training (Fast-Track 5 days)
 Configure BGP
Training Path
HCNP-R&S( Huawei Certified Network
Professional - Routing and Switching
Fast-Track 5 days
OPRSA Lecture，Hands-on exercise
 Configure Route Selection Tools
 Configure IGMP, PIM-SM/DM
 Describe the principle of VLAN
5d
 Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN and GVRP
Target Audience
professional
 Configure the functions and features of USG
series firewall
Those who have obtained the same level technical
 Describe HUAWEI IP QoS end-to-end process
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain
 Configure end-to-end IP QoS
Huawei certificate
 Build and configure simulation of enterprise
Prerequisites
network
Duration
 Obtained the same level technical certificate in
the industry
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Max 16
be able to:
 Configure OSPF
41
2.3.8
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
 Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
Training Path
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized
Business WLAN
OAWL1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
 List Huawei WDS network mode
 Describe mesh network mode
5d
 Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
Target Audience
 List the advantages of 802.11n
Those who hope to become a network associate of
 Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical
WLAN
layer
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate
 Describe spread spectrum technology of
Prerequisites
802.11
 Describe DSSS technology
 A general familiarity with PC operation system
 Describe OFDM technology
 A basic understanding of computer technology
 Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar
 Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
knowledge
 Outline the general network mode of WLAN
Objectives
 Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
 Differentiate different applications of VLAN in
be able to:
WLAN service
 Describe what WLAN is
 Describe WLAN business configuration
 Describe the development process of WLAN
processes of Huawei AC6605
technology
 Configure the basic attributes of AC
 List typical application scenarios of WLAN
 Describe the basic features of Huawei product
technology
 List the key features of Huawei product
 Describe the functions and roles of WLAN
 Describe the basic concepts of roaming
standards organizations
 Outline the basic principles of roaming
 Describe the related basic knowledge of RF
 List the application scenarios of roaming
 List working principle and specific property of
 Describe security threat of WLAN
RF
 Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
 Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
WIPS
and the basic concepts of channel
 Describe the related concepts of AAA
 Describe the rules of the working frequency
 Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
band and channel in each country
techniques
 List other technologies related to WLAN
 Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
 Describe the latest Huawei product information
 Describe the frame format of 802.11
 List the application scenarios of Huawei
 Differentiate three frame types and functions of
product
802.11
 Describe the power supply mode of Huawei
 Describe 802.11 media access control
product
mechanism
 Configure Huawei VRP basic command
 Analyze media access process of WLAN
 Configure AC basic attributes
 Describe the concepts of QoS
 Upgrade the software of AC and AP
 Configure WMM-profile
42
 Configure Traffic-profile
 Configure the basic information of AC
 Describe the definition and functions of
 Configure AP online
 Configure AP-profile
antenna
 Describe the main performance indicates of
 Configure radio-profile
antenna
 Configure service-set
 List some common passive device
 Configure AP region
 List the basic process of the WLAN network
 Configure AP binding profile
planning
 Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of
 List basic interference factors of WLAN
WLAN service
 Describe the basic load-balancing ways of
 Describe WLAN commonly used fault
WLAN
troubleshooting
 List the typical application scenarios of WLAN
 Describe WLAN common diagnostic
 Describe the network planning processes of
commands and tools
WLAN
 Describe the cause of some common failures
 Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN
of WLAN
network planning ways
 Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot
 Describe the functional features of Huawei
some common failures
WLAN planning tool
Duration
 Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN
5 working days
network
Class Size
 List some functions of eSight
 Configure WLAN service
Min 6, Max 12
43
2.3.9
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
 Understand key VPN technologies.
Training Path
 Understand the classification and application of
HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic
Security Network Training
HC11031 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VPN.
 Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
5d
 Understand the principles of L2TP.
Target Audience
 Understand the application scenarios of
Operators and Maintainers
client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
 Understand the configuration of L2TP.
Administrators
 Understand the principles and implementation
Prerequisites
of GRE VPN.
 Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
 Understand the security mechanism of GRE
 Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
VPN.
knowledge
 Understand the typical application and
Objectives
configuration of GRE VPN.
 Understand the principles of the IPSec
technology.
be able to:
 Understand OSI model
 Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
 Understand TCP/IP principles
 Understand the service process of IKE.
 Understand TCP/IP security issues
 Understand the application scenarios and
 Understand Common attack means
configuration of IPSec VPN.
 Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
 Understand the definition and classification of
technology.
firewalls.
 Understand the Basic functions and features of
 Understand firewall Main features and
the SVN product.
technologies.
 Understand the configuration of SSL VPN.
 Understand the Data forwarding process and
 Understand firewall UTM basic technology
basic configuration of firewalls.
 Understand what terminal security is.
 Understand the functions and classification of
 Understand the components and deployment
ACLs.
 Understand firewall Security Policy and
of the Policy Center system.
 Understand the organizational management
configuration
 Understand the principles of the NAT
and access control functions of the Policy
Center system.
technology.
 Understand the security policy configuration of
 Understand the application of NAT.
 Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.
the Policy Center system.
 Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Duration
basic technology
5 working days
 Understand firewall User Management
Class Size
 Understand firewall
Min 6, Max 12
VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G technology
 Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
44
2.3.10 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
Training
 Master virtual firewall configuration methods.
Training Path
 Know virtual firewall technology applications.
HCNP-Security CISN Constructing
Infrastructure of Security Network
 Understand advanced features and
5d
 Understand advanced features and
Target Audience
configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
 Understand Scenarios of comprehensive SSL
VPN applications in HA.
Prerequisites
 Understand Basic network attack.
 Be familiar with data communications network
 Understand Basic attack defense technologies
elementary knowledge
on firewalls.
 Be familiar with network security elementary
 Understand Application and configuration of
knowledge
basic attack defense technologies.
 Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
 Understand the damages and mechanisms of
 Has network security equipment operation and
major DDoS attacks.
maintenance experience
 Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS
Objectives
solution.
 Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS
solution.
be able to:
 Learn about the installation and configuration
 Understand firewall device management
of the anti-DDoS solution.
 Master firewall management by AAA
 Master password recovery
 Master troubleshooting method.
 Understand the implementation and
 Master the troubleshooting of security policy.
 Master the troubleshooting of NAT technology.
configuration of traffic limiting policies
 Master the troubleshooting of attack defence.
 Master the troubleshooting of traffic limiting
configuration of SLB
 Understand Dual-system hot backup principle
policies.
 Master the troubleshooting of HA technology.
and configuration.
 Understand the principle and configuration of
 Master the troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
BFD
 Master the troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
 Master the troubleshooting of SSL VPN.
configuration of Link-group
Duration
 Understand IP-link principle and configuration
5 working days
 Understand Bypass principle and configuration
Class Size
 Understand Eth-Trunk principle and
configuration
Min 6, Max 12
 Learn about the technology principles of virtual
firewall.
45
2.3.11 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training
Training Path
 Understand the implementation principles of
multiple access control devices.
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing
Terminal Security System
 Know the terminal security solution design
roadmap.
5d
 Know how to complete the availability design of
Target Audience
a solution.
 Know the current situation of document
security.
Prerequisites
 Understand the functions of DSM
 Master how to implement Policy Center
system.
 Master how to configurue Policy Center
knowledge
system.
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
 Master the operation and maintenance of
 Be familiar with OS.
Policy Center system.
 Be familiar with 802.1X access control
 Master the operation and maintenance of DSM.
tecnology.
 Describe the common fault in Policy Center
Objectives
system.
 Master the troubleshooting method of Policy
Center system
be able to:
 Master the troubleshooting method of DSM
 Understand the current situation of terminal
system
security.
 Master how to utilize diagnoses tools for
 Understand the background of terminal
troubleshooting security implementations.
security.
 Understand the multidimensional defense
 Master the troubleshooting method of
system as a terminal security solution.
Hardware SACG implementations.
 Understand the relationship among the five
Duration
elements.
5 working days
 Understand the concepts and components of
Class Size
identity authentication.
 Understand the implementation mechanism of
Min 6, Max 12
security policies during authentication
46
2.3.12 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training
Training Path
 Understand major antivirus technologies for
gateways
HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing
Service Security Network
 Understand the application of antivirus
technologies for gateways
5d
 Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering
Target Audience
technology
 Describe common WEB risk
 Understand the key technology of Web filtering
Prerequisites
 Understand the Web filtering application
scenario
 Understand the basic concept of spam
 Understand the generation and harm of spam
knowledge
 Understand the mechanism of spam filter
 Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei
 Has network security equipment operation and
 Describe background of deep packet inspect.
maintenance experience
 Understand the main DPI technology.
Objectives
 Understand the DPI application scenario.
 Master the troubleshooting of IPS
be able to:
 Master the troubleshooting of AV
 Understand the basic knowledge of information
 Master the troubleshooting of URL filtering
security
 Master the troubleshooting of RBL filtering
 Understand the background of content security
 Master the troubleshooting of deep packet
products
inspect
 Understand the main technologies used for
 Master the troubleshooting of Database
content security
updated.
 Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion
Duration
prevention technology
5 working days
Class Size
prevention application scenario
 Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.
Min 6, Max 12
 Learn about virus signatures and the common
tools for detecting viruses
47
2.3.13 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
Training Path
architecture
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and
Huawei Routing and Switching Field
Engineer Training
OSRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
modules
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches data
5d
forwarding
Target Audience
 List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics
 List S12700 Agile Switches software features
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches application
Prerequisites
scenarios
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis
Switches Routers
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar
 Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei
knowledge
Chassis Switches Routers
Objectives
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei
be able to:
 Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers
Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
 Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis
NE Routers
Switches Routers
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE
 Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
Routers
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box
Huawei NE Routers
Switches Routers
 Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE
Routers
Box Switches Routers
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box
NE Routers
Switches Routers
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3
Routers
Huawei Box Switches Routers
 Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box
AR G3 Routers
Switches Routers
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR
G3 Routers
Box Switches Routers
 Describe Functions of Huawei eSight
Huawei AR G3 Routers
Enterprise Network Management System
 Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3
 Describe the Networking Architecture of
Routers
Huawei eSight
 Describe the Technical Architecture of Huawei
AR G3 Routers
eSight
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning
 Describe Specifications of Huawei eSight
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware
 Describe Basic Issues of Environment
48
 Describe the Differences Between Firewalls
Maintenance
 Describe Methods of Cleaning the Equipment
and Routers / Switches
 Describe Firewall Features of Huawei AR G3
 Describe Indicators of Huawei Devices
Routers
 Describe Precautions of Parts Replacement
 Describe Firewall Features of Huawei S7700
 Describe Steps of Parts Replacement
SPU
 List Common Maintenance Commands
 Describe Domain-based User Management on
 Backup and Restore Configuration Files
Huawei Devices
 View Alarms and Logs of Huawei Devices
 Configure Telnet Server on Huawei Devices
 Describe the Concepts of Emergency
 Configure FTP Server / Client on Huawei
Maintenance
Devices
 Describe Common Flows for Emergency
 Configure TFTP Client on Huawei Devices
Maintenance
 Describe Flow for Handling Hardware Faults
 Configure SSH Server on Huawei Devices
 Describe Flow for Handling Service Faults
 Describe Principles of SNMP
 Describe Common Steps of Software Upgrade
 Configure SNMP on Huawei Devices
 Describe Precautions of Software Upgrade
 Describe Steps of Installing Huawei eSight
 Describe Steps of Installing Patches
 Describe Basic Operations of Huawei eSight
 Describe Basic Operations on the Bootrom
 Describe Principles of Stacking and CSS
 Describe Principles of ISSU
 Describe Application Scenarios of Stacking and
CSS
 Describe Application Scenarios of ISSU
 Configure Stacking and CSS on Huawei
 Describe Operational Processes of ISSU
Devices
 List the Security Features of Huawei Routers
 Describe Principles of LLDP
and Switches
 Describe Application Scenarios of LLDP
 List the differences of Security Features
 Configure LLDP on Huawei Devices
Between Huawei Routers and Switches
Duration
 Describe Application Scenarios of Huawei
Routers and Switches
5 working days
 Describe Security Threats on the Network
Class Size
Access Layer
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe Principles of ARP Attack Defense
 Describe Principles of MFF
49
2.4 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs
2.4.1
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe basic structure of IP network
 Describe TCP/IP basis
IP Network Technology Fundamental
ORS11
Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe IP addressing and routing
 Describe network layer protocols
1d
 Describe transit layer protocols
Target Audience
 Describe application layer protocols
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
50
2.4.2
Huawei VRP System Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the VRP architecture
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
 Use basic operation commands
 Describe the function of VRP information center
1d
 Perform VRP operate files
Target Audience
 Operate VRP upgrade software
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
51
2.4.3
Enterprise LAN Technology Training
 Describe the background of VLAN technology
Training Path
Ethernet Basic Principle
ORS31
 Configure the basic functions of VLAN
 Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
1d
 Configure the inter-VLAN communication
 Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
 Configure the MUX-VLAN
VLAN Principle and Configuration
 Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
ORS32
1d
 Configure the Super-VLAN
 Describe the GARP principle
 Describe the GVRP principle
GVRP Principle and Configuration
ORS33
 Configure GVRP
 Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
0.5d
 Describe the LACP basic principle
 List the methods of link aggregation
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle
and Configuration
ORS34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
0.5d
STP Principle and Configuration
 Describe calculation process of spanning tree
ORS35
2d
 Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Target Audience
 Describe the flood process of topology change
information
 Configure the STP function
Prerequisites
 Describe RSTP basic calculation process
 Describe RSTP port status transition
 Describe the function of RST BPDU
 A basic understanding of IP technology
 Describe the flooding process of topology
Objectives
change notification
 Configure the RSTP function
be able to:
 Describe the basic concept of MSTP
 Describe the development of Ethernet
 Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of
MST
technology
 List the standards of Ethernet
 Describe the MSTP advanced configuration
 Describe the working principle of HUB
 Configure the MSTP function
Duration
 Describe the working principle of L2 switch
 Describe the working principle of L3 switch
5 working days
 List the Ethernet port features
Class Size
 Configure the Ethernet interface
Min 6, Max 12
52
2.4.4
Enterprise WAN Technology Training
 Describe PPP principles
Training Path
 Describe LCP principles
WAN Interfaces Introduction and
PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
ORS41
 Describe NCP principles
 Describe MP principles
1d
 Configure PPP and MP
 Configure PPP authentication
FR/POS/HDLC Principles and
Configuration
 Describe FR principles
 Configure FR
1d
 Describe POS principles
Target Audience
 Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing
methods
 Identify common optical interfaces
Prerequisites
 Configure POS interface
 Describe HDLC principles
 Configure HDLC
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 List common WAN protocols
 List common WAN interfaces
53
2.4.5
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Training Path
route backup
 Configure static route
IP Routing Basis
ORS51
 Configure static default route
 Describe the principles of distance-vector
0.5d
routing protocols
 Describe the routing loop issues and apply loop
RIP Protocol Feature and
Configuration
avoidance solutions
 Describe the principles of RIP protocols
0.5d
 Identify the similarities and differences between
RIPv1 and RIPv2
 Configure RIP in the network
OSPF Feature and Configuration
ORS53
 Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
 Describe the route calculation process of link
1d
state algorithm
 Describe basic concepts of OSPF
 Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
IS-IS Feature and Configuration
 Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
ORS54
1d
relationship
 Describe the route calculation process of
OSPF
BGP Feature and Configuration
ORS55
 Configure OSPF routing protocol
 Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol
1d
 Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol
 Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols
Route Selection and Control
Feature
 Configure IS-IS protocol
 Describe BGP basic concepts
1d
 Describe BGP working principles
Target Audience
 Describe the route selection process of BGP
 Configure BGP protocol
 Describe route selection tools
Prerequisites
 Describe routing policy
 Describe policy-based route selection
 Compare routing policy and policy-based route
 Configure routing policy
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the IP routing process
 Describe fields in the routing table
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the concepts of load balance and
54
2.4.6
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track)
 Describe network layer protocols
Training Path
 Describe transit layer protocols
IP Network Technology Fundamental
ORS11
 Describe application layer protocols
1d
 Describe the function of VRP info- center
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
 Describe the inter-VLAN communication
VLAN Principle and Configuration
ORS32
principle
1d
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and
Configuration
ORS34
0.5d
IP Routing Basics
ORS51
0.5d
OSPF Feature and Configuration
ORS53
 Describe the concepts of load balance and
route backup
1d
Target Audience
 Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Planners and Designers
Administrators
state algorithm
Prerequisites
 Describe basic concepts of OSPF
 Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
 Describe OSPF neighbor relationship
 Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Objectives
 Configure OSPF routing protocol
Duration
be able to:
 Describe basic structure of IP network
5 working days
 Describe TCP/IP basis
Class Size
 Describe IP addressing and routing
Min 6, Max 12
55
2.5 Advanced Technology Training Programs
2.5.1
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
 Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions
Training Path
 Configure the IGMP protocol
IP Multicast Technologies Basis
ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Differentiate the classification of multicast
routing protocol
1d
 List the features of common multicast routing
protocols
 Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
 Describe the join procedure of RPT and
2d
multicast source registration
 Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
to SPT
 Configure PIM-SM
Inter-domain Multicast Technologies
 List the key technologies of PIM SSM
2d
 Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Target Audience
 Configure PIM SSM
 Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Administrators
 Configure PIM-DM
 Describe the basic principles of MSDP.
Prerequisites
 Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.
 Describe the
application of MSDP
 Configure the MSDP
 Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.
 Describe the extensions of the MBGP.
knowledge
 Describe the process that the MBGP transmit
Objectives
the IPv4 multicast routing table.
 Configure the MBGP
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the IP multicast concept
 Describe the IP multicast address architecture
5 working days
 Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP
Class Size
multicast
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the SPT and RPT concept
 Describe the IGMP protocol principle
56
2.5.2
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Training Path
 Describe IKE principles
 Describe IPSec principles
IP VPN Technology Fundamentals
ORSB1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe IPSec application scenarios
 Configure IPSec VPN
1.5d
 Describe SSL principles
 Describe SSL application scenarios
 Configure SSL VPN
IP VPN Applications
 Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN
2d
 Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution
 Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3
routers
Designing IP VPN
 List Problems When Deploy VPNs
0.5d
 Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment
and the solution
 Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment
Maintaining IP VPN
and the solution
 Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment
1d
and the solution
Target Audience
 Describe GRE over IPSec applications
 Describe IPSec over GRE applications
 Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over
GRE
Administrators
 Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
Prerequisites
routers
 Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3
routers
 Describe security risks of VPDN
knowledge
 Describe common VPDN solutions
Objectives
 Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over
IPSec
be able to:
 Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3
 Describe concepts of IP VPN
routers
 List common VPN technologies
 Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
 Describe GRE principles
routers
 Describe requirements when deploy VPN on
 Describe GRE application scenarios
Hub-Spoke network
 Configure GRE VPN
 Describe concepts of LAC and LNS
 Describe Huawei DSVPN solution
 Describe L2TP principles
 Describe DSVPN principles
 Describe L2TP application scenarios
 Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers
 Configure L2TP VPN
 List Huawei IP VPN products
 Describe IPSec technical architecture
 Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei
57
 Choose appropriate devices and technology for
routers
enterprise VPN
 Describe eSight VPN management features
switches
 Use eSight basic functions
 Use eSight VPN management functions
firewalls
 Describe Huawei eSight VPN management
 Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
features
 List common reasons of IP VPN failure
 Describe Huawei VPN client features
 List common commands when troubleshooting
 Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of
IP VPN
different products
 Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases
 Describe applications of different products in IP
Duration
VPN
5 working days
 Describe methodology of network designing
Class Size
 Analyze enterprise VPN requirements
 Describe typical VPN application
Min 6, Max 12
58
2.5.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
 Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Training Path
 Describe the process of LDP session
MPLS Technology and Configuration
ORSC1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
establishment
 Describe LDP label space
1d
 Describe LDP label distribution mode
 Describe LDP label control mode
 Describe LDP label retention mode
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
 Describe the PHP
ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
1d
 List the methods of MPLS loop detection
 Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
 Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration
ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
count
 Configure MPLS
2d
 Configure LDP
 Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
 Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application
ORSD3 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
MPLS VPN
1d
 Describe the mechanisms of the route and
Target Audience
label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
 Describe the process of data forwarding of
BGP MPLS VPN
 Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
Administrators
configuration
Prerequisites
 Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe the troubleshooting on control plane
of MPLS BGP VPN
knowledge
 Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
Objectives
MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe VPN Characteristics
 Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN
be able to:
and L3 VPN
 Analyze the process of IP forwarding
 Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
 Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
encapsulation
 Describe the basic principle of MPLS
 Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
forwarding
 List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
 List the applications of MPLS
scenario
 Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
 Describe CCC VLL Topology
two planes
 Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
 Describe MPLS label structure
 Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
 Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
mode
59
 Configure CCC in a simple network topology
MPLS VPN backbone
 Describe Martini VLL Topology
 Describe how to access the Internet via
 Describe how public tunnel and VC connection
different interfaces between CE and PE
 Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
are established in Martini VLL
 Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
VPN
 Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF
VLL
 Describe the difference between Martini VLL
routing information
 Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN
and SVC VLL
 Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple
 Analyze the application and configuration of
networking topology
Sham-link
 Describe the features of VPLS
 Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and
Inter-AS solutions
 Compare the three solutions’ processing in
VC Label
 Describe how does VPLS forward data and
control plane and data plane
avoid loop
Duration
 Configure VPLS in a simple networking
5 working days
topology
Class Size
 Configure VPLS
 Describe how to access the Internet via the ISP
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe how to access the Internet via the
60
2.5.4
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic and extension principle of
RSVP protocol
 Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE
MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration
ORSE
 Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
3d
using static routes
Target 1Audience
 Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
using automatic route
 Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using
policy routing
Administrators
 Describe the mode of traffic protection
Prerequisites
 Describe the principle of path protection
 Describe the principle of fast reroute
 Describe DS-TE functions
 Describe DS-TE applicable environment
knowledge
 Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption
 A general familiarity with MPLS
 Describe the rationale of Tunnel
Objectives
Re-optimization
 Describe the rationale of
be able to:
 Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth
 Describe detailed TE concepts and models
Load Sharing
Adjustment
 Describe the combining of MPLS TE with
 Describe MPLS TE background and functional
MPLS VPN
modules
 Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
 Describe the content of MPLS TE information
 List MPLS TE application
distribution
 Describe the way of MPLS TE information
 Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
flooding
Duration
 Describe the process of MPLS TE information
3 working days
distribution
Class Size
 Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm
 Describe the other constrained conditions
Min 6, Max 12
which influence the process of path calculation
 Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE
61
2.5.5
Enterprise QoS Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
IP QoS Technology
be able to:
ORSF1
1d
 Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
 Describe Diff-Serv model
Target Audience
 Describe the principle of IP QoS
 Describe the classed-based QoS
Prerequisites
 Configure QoS
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
62
2.5.6
Enterprise HA Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the basic concept of HA
HA Technology
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 List common HA technologies in network
 Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
1d
 Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Target Audience
 Describe BFD basic concept and principles
 Describe application scenarios of BFD
Prerequisites
 Configure BFD on VRP platform
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
63
2.5.7
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Training Path
 Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of
OSPFv3 with OSPFv2
 Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation
IPv6 Technology
ORSH1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Configure OSPFv3
5d
 Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Target Audience
 Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology
 Configure IS-ISv6
Monitoring Staffs
 Describe MP-BGP attributes
Administrators
 Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6
inter-domain routing
Prerequisites
 Configure BGP+
 Describe the function and basic principle of MLD
 Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2
 Describe the function of SSM Mapping
knowledge
 Configure MLD
Objectives
 Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM
 Describe the address structure and working
be able to:
principle of Embedded-RP
 Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6
 Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
 Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6
 Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast
packet format
 Configure PIMv6
 Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
 List classification of the ACL6
 Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
 Describe the application scenarios of ACL6
 Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process
 Configure ACL6
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 address
 List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6
auto configuration
 Describe application situations of the transitional
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU
technologies of IPv6
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS
 Describe basic principles of the common
 Configure IPv6 address
transitional technologies of IPv6
 Configure IPv6 NDP
 Configure common transitional technologies of
 Configure IPv6 PMTU
IPv6
 Configure IPv6 application
 Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
 Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6
 Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
unicast packets
 Configure 6PE over MPLS
 Describe the principle of RIPng
Duration
 Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2
5 working days
 Describe the format and processing of RIPng
Class Size
packets
 Configure RIPng
Min 6, Max 12
 Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2
64
2.6 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
2.6.1
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
NE Series Routers Hardware Installation
ORT22
Lecture, Demonstration
be able to:
 Describe NE series routers installation process
0.5d
 List precautions when install NE series routers
 Install NE series routers
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
65
2.6.2
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
 Describe NE series routers hardware structure
Training Path
 Describe NE series routers board types and
NE Series Routers Introduction
ORT21
Lecture
functions
 Identify NE series routers board
0.5d
 Judge NE series routers board indicators and
functions
 Describe NE series routers positioning and
Huawei VRP System
application scenarios
ORS21
1d
 Describe NE series routers features Overview
NE20E-S Series Routers Routine
Maintenance
Lecture
ORT23
0.5d
Target Audience
 List precautions for NE series routers routine
maintenance
 Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
66
2.6.3
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
Objectives
Lecture
ORT21
be able to:
0.5d
functions
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
functions
IP Routing Technologies
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
3d
MPLS VPN Technologies
ORSDA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
3d
 Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
state algorithm
HA Technology
 Describe the basic concept of OSPF
1d
 Describe OSPF protocol packets
 Configure OSPF protocol
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
 Describe the principle of BGP protocol
 Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
1d
 Describe BGP protocol route selection process
 Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23
Lecture
IGP protocol
0.5d
 Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Target Audience
 Describe route selection tools and routing policy
 Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Prerequisites
 Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
 Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
 List the applications of MPLS
 Describe MPLS structure
67
feature that contains
 Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
two planes
 Describe MPLS label structure
 Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
 Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
mode
 Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
 Configure CCC in a simple network topology
 Describe the process of LDP session
 Describe Martini VLL Topology
 Describe how public tunnel and VC connection
establishment
 Describe LDP label space
are established in Martini VLL
 Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
 Describe LDP label distribution mode
VLL
 Describe LDP label control mode
 Describe the difference between Martini VLL and
 Describe LDP label retention mode
SVC VLL
 Describe the PHP
 Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple
 List the methods of MPLS loop detection
networking topology
 Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
 Describe the features of VPLS
 Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
 Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and
count
VC Label
 Configure MPLS
 Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid
 Configure LDP
loop
 Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
 Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology
 Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
 Configure VPLS
MPLS VPN
 Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
 Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP
MPLS VPN
 Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
configuration
 Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
 Configure QoS
 Describe VPN Characteristics
 Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN
maintenance
and L3 VPN
 Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
Duration
encapsulation
10 working days
 Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
Class Size
 List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
scenario
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe CCC VLL Topology
68
2.6.4
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Lecture
ORT21
0.5d
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
state algorithm
3d
ORT23
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
IGP protocol
Prerequisites
Objectives
maintenance
be able to:
Duration
5 working days
functions
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
functions
69
2.6.5
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
 Describe VRP8 platform new features
Training Path
 Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
 List the VRP8 platform basic commands
NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction
ORT41
1d
 Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
3.5d
ORT43
Lecture
state algorithm
0.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
 A genera familiarity with PC operation system
IGP protocol
Objectives
be able to:
 Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware
structure
 Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
 List precautions for NE20E-S series routers
and functions
routine maintenance
 Identify NE20E-S series routers board
 Perform NE20E-S series routers routine
 Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
maintenance
and functions
Duration
 Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning and
5 working days
 Describe NE20E-S series routers features
Class Size
Overview
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the VRP development and history
 Describe VRP platform features
70
2.6.6
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation
ORT12
be able to:
 Describe AR G3 router installation process
0.5d
 List precautions when install AR G3 routers
 Install AR G3 routers
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
71
2.6.7
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe AR G3 product positioning
AR G3 Product Introduction
Lecture
ORT11
 Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
 Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
0.5d
 List AR G3 cards and modules
 List AR G3 software features
 Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13
Lecture
 Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
0.5d
router routine maintenance
Target Audience
 List precautions for AR G3 router routine
Monitoring Staffs
maintenance
 Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
72
2.6.8
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
ORT11
Lecture
0.5d
Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
Objectives
LAN Technologies
ORS3B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
1.5d
WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP
Principle and Configuration
ORS41
1d
3d
HA Technology
1d
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
1d
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14
information
1d
 List common WAN protocols
 List common WAN interfaces
 Describe PPP principles
ORT13
Lecture
 Describe LCP principles
0.5d
 Describe NCP principles
73
 Describe MP principles
 Configure PPP and MP
 Configure PPP authentication
state algorithm
 Configure QoS
 Describe NAT principles
 List NAT features on AR G3 routers
 Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
 Describe NAT applications
 Describe concepts of firewall
 List common firewalls
 List firewall features on AR G3 routers
IGP protocol
 Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
maintenance
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
74
2.6.9
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
ORT11
Lecture
0.5d
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
state algorithm
1.5d
HA Technology
1d
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14
IGP protocol
1d
ORT13
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
 Describe NAT principles
Prerequisites
 List NAT features on AR G3 routers
 Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
 Describe NAT applications
 Describe concepts of firewall
 List common firewalls
Objectives
 List firewall features on AR G3 routers
 Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
be able to:
75
Class Size
maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
5 working days
76
2.6.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
functions
Lecture
ORT21
0.5d
functions
Lecture
ORT11
0.5d
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
2d
HA Technology
1d
state algorithm
ORT23
Lecture
0.25d
ORT23
Lecture
0.25d
IGP protocol
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
77
maintenance
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
78
2.7 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs
2.7.1
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Positioning
 Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
Architecture
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution
ORT31
Lecture
 List AR Series Industrial Router Modules and
1d
Cards
 Outline AR Series Industrial Router Application
Scenarios
Huawei VRP System
 Describe AR DCP Product Positioning
ORS21
0.5d
 Describe AR DCP Product Functions
 Outline AR DCP Product Application Scenarios
AR Industrial Router Routing & Switching
Features
ORT32
2d
HA Technology
1d
AR Series Industrial Routers Routine
Maintenance
Lecture
ORT33
0.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
 Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
 A basic understanding of IP network
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
be able to:
state algorithm
 Describe the Trend of IOT
 Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Scenarios
 Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Highlights
 Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
79
routine maintenance
 Perform AR Series Industrial router routine
maintenance
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
 Describe the procedure and method for AR
Min 6, Max 12
Series Industrial router routine maintenance
 List precautions for Series Industrial router
80
81
2.8 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
2.8.1
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Hardware Installation
OSW12
be able to:
0.5d
 Describe Huawei chassis switch installation
process
 List precautions when install chassis switch
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
 Install Huawei chassis switch
0.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
82
2.8.2
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
and modules
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
Product Introduction
Lecture
OSW11
forwarding flows
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product
0.5d
characteristic function
software features
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
Routine Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
 Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
Monitoring Staffs
chassis switch routine maintenance
 List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
Administrators
routine maintenance
 Perform Huawei chassis switch routine
Prerequisites
maintenance
chassis switch parts replacement
Objectives
component replacement
 Perform Huawei chassis switch component
replacement
be able to:
Duration
positioning
2 working days
Class Size
hardware architecture
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards
Min 6, Max 12
83
2.8.3
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
OSW11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Monitoring Staffs
0.5d
Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
Objectives
LAN Technologies
ORS3C Lecture, Hands-on exercise
2.5d
be able to:
positioning
3d
and modules
HA Technology
forwarding flows
1d
IP QoS Technology
software features
ORSF1
1d
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU
Features
0.5d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) CSS
Features
0.5d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine
Maintenance
Lecture
OSW13
0.5d
84
 Configure QoS
information
 Describe ISSU principles
 List ISSU features on Huawei chassis switch
 List ISSU features use restriction on Huawei
chassis switch
 Use ISSU features upgrade chassis switch
 Describe CSS principles
 List CSS features on Huawei chassis switch
 Differentiate mainborad CSS and linecard-direct
state algorithm
CSS
 Configure Huawei chassis switch CSS features
routine maintenance
maintenance
IGP protocol
replacement
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
85
2.8.4
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Training Path
and modules
forwarding flows
0.5d
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
software features
0.5d
LAN Technologies
1.5d
2d
Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
information
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
state algorithm
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
IGP protocol
positioning
86
routine maintenance
replacement
Duration
maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
87
2.8.5
S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
modules
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding
S12700 Series Agile Switches Product
Introduction
Lecture, Demo
OSW51
 List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics
 List S12700 Agile Switches software features
0.5d
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches application
scenarios
 Describe VRP architecture
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22
 Use VRP basic commands
0.5d
 Describe VRP info-center
 Operate VRP files
S Switches New Technologies
 Describe LNP principles
 Configure LNP
1d
 Describe VCMP principles
 Configure VCMP
 Outline EasyOperation principles
S Switches EasyOperation Solution
 Understand related technologies of
0.5d
EasyOperation
 Use EasyOperation features to deploy and
maintain network
S12700 Series Agile Switches Routine
Maintenance
Lecture
OSW54
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches routine
maintenance
0.5d
 Describe the procedure and method for S12700
Target Audience
Agile Switch routine maintenance
Monitoring Staffs
 List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch routine
maintenance
 Perform S12700 Agile Switch routine
Administrators
maintenance
 Describe the procedure and method for S12700
Prerequisites
Agile Switch parts replacement
 List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch
 Perform S12700 Agile Switch component
Objectives
replacement
Duration
be able to:
3 working day
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning
Class Size
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware
Min 6, Max 12
architecture
 Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and
88
2.8.6
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware
Installation
OSW22
be able to:
0.5d
 Describe Huawei box switch installation process
 List precautions when install Huawei box switch
 Install Huawei box switch
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
89
2.8.7
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules
 Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27)
Lecture
OSW21
flows
 List Huawei box switch characteristic function
0.5d
 List Huawei box switch software features
 Describe Huawei box switch application
scenarios
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
1d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine
Maintenance
OSW23
Lecture
 Describe the contents and methods of routine
0.5d
maintenance to Huawei box switches
Target Audience
 List the notices of routine maintenance to box
Monitoring Staffs
switches
 Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box
Administrators
switches
Prerequisites
 Describe the methods and procedures of
replacing Huawei box switches components
 Lists the matters needing attention of replacing
Huawei box switches components
 Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches
Objectives
components
Duration
be able to:
2 working days
 Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Class Size
 Describe Huawei box switch hardware
architecture
Min 6, Max 12
90
2.8.8
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product
Introduction
0.5d
Lecture
OSW21
architecture
flows
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
0.5d
scenarios
LAN Technologies
2d
VRRP Feature and Configuration
ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security
Feature
1d
Maintenance
Lecture
0.5d
OSW23
Target Audience
information
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
 Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
 Configure VRRP protocol
 List the security risks of network access layer
Prerequisites
 List ACL types
 List the application of ACL
 Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
 Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Objectives
 Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches
91
 Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
 List the defense of ARP attack
 List the security features of Huawei switches
 Configure the prevention of ARP attack
 Configure MFF feature
components
Duration
5 working days
switches
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
switches
92
2.8.9
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Prerequisites
Lecture
OSW11
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product
Introduction
Lecture
0.5d
OSW21
positioning
Huawei VRP System
ORS21
and modules
0.5d
forwarding flows
LAN Technologies
1.5d
software features
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security
Feature
1d
architecture
VRRP Feature and Configuration
0.5d
ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
flows
Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture
scenarios
0.25d
Maintenance
OSW23
Lecture
0.25d
Target Audience
93
maintenance
information
 List the security risks of network access layer
 List ACL types
 List the application of ACL
switches
 Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
 Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
switches
 Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches
 Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
 List the defense of ARP attack
 List the security features of Huawei switches
 Configure the prevention of ARP attack
components
 Configure MFF feature
Duration
 Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
 Configure VRRP protocol
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
routine maintenance
94
2.9 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
2.9.1
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
switch
 List the precaution of hardware installation of CE
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58)
Hardware Installation
OSW34
series switch
 Install CE series switch
0.5d
VRP8 Platform Introduction
0.5d
Target Audience
 Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
 Mange the configuration file on CE switch
 Use the FTP function on CE switch
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the installation procedure of CE series
95
2.9.2
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
OSW31
Lecture
0.5d
CE switch
1d
 Describe the contents of maintenance of CE
series switch
 Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE
Maintenance
OSW3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
series switch
 Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
0.5d
 Describe the parts replacement of CE12800
Target Audience
series switch
 Describe the procedure of system software
upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Prerequisites
upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
upgrade by FTP on
Objectives
CE12800 series switch
upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
 Describe the ISSU software upgrade on
be able to:
CE12800 switch
 Describe the hardware architecture of CE series
Duration
data center switch
 Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE
2 working days
series data center switch
Class Size
 List the features of CE series data center switch
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the application of CE series data center
switch
96
2.9.3
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training Path
Prerequisites
Lecture
OSW31
0.5d
knowledge
Objectives
0.5d
be able to:
data center switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution
Lecture
OSW33
0.5d
switch
Data Center Network Key technologies
3.5d
LAN Technologies
ORS3D Lecture, Hands-on exercise
1.5d
CE switch
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
 Describe the architecture of data center
2d
 Describe the data center development
 Describe Huawei data center network solution
 Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
 Describe FCOE network basic architecture
 Describe the FCOE implementation of related
1d
technologies
 Describe DCB function technical principle
Maintenance
 Describe the application in data center network
of FCOE
0.5d
 Describe the background of TRILL
Target Audience
 Describe the basic concept of TRILL
 Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
97
 Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
 Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
 Describe the application of TRILL in modern
 Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast
network
source registration
 Configure TRILL protocol
 Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
 Describe the principle of stack technology
to SPT
 Configure PIM-SM
 Describe the stack technology realization on CE
 List the key technologies of PIM SSM
switch
 Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
 Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and
 Configure PIM SSM
CE12800 switch
 List the procedure of configuration of stack on
 Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
TOR switch
 Configure PIM-DM
CE12800 switch
 Describe background of VS technology
 Describe the realization of VS technology
 Describe the principle of VS technology
 Configure QoS
 Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE
switch
series switch
 Describe the background of VM virtual migration
 Describe the technologies for VM virtual
series switch
migration
 Describe the procedure of realization of VM
virtual migration
series switch
 Describe the solution of Huawei data Center
network implementation
 Describe STP functions
 Describe STP implementation
 Describe RSTP improvement compared with
STP
upgrade by FTP on
 Describe MSTP calculation
 Configure STP, RSTP, MSTP
CE12800 switch
Duration
10 working days
 Differentiate the classification of multicast routing
Class Size
protocol
 List the features of common multicast routing
Min 6, Max 12
protocols
98
2.9.4
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training Path
OSW31
Lecture
switch
0.5d
0.5d
CE switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution
OSW33
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe the architecture of data center
 Describe the data center development
 Describe Huawei data center network solution
Data Center Network Key technologies
 Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
3d
 Describe FCOE network basic architecture
 Describe the FCOE implementation of related
technologies
Maintenance
 Describe DCB function technical principle
 Describe the application in data center network
0.5d
of FCOE
Target Audience
 Describe the background of TRILL
 Describe the basic concept of TRILL
 Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Prerequisites
 Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
 Describe the application of TRILL in modern
network
 Configure TRILL protocol
 Describe the principle of stack technology
knowledge
 Describe the stack technology realization on CE
Objectives
switch
 Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and
be able to:
CE12800 switch
data center switch
TOR switch
99
CE12800 switch
 Describe background of VS technology
series switch
 Describe the realization of VS technology
 Describe the principle of VS technology
 Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE
switch
 Describe the background of VM virtual migration
upgrade by FTP on
 Describe the technologies for VM virtual
migration
 Describe the procedure of realization of VM
virtual migration
CE12800 switch
 Describe the solution of Huawei data center
Duration
network implementation
5 working days
series switch
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
series switch
100
2.10
WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
2.10.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training
Training Path
 Know the mechanism and configuration of
communication between VLANs
 Describe what WLAN is
WLAN Technology Basics
OWL0A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe the development process of WLAN
2d
technology
Target Audience
 List typical application scenarios of WLAN
technology
 Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
Prerequisites
and the basic concepts of channel
 Describe the rules of the working frequency
band and channel in each country
Objectives
 List other technologies related to WLAN
 Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
be able to:
 Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
 Describe IP route process
 List Huawei WDS network mode
 Describe the means of routing table
 Describe mesh network mode
 Differentiate the route load balance and route
 Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
backup
 List the advantages of 802.11n
Duration
 Configure default route
2 working days
 Know what VLAN is
Class Size
 Know concepts about VLAN
 Configure VLAN basic function
Min 6, Max 12
101
2.10.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
 Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Training Path
 Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
WLAN Installation and Basic
OWL1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Install AC6605
 Describe the models and usage scenarios of
1d
Huawei APs
Target Audience
 Describe the basic installation of different types
APs
 List the note during installation
Prerequisites
 Complete different types APs installation
 Describe the WLAN basic component
 Use Huawei VRP basic command
 Configure Basic Attributes of AC
knowledge
 Upgrade AC and AP
Objectives
Duration
1 working day
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe Huawei WLAN solution
 Describe Huawei AC basic performance
Min 6, Max 12
 List Huawei wireless AP
102
2.10.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
 Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
Training Path
 Outline the typical Application of WLAN
WLAN Basic Operation and
OWL1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as
a L2 switch or gateway
3d
 Describe the methods of AP management
Target Audience
 Describe the AP boot sequence
 Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Prerequisites
 List the PoE components
 Describe PoE budget
knowledge
 Configure the equipment interface of POE
Objectives
 Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the
AC
be able to:
 Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
 Configure the basic attribute of AC
 List the encryption suites of WLAN
 List the authentication methods of WLAN
 Configure security-profile
 Install AC6605
 Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
 Configure WLAN business by wizard
Huawei APs
 Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Duration
Aps
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and
Fit AP
103
2.10.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
WLAN Operation and Maintenance
Training
OWL11
5d
Target Audience
AC
Huawei WLAN network
Prerequisites
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
be able to:
 Describe the basic function of AC6605 LSW side
 Configure the AC LSW's common functions
 Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
 List the method of WLAN reliability
 Configure WLAN dual-link backup
 Install AC6605
 Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
 Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Huawei APs
 Configure WLAN roaming
 Describe
Aps
the contents of user authority
management
 Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and
White list
 Configure user group authorization
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit
 Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment
AP
scenarios
 Describe the Fresnel Zone
 Understand
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as a
Radio Frequency Mathematics
 Describe Huawei outdoor AP
L2 switch or gateway
 List antennas characteristic
 Describe how to select antennas
 Describe WDS basic concept
 List WDS application scenarios
 Describe WDS setup
 Configure WDS
104
 Configure 802.11n basic
 Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN
 Describe the principle of WLAN user load
planner
 Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
balance
 Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
 List the common fault of WLAN
 Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the
 Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
AC6605
Duration
 Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
5 working days
 Describe eSight WLAN management advance
Class Size
features
 Use eSight batch operate AP
Min 6, Max 12
 Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
105
2.10.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
ACU Operation and Maintenance
Training
OWL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
5d
Target Audience
AC
Prerequisites
Huawei WLAN network
knowledge
Objectives
be able to:
 Describe the basic function of ACU LSW side
 Configure the AC LSW's common functions
 Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
 Describe the ACU Concept and Function
 List the method of WLAN reliability
 Describe the ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700
 Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Relationship
 Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
 Describe the ACU Hardware Structure
 Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
 Installing/Replacing ACU
 Configure WLAN roaming
 Describe
Huawei APs
the contents of user authority
management
 Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist
Aps
and White list
 Configure user group authorization
 Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
deployment scenarios
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and
 Describe the Fresnel Zone
Fit AP
 Understand
Radio Frequency Mathematics
 Describe Huawei outdoor AP
 List antennas characteristic
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as
 Describe how to select antennas
a L2 switch or gateway
 Describe WDS basic concept
 List WDS application scenarios
 Describe WDS setup
 Configure WDS
106
 Configure 802.11n basic
 Describe the basic Characteristics of the
 Describe the principle of WLAN user load
WLAN planner
 Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
balance
 Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
 List the common fault of WLAN
 Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the
 Describe common fault troubleshooting of
ACU
WLAN
 Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
Duration
 Describe eSight WLAN management advance
5 working days
features
Class Size
 Use eSight batch operate AP
Min 6, Max 12
107
2.10.6 WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe the development process of
encryption techniques
WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization
OWL0E
Lecture, Hands-on exercise,
Case-study
 Describe the development of authentication
techniques
5d
 Use protocol analyzer software
Target Audience
 Describe authentication architecture of WPA
 Describe AAA basic principle
Administrators
 Configure WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)
 Configure Radius filter attribute and
Prerequisites
management authority between users
 List extended security technology that Huawei
WLAN supports
 HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge
 Configure various security authentication
Objectives
techniques in AC
 Describe scenarios of Huawei outdoor WLAN
deployment
be able to:
 List Huawei outdoor AP models and their
 Describe the basic principles of WLAN
features
designing
 Describe the basic process of WLAN designing
 Describe dBi and antenna pattern
 List Huawei WLAN devices
 Choose the right outdoor antenna
 Differentiate the application features of different
 Describe the basic concepts of WDS
 List the common applications of WDS
network modes
 Use WLAN planner to design WLAN
 Use WDS configuration command
 Describe the application features of small and
 List the basic protocols for wireless network
management
medium-sized enterprise WLAN
 Use NTP protocol and syslog protocol to
 List the common used WLAN deployment
configure time of AC
modes of small and medium-sized enterprise
 Describe the principle of SNMP protocol
 Plan the VLAN\route\channel of small and
 Configure the SNMP parameters of AC
medium-sized enterprise WLAN
 Describe the application features of large-scale
 Use eSight to discover devices
enterprise WLAN
 Use eSight wizard to configure WLAN
 List the common used WLAN deployment
 Use eSight to detect WLAN devices
modes of large-scale enterprise
 Use eSight to manage AP
 Design WLAN HA feature
 Configure WLAN wireless service-set
 Design WLAN voice
 Design WLAN expandability feature
Duration
 Design WLAN advanced security feature
5 working days
 Design outdoor WLAN
Class Size
 Estimate the advantages and disadvantages of
WLAN Network Design approach
Min 6, Max 12
 List security threat types of WLAN
108
2.11
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
2.11.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
VRP System Operation
be able to:
 Describe ME60 product hardware structure
ODA02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe ME60-X series products hardware
structure
 Describe ME60 product feature
ME60 Product Introduction
 Describe the VRP system structure
ODB01
Lecture, LVC
0.5d
 Describe the basic configuration and
commands
 Upgrade VRP system
ME60 Product Routine Maintenance
ODB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Configure the VRP user logging authentication
 Configure FTP service
1d
 Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP
system
Target Audience
 Describe basic BRAS technologies
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer
 Describe ME60 product routine maintenance
Prerequisites
Duration
 A basic understanding of data communication
2 working days
 A general understanding of telecom network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
109
2.11.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
A general understanding of routing basics
Objectives
ME60 Product Introduction
ODB01
Lecture, LVC
0.5d
be able to:
 Describe ME60 product hardware structure
 Describe ME60-X series products hardware
structure
ME60 Routing Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB05
 Describe ME60 product feature
1.5d
 Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features
 Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
 Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol
ME60 BRAS Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB06
features
 Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
4d
 Describe RADIUS protocol principle
 Describe DHCP protocol principle
 Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle
ME60 L2TP Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB07
 Describe ME60 PPP service features and
1d
realization
 Describe ME60 IP service features and
realization
ME60 Multicast Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB08
 Describe ME60 leased line service feature and
realization
1d
 Describe ME60 BRAS service features
troubleshooting
 Configure ME60 PPP service features
ME60 QoS Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB09
 Configure ME60 IP service features
 Configure ME60 leased line service feature
1d
 Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization
 Configure ME60 L2TP feature
 Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization
ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features
Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB17
 Configure ME60 QoS feature
1d
 Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization
 Configure ME60 RUI feature
Target Audience
Duration
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance engineer
10 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
At least one year of experiences in the operation or
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance of data communication equipment
A general understanding of TCP/IP
110
2.11.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and
ME60 IPTV Service Features
realization
 Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
4d
and realization
 Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization
Target Audience
 Describe ME60 IPTV solution features
 Describe IPTV bear network multicast
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance engineer
deployment solutions
Prerequisites
 Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature
Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance
 Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
Training”
Duration
A good understanding of datacom network
protocols
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
111
2.11.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
ME60 Products Troubleshooting
be able to:
 Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
5d
 Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting
 Perform ME60 leased line features
Target Audience
troubleshooting
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer or
 Perform ME60 multicast features
expert from technical supporting team
troubleshooting
Prerequisites
 Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting
Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance
Duration
Training”
5 working days
A good understanding of datacom network
Class Size
protocols
Min 6, Max 12
112
2.11.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration
ODM06
be able to:
 Describe the architecture and main features of
1d
U2000
 Describe the directory structure of U2000
 List the main functions of U2000
U2000 System Introduction
 Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
ONU01
0.5d
performance management of U2000
 Perform the browse and setting operation for
alarm
U2000 Alarm and Performance
Management
ONU02
Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
 Perform the basic response operation for
common alarm events
0.5d
performance events
Target Audience
 Manage ME60 by using U2000
 Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000
U2000 operator and maintainer
IP network routine monitor and maintainer
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having the basic Knowledge of Huawei ME60
Class Size
product
Min 6, Max 12
113
2.12
PTN Products Training Programs
2.12.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
PTN Products Hardware Description
ODP03
be able to:
1d
ODP05
Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the
1d
Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the
precautions
Duration
2 working days
PTN series installation and commissioning engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Having an overview of PTN products
applications



Target Audience

precautions
PTN Products Installation and
Commissioning

Having an overview of telecommunications
114
2.12.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
Lecture, Demo
ODP03
be able to:
1d



Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site
maintenance
PTN Products Field Maintenance
ODP06
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in
NOC

Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance

Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting

Describe 950&910 troubleshooting

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine
maintenance in NOC
ODP07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Duration
Target Audience
2 working days
Class Size
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Min 6, Max 12
applications

115
2.12.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Prerequisites

ODP03
Lecture, Demo
applications

1d
Objectives
PTN Products Features Description
ODP04
Lecture
be able to:
1d
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in
NOC
ODP07
PTN Products Public Principle
ODP08
Lecture
2d
PTN Products Public Features
ODP09
Lecture, Demo
2d
PTN Products Basic Configuration
ODP10 Hands-on exercise, Demo
1d
PTN Products Service Configuration
2d

Describe TCP&IP basic concepts

Describe Ethernet basic principle

Describe basic IP routing protocol works

Describe MPLS basic concepts



Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature

Describe PTN 950&910 software feature

Describe PTN products PWE3 technology

Describe PTN products control plane

Describe PTN products QoS technology

Describe PTN products protection technology

Describe PTN products packet clock technology

Configure PTN products basic parameters

Configure PTN products interfaces

Configure PTN products control plane

Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel

Configure PTN products CES service

Configure PTN products ATM service

Configure PTN products E-Line service

Configure PTN products E-LAN service

Configure PTN products E-AGGR service

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine
maintenance in NOC

PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
ODP13
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting
process
Duration
10 working days
Target Audience
Class Size
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer
Min 6, Max 12
116
2.12.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
PTN Products Advanced Configuration
be able to:
2d
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

Configure PTN products QoS features

Configure PTN products protection

Deploy PTN products integrated services

Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting
process
ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d

Describe PTN products alarm and performance
analysis

PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting
ODP14
Lecture, Case-study
troubleshooting sase

2.5d
Locate and eliminate PTN products faults
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
Class Size
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Describe PTN products common
Min 4, Max 12
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
117
2.12.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path

Plan the PTN network management and DCN

Plan the equipment types according to the
network requirement
PTN Network Planning and Design

Plan the PTN equipment boards

Plan the PTN network protections

Plan the PTN network synchronization

Plan the PTN network QoS

Design the PTN network layers

Design the PTN network slots allocation
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance

Design the PTN equipment parameters
training

Design the MPLS tunnel parameters

Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services
ODP15
Lecture, Case-study
3d
Target Audience
PTN series network planning and design engineer
Prerequisites

Objectives
parameters
Duration
be able to:

Describe the PTN network planning process

Collect the network requirements information

Plan the PTN network layers

Plan the PTN network services
3 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 12
118
2.13
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training
Programs
2.13.1 eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training
 Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Training Path
 Describe about physical resource management
eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and
Maintenance
ONM1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
functions
 Use link resource management functions
1d
 Use electronic label management features
Target Audience
 Use about NE Explorer Describe
 Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Monitoring Staffs
 Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Administrators
 Describes the setting alarm mask steps
 Describes the remote alarm notification
Prerequisites
procedure
 Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
 Describe common operations for managing NE
Objectives
configuration files
 Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
files
be able to:
 Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
 Describe the basic concepts of network
parameters
management
 Describe the network management functions
Duration
 Describe the network management component
1 working day
 Describe the enterprise network overview
Class Size
 Describe the basic functions of eSight
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the networking mode of eSight system
 Describe eSight related indicators Describe
topology management
119
2.13.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training)
 Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Training Path
 Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and
Maintenance
ONM11
 Describes the setting alarm mask steps
 Describes the remote alarm notification
2d
procedure
Target Audience
 Describes the basic concepts of performance
management
Monitoring Staffs
 Describes the performance monitoring process
Administrators
 Describes the ways to browsing performance
monitoring data
Prerequisites
 Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
 Describe common operations for managing NE
configuration files
Objectives
 Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
files
 Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
be able to:
parameters
 Describe the basic concepts of network
 Describe an overview of the functions provided
management
by the smart configuration tool
 Describe the network management functions
 Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
 Describe the network management component
template
 Describe the enterprise network overview
 Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
 Describe the basic functions of eSight
plan sheet
 Describe the networking mode of eSight system
 Describe the functions of Deployment record
 Describe eSight related indicators
management
 Describe the installation profile
 Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
 Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps
 Describe querying logs
 Master eSight license function and application
 Describe Lower-Layer NMS
 Describe the user authority control and managed
 Describe licenses management
domain management of eSight
 Describe backing up and restoring the database
 Describe topology management
 Describe NE packages management
 Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Duration
 Describe about physical resource management
functions
2 working days
 Use link resource management functions
Class Size
 Use electronic label management features
Min 6, Max 12
 Use about NE Explorer
120
2.13.3 eSight WLAN Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight WLAN Management
ONM1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN
0.5d
 Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN
Target Audience
management
 Describe maintenance routine task of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
WLAN
Administrators
 Use eSight WLAN serve management to
Prerequisites
manage WLAN equipment
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
121
2.13.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight MPLS VPN Management
ONM1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN
0.5d
 Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN
Target Audience
Automatic Discovery of eSight
 Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring
Monitoring Staffs
Services of eSight
Administrators
 Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
122
2.13.5 eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management
ONM1J Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
be able to:
 Describe the basic concepts of MPLS tunnels
Target Audience
 Configure automatic discovery of MPLS tunnels
 Monitor functions of MPLS tunnels
Monitoring Staffs
Duration
Administrators
0.5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
123
2.13.6 eSight SLA Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight SLA Management
be able to:
ONM1D Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
 Describe the functions and basic concepts of
Target Audience
SLA of eSight
 Use the service management of SLA of eSight
 Use the task management of SLA of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
 Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight
Administrators
 Use the report of SLA of eSight
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
124
2.13.7 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight IPSec VPN Management
be able to:
ONM1E Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
 Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN
Target Audience
 Describe eSight IPSec VPN management
features
 Use eSight IPSec VPN management features
Monitoring Staffs
Duration
Administrators
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
125
2.13.8 eSight Smart Report Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight Smart Report Management
ONM1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe the basic functions of eSight Report
 Use eSight Report features
Duration
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
0.5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
126
2.13.9 eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer)
Management Training
ONM1G Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Describe the basic concepts of NTA
0.5d
management
Target Audience
 Use eSight NTA management features
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA
Monitoring Staffs
management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
127
2.13.10 eSight Access Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight Access Management
ONM1H Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Describe eSight access service management
0.5d
features
Target Audience
 Use eSight access service management features
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
access service management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
128
2.13.11 eSight Data Center Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight Data Center Management
ONM1I
be able to:
 Describe the needs of data center service
0.5d
management
Target Audience
 Use eSight data center service management
features
Monitoring Staffs
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight data
Administrators
center service management
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
129
2.13.12 eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
VSM Product Overview
be able to:
Lecture,
OSS31
 Describe the background of VSM system
0.5d
 Describe VSM system function
 Describe VSM system structure
VSM Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
OSS32
 Describe Typical Scenarios of VSM System
Application
0.5d
 Describe VSM System Performance index
 Understand VSM Installation flow and
VSM Product Operation and Maintenance
OSS33
Preparations
 Be familiar with VSM Installation Process
1d
 Be familiar with VSM system Basic Operation
 Understand Functional modules of VSM
Target Audience
 Understand VSM System Technology and
Application
Installers and Commissioning Staff
 Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of
Administrators
VSM
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5
working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
130
2.13.13 eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eLog Product Overview
be able to:
Lecture,
OSS41
 Describe the background of eLog system
0.5d
 Describe eLog system function
 Describe eLog system structure
eLog Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
OSS42
 Describe Typical Scenarios of eLog System
Application
0.5d
 Describe eLog System Performance
 Understand eLog Installation flow and
eLog Product Operation and Maintenance
OSS43
Preparations
 Be familiar with eLog Installation Process
1d
 Be familiar with eLog system Basic Operation
 Understand Functional modules of eLog
Target Audience
 Understand eLog System Technology and
Application
Installers and Commissioning Staff
Administrators
eLog
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5
working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
131
2.14
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
2.14.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe enterprise network design principles
Enterprise Network Design Outlines
ORS91
Lecture, Case-study
 Describe enterprise network design basic
process
1d
 Analyze general enterprise requirements for
Target Audience
network design
 Describe best practices of enterprise network
design
Administrators
 Describe Huawei enterprise network products
 Design general enterprise network
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
132
2.14.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Designing Enterprise Campus Network
ORS92
Lecture, Case-study
be able to:
 Describe concepts of campus network
1d
 Describe Huawei OneNet campus network
Target Audience
solution
 List common technologies in campus network
Administrators
 Describe Huawei OneNet campus business
solution
Prerequisites
 Choose appropriate products for campus
network
Duration
knowledge
1 working day
 A general experience in network design
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
133
2.14.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Analyze of the general needs of enterprise
network construction
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise
ORS93
Lecture, Case-study
 Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN
1d
 Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS
Target Audience
L3VPN architecture
 Select the appropriate technology and solutions
for enterprise networking
Administrators
 Choose the appropriate product for enterprise
networking
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
 A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
134
2.14.4 Data Center Network Design Training
 List Principles of Data Center Network Design
Training Path
 Design Data Center Network Architecture
Designing Data Center Network
ORS94
Lecture
 Design Data Center Network Areas
 Design Data Center Network Panels
2d
 Design Data Center Network Services
Target Audience
 Design Data Center Network Interconnection
 Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Administrators
 Describe Data Center WAN Optimization
Solution
 Describe Data Center NetStream Solution
Prerequisites
 List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center
Network
 Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center
knowledge
Network Solution
 A basic understanding of data center applications
 List Huawei CloudEngine Products
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Outline Data Center Network Overview
 Outline Trend of Data Center Network
Min 6, Max 12
 Outline Data Center Network Solution
135
2.15
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
2.15.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
 Understand firewall functions and technologies.
Training Path
 Understand the service process and basic
Firewall Elementary Technology
FW01
configuration of firewalls.
1d
ACLs.
Target Audience
 Understand Interface-based packet filtering
scenario and configuration
 Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario
Administrators
and configuration
Prerequisites
technology.
 Understand the application of NAT.
 Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.
knowledge
Duration
Objectives
1 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
firewalls.
136
137
2.16
Security Technology Topic Training Programs
2.16.1 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
 Understand key VPN technologies.
Training Path
 Understand the classification and application of
Basic VPN Technology
FW03
VPN.
 Understand the principles of L2TP.
1.5d
 Understand the principles of the IPSec
technology.
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
FW0B
technology.
 Understand
1.5d
Advanced features and
Target Audience
 Understand
Advanced features and
configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
 Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN
Prerequisites
applications.
 Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
 Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
Duration
 Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
138
2.16.2 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
Training Path
 Understand major antivirus technologies for
gateways
 Understand the key technology of Web filtering.
Firewall UTM Technical Topic
FW0C
 Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
3d
 Understand the main DPI technology.
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting of IPS
 Troubleshooting of AV
 Troubleshooting of URL filtering
Prerequisites
 Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
 Troubleshooting of Internet behavior
management.
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe the basic knowledge of UTM
Min 6, Max 12
prevention technology.
139
2.16.3 Firewall Advanced Technology Training
 Describe Advanced Firewall Security Features
Training Path
 Understand Firewall Reliability Technology
Advanced Firewall Security Features
FW0D
 Understand Virtual Firewall Technology
 Understand Basic Attack Defense
2d
Technologies on Firewall
 Troubleshooting of attack defense.
 Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology
FW0A
 Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
principle
1d
 Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Target Audience
Basic Networking and Configuration
 Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Backup Typical Networking.
Prerequisites
 Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
140
2.17
Firewall Training Programs
2.17.1 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
Objectives
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product
Overview
Lecture
FW11
be able to:
 Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000
0.5d
firewall
 Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic
Installation and Configuration
FW12
USG2000/5000 firewall
 Describe the application scenario of
0.5d
Target Audience
 Describe the hardware Installation and
maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
 Describe the basic configuration of
Prerequisites
 Describe the basic WEB management of
 Be familiar with PC operation system
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
141
2.17.2 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and
Training Path
ACLs.
FW01
1d
and configuration
technology.
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product
Overview
Lecture
FW11
 Understand the application of NAT
0.5d
 Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls
 Describe the basic knowledge of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic
FW12
0.5d
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Operation
and Maintenance
FW13
maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
3d
 Describe the basic configuration of
Target Audience
Prerequisites
 Describe the upgrade method of
 Understand the routine maintenance of
 Describe the typical network configuration of
knowledge
 Describe the networking and configuration of
Objectives
USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
 Describe the troubleshooting method of
be able to:
Duration
firewalls.
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
142
2.17.3 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
USG6600 Series Product Overview
FW19
Lecture
be able to:
 Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600
0.5d
firewall
 Describe the function and features of USG6600
USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
0.5d
FW20
firewall
 Describe the application scenario of USG6600
firewall
Target Audience
maintenance of USG6600 firewall
 Describe the basic configuration of USG6600
firewall
Prerequisites
USG6600 firewall
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
143
2.17.4 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training)
Training Path
ACLs.
FW01
1d
and configuration
 Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
USG6600 Series Product Overview
FW19
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600
firewall
USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
0.5d
FW20
 Describe the function and features of USG6600
firewall
 Describe the application scenario of USG6600
firewall
USG6600 Series Product Operation and
Maintenance
FW21
maintenance of USG6600 firewall
3d
 Describe the basic configuration of USG6600
Target Audience
firewall
USG6600 firewall
Prerequisites
 Describe the upgrade method of USG6600
firewall
 Understand the routine maintenance of
USG6600 firewall
 Describe the typical network configuration of
knowledge
USG6600 firewall
 Describe the networking and configuration of
Objectives
USG6600 firewall
USG6600 firewall
be able to:
Duration
firewalls.
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
144
2.17.5 USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
USG9500 Series Firewall Product
Overview
Lecture,
FW14
0.5d
be able to:
 Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's
high-end series firewall
USG9500 Series Firewall Basic Installation
and Configuration
FW15
 Describe the software function of Huawei's
0.5d
 Describe the performance parameter of
Target Audience
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
 Master USG9500 Hardware Installation
 Master USG9500 Basic Configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
145
2.17.6 USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path
FW01
ACLs.
1d
USG9500 Series Firewall Product
Overview
Lecture,
FW14
and configuration
0.5d
technology.
USG/9500 Series Firewall Basic
FW15
 Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's
0.5d
 Describe the software function of Huawei's
USG9500 Series Firewall Operation and
Maintenance
FW16
 Describe the performance parameter of
3d
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Target Audience
 Master USG9500 Hardware Installation
 Master USG9500 Basic Configuration
 Master USG9500 Basic Function Features and
Prerequisites
Configurations
 Master USG9500 Routine Maintenance
 Master Basic Principles of USG9500
Maintenance
 Master USG9500 Information Collection
knowledge
 Master USG9500 Troubleshooting Ability
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
firewalls.
146
2.17.7 USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
 Understand ASPF technology
Training Path
 Master firewall Security Policy and
Firewall Series Product Overview
Lecture,
FW17
configuration
 Understand Packet Filtering technology
1d
 Understand NAT technology
 Master the application scenarios configuration
of
Firewall Series Product Operation and
Maintenance
FW18
NAT
 Understand IP-link、Link-group、IP-CAR
2d
technology
Target Audience
 Master IP-CAR configuration
 Understand the principles of the IPSec VPN
technology.
Prerequisites
technology.
 Master VPN basic configuration
 Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
basic technology and configuration
knowledge
 Master principles and configuration of the
IPSec Dual-System Hot Backup
Objectives
 Understan firewall UTM technology
 Understand firewall UTM basic configuration
 Understand Application and configuration of
be able to:
basic attack defense technologies.
 Describe the basic knowledge of
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Understand firewall security zone
147
2.17.8 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Understand the hardware architecture and
SVN Product Overview
Lecture,
FW31
Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Understand the main hardware component of
0.5d
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Understand the software architecture of
SVN Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
FW32
 Understand the application environment of
0.5d
 Understand the application scenario of
Target Audience
 Describe the hardware installation of
Administrators
 Understand the physical environment
Prerequisites
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the basics configuration of
Duration
1 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
148
2.17.9 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and
Training Path
Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Product Overview
Lecture,
FW31
0.5d
SVN Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
FW32
0.5d
 Describe the hardware installation of
SSL VPN Technology
FW05
 Understand the physical environment
1d
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the basics configuration of
SVN Product Operation and Maintenance
FW33
 Understand the Solution deployment
1d
Target Audience
 Describe the high-level function configuration
of
 Understand the System Status of
Prerequisites
 Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login
Manage page
 Understand the Common faults and positioning
method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
knowledge
 Understand the troubleshooting method of
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
technology
 Understand the configuration of SSL VPN
149
2.18
Security Management Software Training Programs
2.18.1 Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Policy Center Product Overview
be able to:
Lecture,
SS11
 Describe the background of Policy Center
0.5d
system
 Describe Policy Center system function and
Policy Center Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
SS12
system structure.
 Describe the function of each component.
0.5d
 Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center
Target Audience
System Application
 Describe Policy Center System Performance
index
 Understand Policy Center Installation Planning
Administrators
and Preparations
Prerequisites
 Be familiar with Policy Center Installation
Process
 Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic
Operation
knowledge
Duration
1 working days
 Be familiar with Terminal security elementary
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
150
2.18.2 Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM
 Understand the background of terminal security.
Training Path
 Understand Policy Center System Architecture
Basic Terminal Security Technology
Lecture,
SS01
 Understand Policy Center System Functions
 Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of Policy
1d
Center System Application
 Describe the background of Policy Center
system
Policy Center Product Overview
Lecture,
SS11
 Describe Policy Center system function and
0.5d
system structure.
 Describe the function of each component.
 Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center
Policy Center Product Basic Installation
and Configuration
SS12
System Application
 Describe Policy Center System Performance
0.5d
index
 Understand Policy Center Installation Planning
Policy Center Product Operation and
Maintenance
SS13
and Preparations
 Be familiar with Policy Center Installation
1d
Process
 Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic
Target Audience
Operation
 Understand Functional modules of Policy Center
Prerequisites
 Understand Policy Center System Technology
and Application
Policy Center
knowledge
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
151
2.18.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
DSM Product Overview
be able to:
Lecture,
SS21
 Describe the background of DSM system
0.5d
 Describe DSM system function and system
structure.
DSM Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
SS22
 Describe Typical Scenarios of DSM System
Application
0.5d
 Describe DSM System Performance index
 Understand DSM Installation Planning and
Preparations
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance
SS23
 Be familiar with DSM Installation Process
1d
 Be familiar with DSM system Basic Operation
 Understand Functional modules of DSM
Target Audience
 Understand DSM System Technology and
Application
Administrators
DSM
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
 Be familiar with document security elementary
knowledge
152
2.19
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
2.19.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
 Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Training Path
 Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS
NIP Product Overview
Lecture,
NI11
Device
 Understand the hardware architecture of NIP
0.5d
Device
 Understand the hardware specifications of NIP
Device
NIP Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
NI12
 Understand the hardware main component of
0.5d
NIP Device
 Understand the software architecture of NIP
Target Audience
 Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Device
 Understand the hardware installation of NIP
Administrators
Device
Prerequisites
 Understand the physical environment of NIP
Device
 Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
knowledge
Duration
1 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
153
2.19.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and
Training Path
 Understand the hardware specifications of NIP
Device
NIP Product Overview
Lecture,
NI11
 Understand the hardware main component of
NIP Device
0.5d
 Understand the software architecture of NIP
 Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
NI12
NIP Device
 Understand the hardware installation of NIP
0.5d
Device
 Understand the physical environment of NIP
Device
NIP Product Operation and Maintenance
NI13
 Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
 Understand Application control of IPS Device
2d
 Understand Application control of IDS Device
Target Audience
 Understand Threat Prevention of IPS Device
 Understand Threat Prevention of IDS Device
 Understand Typical Application scene of IPS
Prerequisites
Device
 Understand Typical Application scene of IDS
Device
knowledge
 Understand the maintenance operations of NIP
Device
Objectives
 Understand the software patches of NIP Device
 Understand the Troubleshooting of NIP Device
Duration
be able to:
 Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
3 working days
 Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Class Size
 Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS
Min 6, Max 12
Device
 Understand the hardware architecture of NIP
Device
154
2.20
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
2.20.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
 Describe Principle of DDoS attack and DDoS
Training Path
defense technology
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance
Training
SU11
 Understand network Design of management
Center
3d
 Understand network Design of Detecting Center
Target Audience
 Understand network Design of Cleaning Center
 Understand mirroring traffic, monitor network
traffic and redirection traffic in DDoS Solution
Prerequisites
 Master basic configuration and system
management
 Master DDoS Product Management and
Customer Management
 Master DDoS Solution Report management and
knowledge
System maintenance
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe Huawei DDos Product Component
 Describe DDos Network Orientation and Typical
Application
155
2.20.2 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Anyoffice Device
Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance
Training
SU42
Anyoffice Device
2d
Target Audience
Anyoffice Device
 Describe the basics configuration of Anyoffice
Device
Prerequisites
 Understand the Solution deployment Anyoffice
Device
 Describe the high-level function configuration
of Anyoffice Device
 Describe the Anyoffice Deployment and Mobile
knowledge
Configuration of Anyoffice Device
 Understand the Common faults and positioning
Objectives
method of Anyoffice Device
 Understand the troubleshooting method of
Anyoffice Device
be able to:
Duration
technology
2 working days
 Understand the configuration of SSL VPN
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Specifications of Anyoffice Device
Anyoffice Device
156
2.21
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
2.21.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Firewall Planning and Design
FW04
Lecture,
be able to:
 Understand Huawei Security Concept
1d
 Understand Huawei Security Competence
Target Audience
Center
 Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
 Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security
Prerequisites
Products Application and Solution
Duration
1 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
157
158
159
3 Enterprise IT Training Courses
3.1 Enterprise IT Training Path
3.1.1
Storage Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-Storage-CUSN
Constructing Unified
Storage Network
5d
HCNA-Storage-BSSN
Building the Structure of
Storage Network
5d
Associate
Elective Guide

HCNP-Storage-CBDS
Constructing Big Data
Solution
5d
Follow the path to learn.
160
HCNP-Storage-CDPS
Constructing Data
Protection System
5d
3.1.2
Cloud Computing Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP
Building Cloud
Computing Platform
Associate
Elective Guide

Follow the path to learn
161
5d
3.1.3
Unified Storage Training Path
Plan & Design
Enterprise Storage Area
Network(SAN) Design Training
1d
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training
4d
Storage Area Network(SAN)
1d
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
2d
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T)
Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
4d
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end
Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
4d
SNS Series (SNS2124/SNS2224/
SNS2248) FC Switch Product
Deployment and Management Training
1d
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage
System Deployment and
2d
Management Training
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage
Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training
3d
Storage Technology
Foundation Training
Storage Technology Foundation
Training
1d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include T series storage array OceanStor 18500/18800, SNS, Dorado, VIS6000T
products and technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: centralized storage, backup, storage virtualization, disaster
recovery, cloud computing storage infrastructure and data center storage infrastructure.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.

162
3.1.4
NAS and Data Protection Training Path
Plan & Design
Enterprise Network Attached
Network (NAS) Design
Training
1d
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
OceanStor 9000 Storage System
Deployment and Management
Training
3d
N8500V2 Clustered NAS
Management Training
Enterprise Backup system
and Network Design Training
1d
Network Attached Storage(NAS)
1d
3d
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library
Management Training
3d
Backup Advanced Technology
Training
1d
HDP3500E Backup System
Training
3d
Technology Foundation
Training
Storage Technology
Foundation Training
1d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include OceanStor 9000, N8500, VTL6900 and HDP3500E products and
technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: file sharing, file-level data centralized storage and management,
unstructured data backup and management, file-level DST, file system backup and disaster recovery.

163
3.1.5
Cloud Storage Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud
Storage Deployment and
Management Training
4d
Training
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include cloud storage CSS, CSE products and technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: mass data storage and backup solution, storage virtualization
solutions, data center cloud storage solutions.

164
3.1.6
Server Products Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
RH Series Rack Server
Training
1d
X6000 Series Server
Training
1d
E6000 Series Blade Server
Training
1d
E9000 Series Blade Server
Training
1d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include RH series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.

165
3.1.7
Cloud Computing Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Desktop Cloud Solution(R2)
3d
Desktop Cloud Solution(R3)
Training
3d
FusionCube Solution
Training
3d
FusionShpere Solution
Training
3d
Training
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include, Desktop Cloud Solution, FusionCube and FusionShpere Solution
trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: large-scale integrated desktop cloud solution.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.
166
3.1.8
Data Center Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Enterprise Data Center Network
Design Training
Micro DC Deployment and
Management Training
1d
2d
Enterprise Data Center Security
Design Training
ManageOne Solution
Training
2d
1d
Enterprise Data Center Disaster
Recovery and Backup Design
Training
2d
Technology
Foundation
Training
IP Technology Foundation
(In 13 IP Programs)
3d
Firewall Technology Foundation
Training (In13 Security
Programs)
2d
Storage Technology
Foundation Training
1d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include Data Center Solution products trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: Micro DC solution and large-scale data center solutions.

167
3.2 List of Enterprise IT Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Storage Certification Training Programs
Ⅱ
5
6~12
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network
Ⅲ
5
6~12
HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training
Ⅲ
5
6~12
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System
Ⅲ
5
6~12
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training
Ⅱ
5
6~12
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Training
Ⅲ
5
6~12
Ⅱ
1
6~12
Storage Area Network(SAN)Advanced Technology Training
Ⅲ
1
6~12
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training
Ⅲ
1
6~12
Backup Advanced Technology Training
Ⅲ
1
6~12
Ⅱ
4
Ⅱ
2
Ⅱ
4
Ⅱ
4
Ⅱ
1
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network
Training
Training
Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs
IT Technology Foundation Training Programs
Storage Technology Foundation Training
IT Advanced Technology Training Programs
Unified Storage Training Programs
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array
Deployment and Management Training (Fast-Track)
T SeriesV2
(55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment
and Management Training
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment
SNS Series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product
168
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and
6~12
Ⅱ
2
Ⅱ
3
Ⅱ
3
Ⅱ
3
Ⅱ
3
Ⅱ
3
Ⅲ
4
RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6~12
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6~12
Ⅱ
1
Ⅱ
1
Ⅲ
3
Ⅲ
3
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training
Ⅲ
3
6~12
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training
Ⅲ
3
6~12
Ⅲ
1
6~12
Management Training
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment
6~12
NAS and Data Protection Training Programs
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management
Training
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and
Management Training
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
Cloud Storage Training Programs
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and
Management Training
6~12
Server Training Programs
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management
Training
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
Cloud Computing Training Programs
Desktop Cloud Solution(R2) Deployment and Management
Training
Desktop Cloud Solution(R3) Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
Data Center Training Programs
Micro DC Deployment and Management Training
169
Ⅲ
2
6~12
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6~12
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6~12
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6~12
Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training
Ⅳ
2
6~12
Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training
Ⅳ
1
6~12
Ⅳ
2
ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training
IT Design Training Programs
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design
Training
170
Ⅲ: Advanced Course
6~12
Ⅳ: Expert Course
3.3 Storage Certification Training Programs
3.3.1
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training
Training Path
 Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge
and key technology
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-
 Know NAS system basal structure and concept
Building the Structure of Storage Network)
 Master multipath technology and host
OHC11091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 5d
connection basal technology and application
Target Audience
 Master SAN storage array product
function,
hardware, interface, network and typical
Those who want to be storage engineer
application
Those who want to achieve HCNA-Storage
 Master storage array and mapping configuration
certification
on ISM
 Master SAN storage product routine
Managers
maintenance and troubleshooting
 Know object storage technology
Prerequisites
 Understand virtual storage technology and
application.
 Know basal network knowledge
 Master backup and recovery concept, topology
 Know computer basal knowledge
and backup policy
 Know OS basal knowledge
 Know disaster recovery and application
Objectives
 Master basic cloud compute technology
 Understand data center solution
be able to:
 Know big data technology
 Know data center development, storage in the
 Be able to build FC-SAN or IP-SAN storage
data center action, cloud data center
network, and be able to manage and maintain
development.
SAN storage system and network
 Know the basal technology of servers.
Duration
 Know storage system and network basal
5 working days
concept, structure and component
Class Size
 Know RAID basal concept, data construction
way, common RAID principle, feature and
Min 6, Max 12
different RAID application scenario
171
3.3.2
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training
Training Path
 Know storage data process and communication
HCNP-CUSN Huawei Certified Network Professional
- Constructing Unified Storage Network
Target Audience
protocol, principle and application
 Know storage system advanced technology and
application
 Know storage virtualization technology and
application
 Master VIS system principle, deployment,
Enterprise ICT technology management
advanced technology and application
personal and IT technology personal
 Know connection and application between storage
Those who hope to systemically learn and
and mainstream OS platforms
master storage technology and application,
build information storage and data protection
 Master storage system fault diagnosis and disposal
method
solution ability Maintainers
 Understand storage performance factor and
Managers
optimization
 Master storage system and network (SAN)
Prerequisites
common technology and application; master
 Know server basal knowledge and application
information storage system and SAN storage
 Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
solution plan, deployment, management and
 Understand storage system basal operation and
maintenance ability
Duration
technology
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Master unified storage structure, component
172
3.3.3
HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training
Training Path
be able to:
HCNP-CBDS Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalConstructing Big Data Solution
OHC12092 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo
 Be familiar with Big Data concept, development
and key technology
 Be familiar with Big Data Storage solution
5d
architecture and technology: distributed
Target Audience
Storage, clustered NAS,DST, load balancing ,
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
quota, connection, file system snapshot, mirror
and IT technology personal
and replication technology
 Command Clustered NAS N8500 architecture,
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
network planning, deployment, operation and
storage technology and application, build
management
information storage and data protection solution
 Command Big Data Storage OceanStor9000
ability Maintainers
architecture, network planning, deployment,
Managers
operation and management
 Command Big Data Storage troubleshooting
Prerequisites
 Command Big Data Storage solution planning
programming
Duration
 Understand main OS and DB operation and
5 working days
technology
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
173
3.3.4
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training
Training Path
 Be familiar with backup and recovery system
architecture, backup component, backup media,
HCNP-CDPS Huawei Certified Network
Backup mode and strategy
Professional- Constructing Data Protection System
 Be familiar with backup network, backup and
recovery technology and application
Target Audience
 Command HDP, VTL backup system plan,
deployment and management
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
 Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP
and IT technology personal
technology principle
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
 Know DR solution, especially the cloud disaster
storage technology and application, build information
technology and application scenario
storage and data protection solution ability
 Command backup system troubleshooting
Maintainers
 Command backup DR technology and
Managers
application, master backup and recovery system
and data protection solution plan, deployment
Prerequisites
and management.
Duration
 Know SAN,NAS concept and technology
5 working days
 Understand mainstream database system basal
Class Size
operation and technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
174
3.4 Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs
3.4.1
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training
 Describe AD technology
Training Path
 Describe DNS technology
HCNA-BCCP Huawei Certified Network
Associate-Building Cloud Computing Platform
OHC1108
Lecture, hands-on exercise
 Describe DHCP technology
 Describe the features and concept of virtual
5d
machine
1
Target Audience
network
Those who hope to become Cloud Computing
engineers
storage
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-Cloud certificate
 Describe the basic concept of storage
Administrators
 Describe the RAID function of storage
Planners and designers
 Describe the muti-path technology of storage
 Describe Huawei Cloud Computing solution
Prerequisites
 Describe the hardware structure of Huawei Cloud
 Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
 Describe the software structure of Huawei Cloud
 Be familiar with server basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
 Describe the structure and configuration of
 Be familiar with network security basic
servers
knowledge and applications
 Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and
storage equipments
applications
Objectives
switches
 Describe the configuration of TC
be able to:
 Describe the structure and functions of
 Describe the evolution of Cloud Computing
FusionCompute
 Describe the basic concept and features of Cloud
FusionManager
Computing
 Describe the values of Cloud Computing
FusionAccess
 Describe the advantages of Cloud Computing
 Master the creation of VM image
technology
 Master the creation and assignment of VM
 Describe the deployment mode of Cloud
Duration
Computing
 Describe the business mode of Cloud Computing
5 working days
 Describe switching and routing technology
Class Size
 Describe VLAN technology
Min 6, max 12
 Describe QoS technology
 Describe cluster technology
175
3.5 IT Technology Foundation Training Programs
3.5.1
Storage Technology Foundation Training
Training Path
 Know RAID basal concept, data constructing,
common RAID principle, feature and different
Storage Technology Foundation
RAID application scenario
OST01
Lecture
 Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge and
1d
key technology
Target Audience
 Know NAS system basal structure and concept
 Master multipath technology and host connection
basal technology and application
Prerequisites
 Understand Huawei all series storage product
 Know computer basal knowledge
feature and main application
 Know OS basal knowledge
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Know storage system and network basal concept,
structure and component
176
3.6 IT Advanced Technology Training Programs
3.6.1
Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training
 Know storage system development trend
Training Path
 Know storage system common protocol and
Storage Area Network (SAN) Advanced
Technology
OST0A
Lecture
development trend
 Know SAN system reliability basal concept
1d
 Know SAN reliability basal affecting factor
Target Audience
 Know SAN reliability improvement basal factor
and method
 Know storage system performance criterion and
Managers
meaning
 Know storage system performance affecting
Prerequisites
factor
 Know storage system performance improvement
method
Duration
technology
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Know storage system basal structure
177
3.6.2
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced
Technology
be able to:
OST0B
Lecture
1d
 Be familiar with NAS and Clustered architecture,
component, technology and principle
Target Audience
 Be familiar with CIFS,NFS network file sharing
protocol
Managers
 Command network storage virtual system
architecture ,principle and deployment
 Command N8000 DST, file replication, file
Prerequisites
backup principle
Duration
1 working day
technology
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
178
3.6.3
Backup Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Be familiar with backup and recovery system
Backup Advanced Technology
OST0C
Lecture
architecture, backup component, backup media,
Backup mode and strategy
1d
 Be familiar with backup network, backup and
Target Audience
recovery technology
 Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP
technology principle
Managers
 Know DR solution, technology and application
scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
179
3.7 Unified Storage Training Programs
3.7.1
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Product Introduction
Lecture
OST11
be able to:
 Describe T series product position
0.25d
 Describe T series product structure
 Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design
Lecture
OST12
and component
 Describe T series product software structure and
0.25d
component
 Describe T series product main features and
Array Installation and Configuration
OST13
typical application scenario
 Understand T series storage plan and design
target
1d
 Understand T series storage plan rule
 Understand T series storage plan method
Array Routine Maintenance
 Master storage system hardware installation
 Master storage system device cabling
OST14
0.25d
 Master storage system power on sequence
 Master device configuration
 Master basal operation configuration
Array Troubleshooting
OST15
 Master T series product management
 Master T series product license using
0.25d
 Master T series product basal application
configuration
Array Advanced Function
 Master T series product performance stat.
function using
OST16
2d
 Master T series product upgrade
 Know T series product common fault disposal
Target Audience
 Master T series product fault disposal process
 Describe UltraPath product request and product
Managers
position
 Know UltraPath product main function feature
Prerequisites
 Know UltraPath product application scenario and
 Know PC OS
deployment scheme
 Know Snapshot definition, principle and
 Know basal computer knowledge
 Know basal storage technology
configuration process
 Know LUN Copy definition, principle,
180
using
 Know Remote replication definition, principle,
 Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature
application scenario
 Know Smart Cache definition, principle,
 Describe Dynamic RAID Group Expansion
principle, configuration
 Describe Split Mirror definition, principle,
Duration
4 working days
 Describe Thin Provisioning configuration feature
Class Size
request
 Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature and
Min 6, Max 12
181
3.7.2
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Objectives
Array Product Introduction
Lecture
OST11
be able to:
 Describe T series product position
0.25d
 Describe T series product structure
 Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design
Lecture
OST12
and component
 Describe T series product software structure and
0.25d
component
 Describe T series product main features and
Array Installation and Configuration
OST13
typical application scenario
 Master storage system hardware installation
 Master storage system device cabling
1d
 Master storage system power on sequence
 Master device configuration
Array Routine Maintenance
OST14
 Master basal operation configuration
 Master T series product management
0.25d
 Master T series product license using
 Master T series product basal application
Array Troubleshooting
OST15
configuration
 Master T series product performance stat.
function using
0.25d
 Master T series product upgrade
Target Audience
 Know T series product common fault disposal
Duration
Managers
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
 Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12
182
3.7.3
T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
 Describe T series V2 product position
Training Path
 Describe T series V2 product structure
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array
Lecture
OST17
 Describe T seriesV2 product hardware
configuration and component
0.25 d
 Describe T series V2 product software structure
and component
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array Plan
and Design
 Know T series V2 product hardware installation
plan
Lecture
OST18
0.25 d
 Know T series V2 product deployment and
configuration plan
 Master T series V2 product hardware installation
OST19
 Master T series V2 product basal operation
configuration
1 d
 Describe storage pool basal principle
 Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
Routine Maintenance
OST1A
reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
 Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
 Reconstruction performance analysis
0.25 d
 Storage pool configuration
 Know T series V2 product maintenance tool
Troubleshooting
using
 Master T series V2 product routine maintenance
OST1B
0.25 d
method
 Know T series V2 product upgrade process and
precaution
Advanced Function
OST1C
 Know T series V2 product common fault disposal
 Master T series V2 product fault disposal process
2 d
 Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Target Audience
deployment and configuration
 Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
plan, deployment and configuration
Managers
 Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
 Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
 Know PC OS
 Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
Objectives
 Know Remote replication definition, principle and
 Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
be able to:
183
Duration
 Describe clone principle, technology and
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
184
3.7.4
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
 Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product
position
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage
Lecture
OST1D
structure
0.25 d
hardware configuration and component
Plan and Design
software structure and component
Lecture
OST1E
 Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product hardware
0.25 d
installation plan
 Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product
deployment and configuration plan
 Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product
OST1F
1 d
hardware installation
 Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product basal
operation configuration
Routine Maintenance
OST1G
Lecture
 Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product
maintenance tool using
0.25 d
 Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product routine
maintenance method
Troubleshooting
OST1H
Lecture
 Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product upgrade
process and precaution
 Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product common
0.25 d
fault disposal
 Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product fault
Advanced Function
disposal process
 Describe storage pool basal principle
OST1I
Lecture
2 d
 Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
Target Audience
reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
 Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
 Reconstruction performance analysis
Managers
 Storage pool configuration
 Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
deployment and configuration
 Know PC OS
 Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
 Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
Objectives
 Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
be able to:
185
 Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
Duration
 Know Remote replication definition, principle and
4 working days
Class Size
 Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe clone principle, technology and
186
3.7.5
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248)
FC Switch Product Introduction
OST1J
Lecture
0.5d
be able to:
 Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure
 Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248)
FC Switch Configuration
OST1K
Lecture, demo
configuration
Duration
0.5d
1 working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
 Know PC OS
187
3.7.6
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path
Objectives
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Product
Introduction
OST1L
Lecture
be able to:
 Describe Dorado2100 G2/5000 product position
0.25d
 Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product
hardware/software structure component
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Installation
and Configuration
OST1M Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 KnowDorado2100 G2/5000 product main
function feature
1.5d
 Understand Dorado2100 G2/5000 product typical
application case
 Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
OST1N
Lecture, Demo
hardware/software installation process
 Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product basal
0.25d
configuration method
 Know Dorado2100 G2 product routine
Target Audience
maintenance operation process
 Know Dorado2100 G2 product upgrade process
Managers
 Know Dorado2100 G2 product fault disposal
Prerequisites
operation
 Know PC OS
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
188
3.7.7
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training
 Describe VIS6000T product position
Training Path
 Know VIS6000T product software/hardware
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Product
Introduction
Lecture
OST1O
structure component
 Know VIS6000Tproduct main function feature
0.25d
 Understand VIS6000Tproduct typical application
case
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Plan and
Design
 Know VIS6000T product hardware
installation/network plan
Lecture
OST1P
0.5d
 Master VIS6000T product hardware/software
installation and deployment
 Master VIS6000T product basal function
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Installation
and Configuration
OST1Q Lecture, Hands-on exercise
configuration
 Know VIS6000Tproduct maintenance tool
0.75d
 Know VIS6000Tproduct routine maintenance
method
 Master VIS6000T product common fault disposal
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Routine
Maintenance
Lecture
OST1R
process
 Know VIS6000T product fault disposal basal
0.25d
principle and method
 Know VIS6000T product replication function
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway
Troubleshooting
principle, key technology, application plan,
network and connection
Lecture
OST1S
 Master VIS6000T product replication function
0.25d
application deployment and configuration,
troubleshooting
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Advanced
Function
 Know VIS6000T product mirror function principle ,
key technology, application plan, network and
OST1T
1d
connection
 Master VIS6000T product mirror function
Target Audience
troubleshooting
Managers
 Know VIS6000T product snapshot function
principle, key technology, application plan,
Prerequisites
network and connection
 Master VIS6000T product snapshot function
 Know PC OS
troubleshooting
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
be able to:
189
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
190
3.8 NAS and Data Protection Training Programs
3.8.1
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training
 Know Windows, Linux OS operation
Training Path
 Know NAS system knowledge
OceanStor 9000 product Introduction
 Know cluster system foundation
OST25
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d
be able to:
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Technology
OST26
Lecture
 Describe OceanStor 9000 product, position,
main function, application scenario
0.5d
 Describe OceanStor 9000 user management,
AD/LDAP/NIS,NFS,CIFS, Dynamic storage tier
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation
and Configuration Planning
OST27
Lecture
principle
 Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product
0.25d
hardware installation Planning
 Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product
deployment and configuration Planning process
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation
and Configuration
OST28
and tools
 Command OceanStor 9000 product hardware
0.5d
installation
 Command OceanStor 9000 typical networking
 Command OceanStor 9000 product file sharing
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Advanced
Function Principle and Deployment
OST29
configuration
1d
 Command OceanStor 9000 wise link
configuration and application
 Command OceanStor 9000 wise tier
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Routine
Maintenance
OST2A
 Command OceanStor 9000 wise qouta
0.25d
 Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 maintenance
tool
OceanStor 9000 Storage System
Troubleshooting
OST2B
 Command OceanStor 9000 routine maintenance
method
0.25d
 Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 upgrade
Target Audience
process and notice
 Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting
method
Managers
 Command OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting case
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
 Know storage foundation
191
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
192
3.8.2
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training
 Know NAS system knowledge
Training Path
 Know cluster system foundation
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System
Introduction
OST2C
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d
be able to:
 Describe N8500V2R1Clustered NAS product
N8500V2 Clustered NAS Technology
OST2D
Lecture
type, position, main function, application scenario
 Describe N8500V2R1 clustered NAS NFS,CIFS,
0.25d
DST, replication technology principle
 Be familiar with N8500 product hardware
N8500V2Clustered NAS System Installation
and Configuration Planning
OST2E
Lecture
installation planning
 Be familiar with N8500 product deployment and
0.25d
configuration planning
 Be familiar with network and bond mode
 Command N8500V2R1 product hardware
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Installation
and Configuration
OST2F
installation
 Command N8500V2R1 typical networking
0.5d
 Command N8500V2R1 deployment tool
 Command N8500V2R1 product file sharing basic
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Advanced
Function Principle and Deployment
OST2G Lecture, Hands-on exercise
operation configuration
 Command N8500V2R1 Backup, DST
1d
 Command N8500V2R1 file system snapshot ,
mirror image, replication principle, configuration
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Routine
Maintenance
OST2H
and application
 Be familiar with N8500V2R1 maintenance tool
0.25d
method
 Command N8500V2R1 routine maintenance
method
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System
Troubleshooting
OST2I
 Be familiar with N8500V2R1 upgrade method
 Be familiar with N8500V2R1 product
0.5d
troubleshooting method
Target Audience
 Command N8500V2R1 typical fault case
Duration
Managers
3 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
193
3.8.3
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training
 Know virtual tape library knowledge
Training Path
 Know cluster knowledge
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System
Introduction
OST35
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d
25.2
50.2
5天
Installation and Configuration Planning
OST36
Lecture
be able to:
 Describe VTL6900 positioning , architecture ,
features, application scenarios
 Be
0.25d
familiar
with
VTL6900
Approaches
to
deploying and to planning VTL6900 deployment
and using configuration tools
OST37
 Be familiar approaches and procedure for
installing the VTL6900 hardware
1d
 Be familiar with Approaches to installing and
deploying the VTL6900
 Be familiar with Approaches to using ISM
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Routine
Maintenance
OST38
ServiceTool to finish Daily maintenance tasks
 Be familiar with Approaches to upgrading the
0.25d
VTL6900
 Be familiar with Approaches to locating and
Troubleshooting
OST39
handling the VTL6900 faults
 Command VTL6900 clustered mechanism
0.25d
 Command VTL6900 data deduplication principle
and application
 Command VTL6900 Tape Out principle and
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Advance
Function Principle and Application
OST3A
application
 Command VTL6900 replication principle and
1d
application
Target Audience
Duration
3 working days
Managers
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
194
3.8.4
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training
 Know database knowledge and operation
Training Path
Objectives
HDP3500E Backup System Introduction
OST3G
Lecture
0.25d
2
5
.
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
2 and
Configuration Planning
5
0 0.25d
Lecture
OST3H
.
2
5
天and
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
Configuration
OST3I
be able to:
 Describe HDP3500E the product requirement,
positioning ,software and hardware structure,
main functional characteristics
 Be familiar with HDP3500E product hardware
 Be familiar with HDP3500E product network,
deployment and configuration planning
 Command HDP3500E product hardware
1d
installation
 Command HDP3500E basic configuration
 Command HDP3500E Typical cases
HDP3500E Backup System Routine
Maintenance
OST3J
 Be familiar with HDP3500E maintenance tool
method
0.25d
 Command HDP3500E routine maintenance
method
HDP3500E Backup System Troubleshooting
 Be familiar with HDP3500E upgrade process and
notice
OST3K
0.25d
 Be familiar with HDP3500E product
troubleshooting method
 Know HDP3500E product fault case
HDP3500E Backup System Common
Application Backup and Recovery
OST3L Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Know BMR backup and recovery
 Command Database backup and recovery
1d
 Command Database backup and recovery
 Know Database backup and recovery
Target Audience
Duration
3 working days
Managers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
195
3.9 Cloud Storage Training Programs
3.9.1
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Solution
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Product Introduction
OST59
OST51
Lecture
0.25d
Target Audience
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Deployment
Planning
OST52
Lecture
Managers
0. 5d
Prerequisites
 Know Windows、Linux OS knowledge
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Installation
 Know TCP/IP
OST53
 Know storage virtualization knowledge
0.5d
Objectives
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Management
Characteristics Configuration
OST54
be able to:
 Describe CloudStor product type, position,
0.5d
hardware, software, application scenario
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE product hardware
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Service Characteristics
Configuration
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE product deployment
OST55
0. 5d
and configuration planning
 Command CSS/CSE product hardware
installation
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Routine
Maintenance
OST56
 Command CSS/CSE typical networking
 Command CSS/CSE system deployment
0. 25d
tool
 Command CSS/CSE basic operation
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Troubleshooting
OST57
configuration
 Command CSS/CSE management
0.5d
characteristics
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE operation and
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Advanced Technology
Application
OST58
management
 Know CSS/CSE service characteristics
0.75d
 Command CSS/CSE service characteristics
configuration method and steps
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance tool
 Command CSS/CSE routine maintenance
196
 Describe CloudStor main solution
method
 Be familiar with CloudStor solution
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance process
and notice
Duration
 Know fault class, principle of fault location
4 working days
 Command fault location method, failure criteria
Class Size
 Be familiar with troubleshooting process
 Know CSS/CSE system principle
Min 6, Max 12
 Know CSS/CSE advanced technology
197
3.10
Server Products Training Programs
3.10.1 RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
RH Series Rack Server Introduction
be able to:
Lecture
OSV11
0.4 d
 Describe the models, position, main functions
and application scenarios of RH series servers
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
RH Series Rack Server OS Installation
Lecture, demo
OSV12
and hardware installation of RH series servers
 Master BMC configuration of RH series servers
0.3 d
 Master RAID plan and configuration of RH series
servers
 Master OS installation method of RH series
RH Series Rack Server Routine Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
OSV13
servers
0.3 d
 Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts
replacement of RH series servers
Target Audience
 Master the methods of log collection of RH series
servers
Administrators
 Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of
Prerequisites
RH series servers
Duration
 Be familiar with Windows and Linux
 Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP
1 working day
 Know basic knowledge of server
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
198
3.10.2 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
and application scenarios of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Introduction
Lecture
OSV21
servers
 Master the hardware structure, components,
0.4 d
views, modules, blade types and hardware
installation of X6000 series servers
 Master BMC configuration of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server OS Installation
servers
Lecture, demo
OSV22
 Master RAID plan and configuration of X6000
0.3 d
series servers
 Master OS installation method of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Routine Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
OSV23
servers
0.3 d
replacement of X6000 series servers
Target Audience
 Master the methods of log collection of X6000
series servers
Administrators
X6000 series servers
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
199
3.10.3 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
and application scenarios of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Introduction
Lecture
OSV31
servers
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
0.4 d
and hardware installation of E6000 series
servers
 Master iMana function, management and
E6000 Blade Server OS Installation
maintenance of E6000 blade server
Lecture, demo
OSV32
 Master RAID plan and configuration of E6000
0.3 d
series servers
 Master OS installation method of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
OSV33
servers
0.3 d
replacement of E6000 series servers
Target Audience
 Master the methods of log collection of E6000
series servers
Administrators
E6000 series servers
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
200
3.10.4 E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Introduction
Lecture
OSV51
0.4 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade
Server OS Installation
Lecture, demo
OSV52
0.3 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting
OSV53
0.3 d
Target Audience
Administrators
Prerequisites
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
 Describe the models, position, main functions and application scenarios of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces and hardware installation of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
 Master BMC function, management and maintenance of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master RAID plan and configuration of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master OS installation method of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts replacement of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master the methods of log collection of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
201
3.11
Cloud Computing Training Programs
3.11.1 Desktop Cloud Solution(R2) Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
of storage
 Describe the security solution of Cloud
Desktop Cloud Solution(R2) Deployment and
Computing
Management
OCL12
 Describe the hardware structure of
3d
SingleCLOUD
Target Audience
 Describe the software structure of SingleCLOUD
Operators and maintainers
E6000
Administrators
S3900
Prerequisites
 Describe the structure of Galax8800
 Be familiar with PC operating system
 Describe the components and functions of
 Know basic knowledge of datacom
Galax8800
 Describe the installation of Galax8800
 Know basic knowledge of storage
 Describe the routine operations and
Objectives
maintenance of Galax8800
 Describe the structure of VDesktop6000
be able to:
VDesktop6000
 Describe the application scenario of Cloud
 Describe the installation of VDesktop6000
Computing
 Describe the key features of Cloud Computing
maintenance of VDesktop6000
 Describe the concept and technology of virtual
 Describe the image creation procedure
machine
 Describe the creation and assignment of VM
network
Duration
storage
3 working days
Class Size
 Describe the protocol of storage
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the backup and redundancy technology
202
3.11.2 Desktop Cloud Solution(R3) Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
 Describe the backup and redundancy technology
Desktop Cloud Solution(R2) Deployment and
of storage
Management
OCL15
3d
server
Target Audience
storage
Administrators
 Describe the structure of FusionSphere
FusionSphere
Prerequisites
 Describe the installation of FusionSphere
maintenance of FusionSphere
 Describe the structure of FusionAccess
Objectives
FusionAccess
 Describe the installation of FusionAccess
be able to:
maintenance of FusionAccess
 Describe the application scenario of Cloud
 Describe the image creation procedure
Computing
 Describe the creation and assignment of VM
 Describe the key features of Cloud Computing
Duration
machine
3 working days
network
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
storage
 Describe the protocol of storage
203
3.11.3 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
 Describe the feature of access control based on
roles
FusionCube Solution Deployment and
Management
OCL13
 Describe the feature of memory multiplexing
 Describe the feature of data backup and
3d
recovery
Target Audience
 Describe the feature of integrated resource
management
Administrators
 Describe the feature of VM snapshot
 Describe the feature of elastic application
 Describe the feature of application automatic
Prerequisites
deployment
 Describe the feature of automatic thin
provisioning
 Command FusionManager installation and
configuration
Objectives
 Command FusionStorage installation and
configuration
 Command FusionCube upgrade patch
be able to:
introduction
 Describe FusionCube solution
 Command FusionCube routine maintenance
 Command FusionCube troubleshooting
FusionCube
Duration
FusionStorage
5 working days
 Describe the security solution of FusionCube
Class Size
 Describe the hardware structure of FusionCube
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the feature of dynamic resource adjust
 Describe the feature of distributed switches
204
3.11.4 FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
feature
 Describe FusionSphere virtualized storage
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and
Management
OCL14
feature
 Describe FusionSphere virtualized network
3d
feature
Target Audience
 Describe elastic load balance feature
 Describe elastic computing feature
Administrators
 Describe VPC feature
 Describe data backup and recovery feature
 Describe FusionCompute structure and
Prerequisites
functions
 Describe FusionCompute routine operations
and maintenance
 Describe FusionCompute upgrade procedure
Duration
Objectives
3 working days, including 1.5 days of hands-on
practice
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe FusionSphere solution
Min 6, max 12
 Describe FusionSphere installation procedure
 Describe FusionSphere virtualized computing
205
3.12
Data Center Training Programs
3.12.1 Micro DC Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
Micro DC Deployment and Management
be able to:
ODC11
 Describe the software and hardware of the Micro
1d
DC
Target Audience
 Master the installation and configuration of the
Micro DC
Administrators
 Master the basic operations and functions of the
Micro DC
Prerequisites
Duration
 Know basic computer knowledge
1 working days
 Know basic IP technology and knowledge
Class Size
 Know server knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
206
3.12.2 ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the overall architecture of the
ManageOne Solution Deployment and
Management
ODC12
ManageOne solution
 Describe the installation and deployment of the
2d
ManageOne solution
Target Audience
 Describe the basic features of the ManageOne
solution
 Describe the operation and maintenance of
Administrators
ManageOne solution
 Describe the business features and functions of
Prerequisites
ManageOne solution
 Know about DC solution
Duration
 Familiar with DC operation and maintenance
2 working days
knowledge
Class Size
 Familiar with DC business knowledge
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
207
3.13
IT Design Training Programs
3.13.1 Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design
be able to:
OST61
Lecture
 Be familiar with SAN system
1d
 Be familiar with SAN system plan process
Target Audience
 Be familiar with SAN system plan methods
Manager
Duration
1 working day
Prerequisites
 Know PC OS
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
208
3.13.2 Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS)
Design
OST62
Lecture
be able to:
 Be familiar with NAS system
1d
 Be familiar with NAS system plan process
Target Audience
 Be familiar with NAS system plan methods
Manager
Duration
1 working day
Prerequisites
 Know PC OS
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
209
3.13.3 Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design
be able to:
OST63
Lecture
 Be familiar with backup network and system
1d
 Be familiar with backup solution plan process
Target Audience
 Be familiar with backup solution plan methods
Manager
Duration
1 working day
Prerequisites
 Know PC OS
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
210
3.13.4 Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training
Training Path
Principle
 Describe DC Security Design Solution
Enterprise Data Center Security Design
ODC22
Lecture
 Describe DC Security Threats and Protection
Solution
1d
 Describe DC Infrastructure Security
Target Audience
 Describe DC Network Layer Security
 Describe DC Host and Application Security
Manager
 Describe DC User Security Policy and Security
Management
Prerequisites
 Describe DC Intrusion Detection Mechanism and
 Familiar with DC Network basic knowledge
 Familiar with Security Fundamental
 Familiar with Security network deployment
Access Control Policy
Duration
experience
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe DC Security Architecture Design
211
3.13.5 Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training
Training Path
analysis
 Description of DC disaster recovery solution design
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery
and Backup Design
ODC23
Lecture
principles, processes and methods
 Master DC disaster recovery design method, case
2d
and key technology
Target Audience
 Master of disaster recovery production center
design
 Master of disaster recovery backup center design
Manager
 Master of disaster recovery system link design
Prerequisites
 Master of disaster recovery system service
 Familiar with the IT system architecture and the
connection
basic knowledge
 Master of principles, processes and methods of
 Familiar with storage and SAN system technology
 Familiar with backup and disaster recovery basic
knowledge and experience
Huawei DR solution
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be
able to:
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Description of DC disaster recovery subsystem
basic concepts and related devices
 Description of DC disaster recovery requirement
212
4 Enterprise UC&C Training Courses
4.1 Enterprise UC&C Training Path
4.1.1
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Associate
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Protocol &
Principal on Huawei Voice
Solution
3d
HCNP-UC-HIPT
Implementing Huawei IP
Telephony Solutions
5d
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:

Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses

Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
213
4.1.2
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice
System Basic Configuration and
Operation
5d
Solution
3d
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
5d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei
Unified Communication Administration
5d
Elective Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U19XX/SoftCo voice system.

Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System
Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.
214
4.1.3
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Solution
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System
Basic Configuration and Operation
5d
3d
5d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
5d
Elective Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC1.1 system.

215
4.1.4
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic
Configuration and Operation
7d
Improve
Solution
Huawei eSpace U29XX All in One
Solution
4d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
5d
Elective Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC2.0 system.

216
3d
5d
4.1.5
Contact Center Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Associate
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement
Huawei Contact Center
Universal Access Platform
3d
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:

HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement
Huawei Contact Center CTI
Solution
5d
Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
217
4.1.6
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Contact Center Management
and Monitoring
3d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX
Gateway) Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction,
5d
Improve
3d
Solution
5d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX
Gateway) Multimedia Contact
Center Service Introduction,
(Including Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation)
7d
Contact Center Agent Operation
1d
d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei
Contact Center Administration
5d
Elective-Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.

Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center//Multimedia Contact Center.

Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and
Monitoring/Service introduction, configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.
218
4.1.7
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact
Center Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Contact Center Management and
Monitoring
3d
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction,
5d
Improve
3d
Solution
5d
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Multimedia Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation
(Including Voice Contact Center Service
7d
1d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei
Contact Center Administration
5d
Elective-Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.

Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/ Multimedia Contact Center.

Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and
Monitoring/Service introduction, configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.
219
4.1.8
Video Conference Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Associate
HCNP-VC-IHVCP
Introducing Huawei Video
Conference H.323 and
SIP Protocol
3d
HCNP-VC-IHVP
Implementing Huawei
Advanced ViewPoint
System
5d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration
Elective Guide

Follow the paths to learn.
220
5d
4.2 List of Enterprise UC&C Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Certification Training Programs
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Protocol & Principal on Huawei Voice Solution
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
8
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic Configuration and Operation
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace U2980 All in One Solution
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
Contact Center Management and Monitoring
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center
Administration
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal
Access Platform
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video
Conference
Huawei HCS-Field-IVS certification training
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration
and Operation
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs
CC general Training Programs
CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact
Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
221
(Including Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and
Operation)
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
5
6 ~ 12
5
6 ~ 12
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and
Ⅱ
Maintenance
Ⅲ
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced
Features Operation and Maintenance
Ⅲ
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Huawei eSpace IVS system operation and maintenance training programs
Huawei eSpace IVS service management and routine
maintenance documentation
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced
maintenance training
Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course
222
Ⅳ: Expert Course
4.3 Certification Training Programs
4.3.1
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC solution
Training Path
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC Architecture
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified
Communication Administration
OUCE1
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC devices portfolio
and single products
5d
 Operate Huawei eSpace UC basic application
Target Audience
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC installation and
commissioning
Those who hope to become a UC engineer
 Perform eSpace U19XX series gateway
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-UC
operation
Prerequisites
 Describe call flows in eSpace U19XX system
 Perform the primary configuration in EMS
 A general familiarity with network knowledge
system
 A general familiarity with communication theory
 Perform the primary configuration in EGW
Objectives
 Perform the primary configuration in IAD
 Perform the primary configuration in IP phone
be able to:
Duration
 Describe UC concept and development history
 Describe VoIP concept
5 working days
Class Size
 Distinguish VoIP and PSTN
Min 6, max 12
 Describe VoIP key technology and protocol
 Describe UC basic application
223
4.3.2
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Training Path
 Describe the boards and modules in eSpace
U29XX system
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP
Telephony Solutions
OUCE3
 Describe the boards and modules functions in
eSpace U29XX system
5d
 Perform the system data configuration in
Target Audience
eSpace U29XX system
 Perform the user data configuration in eSpace
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified
U29XX system
Communication engineer
 Perform the office data configuration in eSpace
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
U29XX system
Prerequisites
 Perform the application data configuration in
eSpace U29XX system
 Design the call route in eSpace U29XX system
 Describe user registration flow in eSpace
 HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge
U29XX system
 Describe call flow in eSpace U29XX system
Objectives
 Describe call restriction in eSpace U29XX
system
be able to:
 Perform routine maintenance in eSpace
 Describe VoIP protocol used in eSpace U29XX
U29XX system
system
 Perform troubleshooting in eSpace U29XX
 Describe eSpace U29XX system features
system
 Describe eSpace U29XX system function
 Perform the fault location in eSpace U29XX
 Describe eSpace U29XX system parameters
 Distinguish the products in eSpace U29XX
system
Duration
system
5 working days
 Describe the typical networks in eSpace
U29XX system
Class Size
 Describe the network design in eSpace U29XX
Min 6, max 12
system
224
4.3.3
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Protocol & Principal on Huawei Voice Solution
 Describe development history of phone
Training Path
 Describe PSTN concept and network
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Protocol & Principal on
Huawei Voice Solution
OUCE4
 Describe the devices used in PSTN and
network
3d
 Describe VoIP concept
Target Audience
 Distinguish VoIP and PSTN
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified
 Describe VoIP key technology and protocol
Communication engineer
 Describe the codec used in VoIP network
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
 Understand SIP protocol
 Understand H.248 protocol
Prerequisites
 Understand H.323 protocol
 Describe the application of protocols on
 HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge
Huawei voice solution
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
225
4.3.4
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration
Training Path
policy
 Describe Huawei CTI principle
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact
Center Administration
OCCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Implement agent service commissioning
 Describe Huawei IVR principle
5d
 Implement automatic service commissioning
Target Audience
 Describe Huawei Multimedia Contact Center
function and principle
Those who hope to become a Contact Center
engineer
 Describe Huawei Outbound system principle
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-CC
 Describe Huawei Outbound platform policy
 Describe Huawei Contact Center report system
Prerequisites
architecture
 Describe flow of original data to database
Objectives
 Operate Huawei Contact Center report
 Describe Huawei Conference Recording
principle
be able to:
 Describe Huawei Soft Phone Recording
 Describe enterprise communication concepts
principle
 Describe contact center concepts and
rd
 Describe Huawei 3 Party Recording
development history
integration principle
 Describe Multimedia Contact Center services
 Describe Huawei screen recording system
 Describe Huawei eSpace Contact Center
principle
Solution
 Use Huawei Screen Recording System
 Use Huawei WEB QC console
architecture
 Use Huawei WEB monitoring console
 Describe Contact Center development trend
devices portfolio and single products
and cloud Contact Center
 Operation Huawei eSpace Contact Center
monitoring and QC
Duration
 Analyze Contact Center network architecture
 Implement UAP series gateway operation and
configuration
5 working days
Class Size
 Analyze Contact Center fundamental routing
Min 6, max 12
226
4.3.5
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access
Platform
 Analyze U29XX boards Configuration cases
Training Path
 Describe UAP Software System
HCNP-CC-HUAP
Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal
Access Platform
3d
 Use UAP operation and maintenance tool
 Describe UAP access function
 Describe UAP resource function
 Describe UAP agent function
Target Audience
 Analyze UAP networking
 Implement UAP capacity design
advanced engineer
 Conclude PBX Fundamental knowledge
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC
 Analyze differences between U29XX and
Prerequisites
UAP3300
 Describe UAP installation flow
 Describe UAP device data plan content
 HCNA Contact Center knowledge
 Implement U29XX device data configuration
Objectives
 Implement U29XX office data configuration
 Implement U29XX service data Configuration
be able to:
 Use UAP playing voice
 Describe Enterprise PBX Communication
 Describe routine maintenance content of UAP
Principle
 Implement routine maintenance operation
 Describe the collaboration of UAP and
 Use UAP maintenance and monitoring tool
application layer
 Use capturing tool to do troubleshooting
 Describe UAP interfaces
 Describe signaling and protocols supported by
 Use ICDDebug to do troubleshooting
Duration
UAP
3 working days
 Describe UAP stacking and cascading
 Describe UAP technology indicators
Class Size
 Describe UAP3300 frame and boards
Min 6, max 12
 Analyze UAP3300 MCU multiple-network-port
 Describe U29XX frame and boards
227
4.3.6
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution
 Analyze CTI fundamental routing policy
Training Path
 Analyze CTI layered services policy
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact
Center CTI Solution
 Analyze CTI network routing policy
 Analyze CTI outbound policy
5d
 Implement CTI agent service commissioning
 Implement CTI automatic agent service
Target Audience
Commissioning
 Implement CTI multimedia contact Center
service commissioning
advanced engineer
 Describe CTI mail, SMS, Fax call flow
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC
 Describe CTI network call flow
Prerequisites
 Implement NIRC configuration
 Describe CTI outbound flow
 HCNA Contact Center knowledge
 Implement outbound system configuration
Objectives
 Describe CTI QC flow
 Implement platform control policy configuration
be able to:
 Describe CTI platform service monitoring
 Describe the meaning of CTI technology
function
 Implement CTI platform Service monitoring
 Analyze the position of CTI in different contact
configuration
center solutions
 Describe CTI function
 Describe eSpace CC report solution
 Describe technology indicators Huawei CTI
 Implement data station installation
 Describe CTI 4 layers logical structure
configuration
 Implement BIR installation configuration
 Describe CTI 4 layers and functions of each
 Describe report secondary development
layer
 Use CT Communication matrix
Principle
 Describe Huawei cloud terminal solution
 Describe CTI network elements Monitoring and
 Describe Huawei cloud platform solution
the method
 Describe CTI common networking
 Describe Huawei VTM solution
 Implement eSpace CC one click installation
 Describe Huawei social media access solution
 Implement eSpace CC One or Two-Node
 Process test
 Use IVR flow file
Cluster Configuration
 Describe CTI platform safety maintenance
Duration
content
5 working days
 Describe CTI platform safety reinforcing
solution
Class Size
 Describe CTI anti-virus solution
Min 6, max 12
 Implement CTI system monitoring
228
4.3.7
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference
 Master SD terminal hardware installation
Training Path
 Master SD terminal software basic function
HCNA-VC-IHVCA Introducing Huawei Video
Conference Administration
OVCC1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Master HD series terminal hardware interface
 Master HD series terminal hardware installation
5d
 Master HD series terminal software basic
Target Audience
operations
Those who hope to become a video conference
 Know MCU structure, function and feature
associate
 Master MCU installation
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC certificate
 Master MCU basic data configuration
 Know vSwitch System basic function
Prerequisites
 Master vSwitch System installation and
configuration
 Master vSwitch System basic concept
 Understand RM function
Objectives
 Understand RM structure
 Understand RM important concepts
be able to:
 Master TP conference room deployment
 Know video conference concept
requirements
 Know video conference development history and
 Master TP system hardware structure
 Master TP system conference control function
tend
 Master video conference system structure
Duration
 Master video conference pivotal information
5 working days
compression technology
 Know video conference related framework
Class Size
protocol
Min 6, Max 12
 Master SD terminal hardware interface
229
230
4.3.8
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference
 Master RTP/RTCP applications
Training Path
 Understand the basic audio technology
HCNP-VC-IHVCP Huawei Video Conference
Protocol
 Master the common voice coding algorithms and
comparison
3d

Understand audio related technologies
 Understand video image processing technology
HCNP-VC IHVP Implementing Huawei
Advanced ViewPoint System
 Master the basic concepts and comparison
 Master the common stream video codec, RTP
5d
packet format, SDP description
 Understand the basics of optics
 Understand the basics of acoustics
Target Audience
 Description videoconferencing renovation
Those who hope to become a video conference
requirements
professional
 Anti-loss characteristics described SEC2.0ARQ
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-VC
 Cascade master multi-channel and multi-group
Prerequisites
multi-screen
 Understanding Video IVR features
 Master MCU backup mode
 Master the video firewall mode of MCU
 Master logging the MCU through commands
Objectives
 Master the common commands of MCU
 Describe multicast features
be able to:
 Understand the basis of the firewall
 Understand Wireshark interface
 Understand the problem firewall under the video
 Know about Wireshark basic operations
business
 Describe H.323 protocol structure
 Master video firewall traversal solution
 Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
 Describe the common case of the firewall
 Master video conference schedule signaling flow
 Master the basic ideas ofvideo system fault
 Master routine signaling fault localization analysis
location
methods
 Master video systems commonly used tool for
fault location
 Master video systems commonly used
 Master video conference schedule signaling flow
commands
 Master routine signaling fault localization analysis
 Know terminal network monitoring tool
methods
 Know Nlog network statistics
 Describe SIP protocol definition
 Know record concept
 Describe SIP message concept and structure
 Master record principle
 Master SIP protocol call flow
 Describe record feature
 Master SIP protocol typical application scenarios
 List record application scenarios
 Understand the basic principles of RTP/ RTCP
 Master record operation methods
 Master RTP/RTCP packet format
231
Duration
Class Size
8 working days
Min 6, Max 12
232
4.3.9
HCS-Field-IVS training
 Describe introduction and networking
Training Path
 Perform hardware installation and sever
parameters configuration
Basic knowledge of video surveillance system
VS01
Lecture
 Perform system reinstallation
0.5day
 Describe BMC management
 Perform configuration of eSpace IVS system
 Perform business realization of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and
system
advanced maintenance training
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5day
VS03
 Describe advanced features of eSpace IVS
system
advanced features
Target Audience
Administrators
system advanced features
 Perform hardware installation of eSpace IPC
Prerequisites
 Perform docking platform of eSpace IPC
 Perform an upgrade of eSpace IPC
 Perform hardware installation of eSpace codec
 Perform docking platform of eSpace codec
 Perform an upgrade of eSpace codec
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the media flow of eSpace IVS system
3 working days
Class Size
 Describe the control flow of eSpace IVS system
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the network solution of eSpace IVS
system
233
4.4 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs
4.4.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and
Operation
Training Path
Prerequisites
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction
OUC11
Lecture
0.5d
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
 A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo voice
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration
system
OUC13
1d
Objectives
EGW Introduction
OUC51
be able to:
Lecture
 Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
0.5d
 Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
 Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
EGW Configuration and Maintenance
OUC52
system
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
0.5d
 Describe the EGW system function
 Describe the classification of EGW system
 Describe EGW system hardware architecture
IAD Introduction and Installation
OUC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Perform EGW system installation and
0.5d
configuration
 Describe the IAD function
 Describe the classification of IAD
IAD Configuration and Maintenance
OUC62
 Describe IAD hardware architecture
0.5d
 Perform IAD installation and configuration
 Describe IP phone classification and function
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and
Configuration
OUC71
 Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
Configuration
0.5d
 Describe the eSpace EMS system function
 Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
eSpace EMS System Introduction
and Installation
OUC91
system
 Perform eSpace EMS system installation
0.5d
 Perform eSpace EMS system configuration and
maintenance
eSpace EMS System Configuration
and Maintenance
OUC9
2
Target Audience
Lecture, Hands-on
exercise
Duration
0.5d
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
234
235
4.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System
Training Programs
4.5.1
Training Path
Target Audience
UC1.1 System Introduction
OUC81
Lecture
Prerequisites
0.5d
OUC11
Lecture
0.5d
 A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo system
configuration
 A general familiarity with UC1.1 system
Objectives
OUC13
1d
be able to:
 Describe the UC1.1 system composition
UC1.1 System Configuration and Maintenance
 Describe the UC1.1 system function
OUC83
0.5d
 Describe the classification of UC1.1 system
 Perform UC1.1 system configuration
 Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
eSpace UMS System Installation, Operation
and Maintenance
OUCA1
0.5d
system
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
eSpace UMS System Operation and
Maintenance
OUCA2
 Describe the eSpace UMS system function
 Perform eSpace UMS system installation and
0.5d
configuration
 Describe EGW system hardware architecture
OUC52
 Perform EGW system installation and
0.5d
configuration
OUC62
 Describe IAD hardware architecture
0.5d
 Perform IAD configuration
 Describe IP phone classification and function
Configuration
OUC71
 Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
Configuration
0.5d
236
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
237
4.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs
4.6.1
Training Path
Prerequisites
UC2.0 system Introduction
OUCB1
Lecture
0.5d
U29XX System Introduction
OUC21
Lecture
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
U29XX System Configuration
OUC23
1d
 Describe the classification of UC2.0 system
OUC11
Lecture
 Perform the UC2.0 system configuration
0.5d
 Describe the U29XX system function
 Describe the classification of U29XX system
OUC13
 Perform the U29XX system configuration
1d
U2.0 System Configuration
OUCB3
system
 Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system
1d
configuration
 Describe the eSpace EMS system function
eSpace EMS System Configuration and
Maintenance
OUC92 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
eSpace UMS System Operation and
Maintenance
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
system
 Perform the eSpace EMS system configuration
 Describe the eSpace system function
0.5d
 Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
system
OUC52
 Perform the eSpace UMS system configuration
0.5d
 Perform the eSpace EGW system configuration
OUC62
Configuration
OUC71
0.5d
 Perform IAD configuration
 Describe the IP phone function
0.5d
 Describe the classification of IP phone
 Perform IP phone installation and configuration
Target Audience
Duration
7 working days
238
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
239
4.6.2
ESpace U2980 All in One Solution
Training Path
Objectives
eSpace U2980 All in One System Introduction
and Network Design
OUC31
Lecture
be able to:
1d
 Perform the UC2.0 system configuration
eSpace U2980 All in One System
Configuration and Maintenance
OUC32
 Describe the call and data flows of UC2.0 system
 Describe the U29XX system function
3d
 Describe the classification of U29XX system
 Perform the U29XX system configuration
Target Audience
 Describe the call flows of U29XX system
 Perform UC All in One system installation
Prerequisites
 Perform UC All in One system configuration
 Perform UC All in One system maintenance
Duration
4 working days
 A general familiarity with UC2.0 system
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
240
4.7 CC General Training Programs
4.7.1
Contact Center Management and Monitoring
 Describe IVR function
Training Path
 Describe IPCC multimedia features
 Describe IPCC outbound function
IPCC System Overview
Lecture
OCC01
 Describe IPCC report function
0.5d
 Describe IPCC QC function
 Describe IPCC monitoring function
Enterprise Contact Center Agent
Operation
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe IPCC agent function
 Describe Huawei Contact Center agent concepts
1d
 Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
 Describe CCCBar agent function and application
 Describe agent server agent function and
Enterprise Contact Center Report
OCC71
application
 Use CCCBar
0.5d
 Use customized agent interface
 Describe Huawei report solution
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform
OCC81
 Describe the flow of original bill data to database
 Describe report system structure
0.5d
 Describe report typical configuration
 Use BIR report
 Implement Datastation installation configuration
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring
Platform Operation
OCC91
0.5d
 Describe report secondary development principle
 Describe Huawei contact center voice recording
system principle
Target Audience
 Describe conference recording principle
 Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe VOIP voice recording principle
Service Managers
 Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
rd
Managers
platform integration principle
Prerequisites
structure
 Operate Huawei web QC system
 Computer basics
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
 Describe IPCC concepts
 Describe IPCC system architecture
241
4.7.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe Huawei Contact Center agent concepts
 Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
Enterprise Contact Center Agent Operation
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe CCCBar agent function and application
 Describe JCccBar agent function and application
1d
 Describe agent server agent function and
application
Target Audience
 Use CCCBar
Agents
 Use customized agent interface
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
 Computer basics
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
242
4.8 CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and
4.8.1
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Training Path
Target Audience
OCC01
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
 Computer basics
U29XX Series Gateway Overview
Objectives
OCC21
Lecture
0.5d
be able to:
U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration
OCC23
1d
CTI Software System
OCC31
Lecture
0.5d
CTI Platform Service Commissioning
OCC33
 Describe U29XX series gateway system
1d
structure and function
 Describe U29XX series gateway hardware
structure
OCC71
 Describe U29XX series gateway software
structure
0.5d
 Describe U29XX series gateway interfaces and
protocols
OCC81
 Describe U29XX series gateway function and
specification
0.5d
 Analyze U29XX series gateway networking
 Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
Platform Operation
OCC91
trunk circuit
 Implement U29XX series gateway basic
0.5d
operation
243
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data
system principle
configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway office data
configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway service data
rd
configuration
 Describe CTI platform concepts
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical
structure
architecture
 Describe CTI platform components’ function
 Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine
platform features
switchover
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow
platform architecture
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle
 Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling
 Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
components
 Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
enabling
 Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Use management system client to monitor
service
Duration
 Use BIR report
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
244
4.8.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path
Platform Operation
OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience
U29XX Series Gateway Overview
OCC21
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
 Computer basics
U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration
Objectives
OCC23
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System
OCC31
Lecture
0.5d
OCC33
1d
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia
Technology
OCC51
 Describe U29XX series gateway system
2d
structure and function
 Describe U29XX series gateway hardware
structure
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration
and Operation
OCC71
 Describe U29XX series gateway software
structure
0.5d
 Describe U29XX series gateway interfaces and
protocols
OCC81
 Describe U29XX series gateway function and
specification
0.5d
 Analyze U29XX series gateway networking
245
trunk circuit
 Implement U29XX series gateway basic
 Use BIR report
operation
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data
configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway office data
configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway service data
system principle
configuration
architecture
rd
switchover
structure
platform features
enabling
 Describe Huawei ICS application scenario
 Describe Huawei Email call scenario
 Describe Huawei Fax call scenario
components
 Describe Huawei SMS call scenario
 Implement text chat service configuration
 Implement click to dial service configuration
 Implement call back request service
configuration
service
Duration
 Implement escorted browsing service
7 working days
configuration
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
246
4.9 CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training
4.9.1
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path
Platform Operation
OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience
UAP Series Gateway Overview
OCC11
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
 Computer basics
UAP Series Gateway System Configuration
Objectives
OCC13
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System
OCC31
Lecture
0.5d
OCC33
1d
OCC71
 Describe UAP series gateway system structure
0.5d
and function
 Describe UAP series gateway hardware structure
 Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
OCC81
interfaces
 Analyze UAP series gateway networking
0.5d
trunk circuit
 Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
 Implement UAP series gateway agent data
configuration
247
 Implement terminal data configuration
system principle
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data
configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway service data
configuration
rd
architecture
structure
switchover
platform features
enabling
components
 Use BIR report
service
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
248
4.9.2
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring Platform
Operation
OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience
UAP Series Gateway Overview
OCC11
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
 Computer basics
UAP Series Gateway System Configuration
Objectives
OCC13
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System
OCC31
Lecture
0.5d
OCC33
1d
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia
Technology
OCC51
 Describe UAP series gateway system structure
2d
and function
 Describe UAP series gateway hardware structure
 Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration
and Operation
OCC71
interfaces
 Analyze UAP series gateway networking
0.5d
trunk circuit
OCC81
 Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
 Implement UAP series gateway agent data
0.5d
configuration
 Implement terminal data configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data
249
configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway service data
platform features
configuration
architecture
components
switchover
service
Duration
enabling
 Describe Huawei ICS application scenario
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
 Describe Huawei Email call scenario
 Describe Huawei Fax call scenario
 Describe Huawei SMS call scenario
 Implement text chat service configuration
 Implement click to dial service configuration
 Implement call back request service
configuration
 Implement escorted browsing service
configuration
 Use BIR report
system principle
rd
structure
250
4.10
VC Operation and Maintenance
4.10.1 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and Maintenance
Training Path
and tend
 Describe Huawei Video Conference System
Video Conference System Overview
OVC01
Lecture
Overview
 Describe Huawei video conference technology
0.5d
innovation
 Describe Huawei video conference solution
H.323 Protocol
OVC03
Lecture
0.75d
 Master video conference schedule signaling
flow
 Master routine signaling fault localization
HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance
OVC11/12/13
Lecture, Hands-on
analysis methods
 Learn about product positioning, product
1.5d
specifications
 Master the product features
 Know the installation and initial configuration
MCU Operation and Maintenance
 Know the operation of remote controller
OVC21/22
Lecture, Hands-on
1d
 Know the operation of web
 Know the maintenance and diagnostics
 Know how to upgrade the software
SMC Operation and Maintenance
OVC31/32
Lecture, Hands-on
 Know MCU structure composing
 Know MCU basic feature
1.25d
 Know MCU boards and daughter boards
 Master MCU Web basic configuration
Target Audience
 Master MCU outside GK scenario conference
configuration
 Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference
Administrators
configuration
Prerequisites
 Know MCU Web advanced settings
 Master MCU software upgrade
 Master MCU fault disposal flow
 Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
Objectives
 Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
 Know SMCbasic concept
be able to:
 Describe SMC system structure
 Know video conference communication basic
 Master SMCprinciple
knowledge
 Master SMCmain function
 Know video conference development process
 Master SMCsystem software installation
251
 Master SMCsystem initiation configuration
Duration
 Master SMC conference schedule
 Master SMC conference control
5 working days
Class Size
 Master SMC routine Maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
 Master SMC routine fault disposal
252
4.10.2 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance
Training Path
 Cascade master multi-channel and multi-group
multi-screen
SIP Protocol
OVC04
 Understanding Video IVR features
 Master MCU backup mode
1d
 Master the video firewall mode of MCU
 Master logging the MCU through commands
 Master the common commands of MCU
Video Conference System-Advanced
 Describe multicast features
OVC0A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
4d
 Understand the basis of the firewall
 Understand the problem firewall under the video
business
Target Audience
 Master video firewall traversal solution
Monitoring Staffs
 Describe the common case of the firewall
 Master the basic ideas ofvideo system fault
Administrators
location
 Master video systems commonly used tool for
Prerequisites
fault location
 Master video systems commonly used
commands
 Know terminal network monitoring tool
 Know Nlog network statistics
Objectives
 Know record concept
 Master record principle
be able to:
 Describe record feature
 Describe SIP protocol definition
 List record application scenarios
 Describe SIP message concept and structure
 Master SIP protocol call flow
 Master record operation methods
Duration
 Master SIP protocol typical application scenarios
5 working days
 Understand the basics of optics
 Understand the basics of acoustics
Class Size
 Description videoconferencing renovation
Min 6, Max 12
requirements
 Anti-loss characteristics described SEC2.0ARQ
253
4.10.3 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Training Path
TP/RP Product Introduction
OVC41
Lecture
0.25d
TP/RP Routine Operation and Maintenance
OVC42
Lecture, Hands-on
1.75d
Target Audience
Administrators
Prerequisites
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
 Know Huawei telepresence basic feature
 Know Huawei telepresence development and tend
 Know Huawei telepresence series product
 Know Huawei telepresence product principle
 Know Huawei telepresence product structure
 Describe Huawei telepresence application scenarios
 Master Huawei telepresence conference operation
 Master Huawei telepresence conference control operation
 Master Huawei telepresence conference troubleshooting
 Know Huawei telepresence series product software upgrade
 Know telepresence product fault classification
 Master telepresence product troubleshooting methods
 Describe telepresence product troubleshooting cases
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
254
4.11
Huawei eSpace IVS system operation and maintenance training
programs
4.11.1 Huawei eSpace IVS service management and routine maintenance
documentation
 Describe the components of eSpace IVS client
Training Path
 Describe the system architecture of eSpace IVS
VS01
Lecture
 Outline the function of eSpace IVS CS client
 Perform login operation of eSpace IVS CS client
0.5day
 Perform live operation of eSpace IVS CS client
 Perform map operation of eSpace IVS CS client
 Perform record operation of eSpace IVS CS
Huawei eSpace IVS service management and
routine maintenance documentation
VS02
client
2.5day
 Outline the function of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform login operation of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform live operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Target Audience
 Perform map operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Administrators
 Perform record operation of eSpace IVS BS
client
Prerequisites
 Perform alarm operation of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform other operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 eSpace IVS system protocol
 eSpace IVS system network solution
 Describe the function of eSpace IVS client
255
4.11.2 Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training
 Describe the control flow of eSpace IVS system
Training Path
 Describe the network solution of eSpace IVS
system
VS01
Lecture
0.5day
system
 Describe advanced features of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and
advanced maintenance training
VS03
system
2.5day
advanced features
Target Audience
system advanced features
 Perform hardware installation of eSpace IPC
 Perform docking platform of eSpace IPC
 Perform an upgrade of eSpace IPC
Prerequisites
 Perform hardware installation of eSpace codec
 Perform docking platform of eSpace codec
 Perform an upgrade of eSpace codec
 A basic understanding of Huawei eSpace IVS
system primary daily operation and maintenance
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the media flow of eSpace IVS system
256
5 Network Energy Training Courses
5.1 Network Energy Training Path
5.1.1
Power Supply Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Minishelter Operation and
1d
Power3000 Operation and
4d
PowerCube 500 Operation and
1d
PowerCube1000 Operation
4d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include Minishelter, Power3000, PowerCube500, PowerCube1000 products
trainings.

257
5.1.2
Data Center Facility Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
IDS1000 Container Data
Center Operation and
2d
IDS2000 Modular Data Center
Training
2d
Precision Air Conditioner
Training
3d
NetEco Management System
Training
2d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include IDS1000, IDS2000, air condition and NetEco products trainings.

258
5.1.3
UPS Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
UPS Operation and
5d
UPS Operation and Maintenance
2d
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include UPS2000, UPS5000, UPS8000 products trainings.

259
5.2 List of Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Power Supply Product Training Programs
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6~12
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
6~12
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6~12
Ⅱ
4
6~12
Ⅱ
2
6~12
Ⅱ
2
6~12
Ⅱ
3
6~12
Ⅱ
2
6~12
Data Center Facility Product Training Programs
IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance
Training
UPS Product Training Programs
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6~12
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Ⅱ
2
6~12
260
Ⅳ: Expert Course
5.3 Power Supply Training Programs
5.3.1
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Master the principle, functional of Minishelter
 Master functions and parameters of the various
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance
components about Minishelter
OPS11
Lecture
 Master the installation of Minishelter
1d
 Master the routine operation of Minishelter
Target Audience
 Master the routine maintenance of Minishelter
 Describe common faults of Minishelter
Prerequisites
 Dispose common faults of Minishelter
Duration
 Have a basic knowledge of Minishelter
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Understand the basic structure of the Minishelter
261
5.3.2
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Understand the load capacity of Power3000
power supply system
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance
 Master the installation of Power3000 power
OPS12
supply system, could complete some replace
4d
operation
Target Audience
 Master the routine operation of Power3000
power supply system
 Master the routine maintenance of Power3000
Prerequisites
power supply system
 Have a basic knowledge of power supply
 Describe common faults of Power3000 power
Objectives
supply system
 Dispose common faults of Power3000 power
be able to:
supply system
 Describe the function of Power3000 power
Duration
supply system
4 working days
 Describe the hardware structure of Power3000
Class Size
power supply system
 Understand functions and parameters of the
Min 6, Max 12
various components about Power3000 power
supply system
262
5.3.3
Training Path
 Understand the load capacity of PowerCube500
system
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance
 Master the installation of PowerCube500 system,
OPS13
could complete some replace operation
1d
 Master the routine operation of PowerCube500
Target Audience
system
 Master the routine maintenance of
Prerequisites
PowerCube500 system
 Describe common faults of PowerCube500
system
Objectives
 Dispose common faults of PowerCube500
system
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the function of PowerCube500 system
1 working day
Class Size
PowerCube500 system
Min 6, Max 12
various components about PowerCube500
system
263
5.3.4
PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training
Training Path
 Understand the load capacity of PowerCube1000
system
PowerCube1000 Operation and Maintenance
 Master the installation of PowerCube1000
OPS14
system, could complete some replace operation
4d
 Master the routine operation of PowerCube1000
Target Audience
system
 Master the routine maintenance of
Prerequisites
PowerCube1000 system
 Describe common faults of PowerCube1000
system
Objectives
 Dispose common faults of PowerCube1000
system
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the function of PowerCube1000 system
4 working days
Class Size
PowerCube1000 system
Min 6, Max 12
various components about PowerCube1000
system
264
5.4 Data Center Facility Training Programs
5.4.1
IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the installation tools of the container
DC
IDS1000 Container Data Center
OIDS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe the installation precautions of the
container DC
2d
 Describe fastness and combination
Target Audience
 Describe the interconnect pipes of the container
DC
Prerequisites
 Describe the interconnect cables of the container
DC
 None
 Describe the System commission with power
Objectives
supply
 Describe the Inspections and checks of the
be able to:
container DC
 Describe the basic architecture of the container
 Describe the cooling system troubleshooting
DC solution
methods
 Describe the basic concepts and features of the
 Describe the power supply system
container DC
troubleshooting methods
 Describe the typical configurations of the
 Describe the fire protection system
container DC
 Describe the values for consumer of the
 Describe the room management system alarm
container DC
processing methods
 Describe the technical advantages of the
Duration
container DC
2 working days
 Describe the application scenarios of the
Class Size
container DC
 Perform the engineering surveys of the container
Min 6, Max 12
DC
265
5.4.2
IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
 Description modular DC installation notes
Training path
 Description modular DC combined cabinet
IDS2000 Modular Data Center
 Description modular DC fan installation
 Description modular DC UPS and UPS battery
2d
installation
Target Audience
 Description modular DC cable connection
 Description modular DC system power on
debugging
Prerequisites
 Description modular DC inspection
 None
 Description modular DC UPS fault handle
Objectives
method
On completion of this course, the participants will be
 Description modular DC fan fault handle method
able to:
 Description management system alarm handle
 Description modular DC solution basic
method
components
Duration
 Description modular DC basic concept
2 working days
 Description modular DC typical configuration
Class size
 Description modular DC value for consumer
 Description modular DC application scene
Min 6, Max 12
 Description modular DC installation tool
266
5.4.3
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training
Training path
and debugging
 Precision air conditioner different type, cooling
Precision Air Conditioner Operation
type, feature, and application scene
 Precision air conditioner different air supply
3d
method, feature, and application scene
Target Audience
 Description precision air conditioner type
selection and configuration method
Prerequisites
 Precision air conditioner design and heat load
calculation
 Have the basic technology of data center facility
 Description precision air conditioner installation
Objectives
and debugging
 Description precision air conditioner on-site fault
On completion of this course, the participants will be
able to:
handle
 Description precision air conditioner basic
 Description precision air conditioner routine
technology
maintenance
 Description precision air conditioner cooling
Duration
principle
3 working days
 Description Huawei main precision air
Class size
conditioner products
 Description precision air conditioner main
Min 6, Max 12
technical parameters
 Description precision air conditioner installation
267
5.4.4
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training
 Description of the NetEco networking mode
Training Path
NetEco Management System
Training
 Description of the NetEco function
 Description of the NetEco highlight
 Description of the NetEco data base installation
2d
 Description of the NetEco software package
Target Audience
installation
 Description of the NetEco configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
 Have the basic technology of data center facility
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
268
5.5 UPS Training Programs
5.5.1
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
work content, attention matters of UPS product
and Storage battery
UPS Operation and Maintenance
 Master the basic Fault determination method and
OUPS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
5d
 Master the trouble diagnosis and treatment
Target Audience
methods of UPS product
 Master the log analysis capabilities of UPS
 Master the commonly testing tools usage of UPS
Prerequisites
 Master the commonly faulty judgment and
 Have a basic knowledge of electrician
processing of storage battery
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Master the application scenarios and basic
working principle of UPS product
Min 6, Max 12
 Master the Structure and components function of
UPS product and Storage battery
 Master the installation and debugging points, site
269
5.5.2
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
working principle of UPS product
 Master the Structure and components function of
UPS Operation and Maintenance(Fast-Track)
UPS product and Storage battery
OUPS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Master the installation and debugging points, site
2d
work content, attention matters of UPS product
Target Audience
and Storage battery
 Master the basic Fault determination method and
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Prerequisites
 Have a basic knowledge of electrician
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 1
 Master the application scenarios and basic
270
6 Transmission Network Training Courses
6.1 Transmission Network Training Path
6.1.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network
TH02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
Associate
Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network
TH03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
Transmission Technologies and Device
TH01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
271
15d
6.1.2
Transmission Network Principle Training Path
WDM Fundamental
Training
SDH Fundamental
Training
2d
1d
Ethernet
Ethernet
2d
2d
Hybrid MSTP
2d
ASON Fundamental
Training
Note: The training program in the
1d
virtual box out of order
Transmission Network Principle Training
272
6.1.3
Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Path
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training
2d
40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology
0.5d
273
6.1.4
MSTP Products Training Path(TDM)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic
Training
0.5d
4d
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS
Installation Training
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and
2h
3d
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment
(TDM) Commissioning Training
(TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
13d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)
Network Planning and Design
Training
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced
Training
Product Overview Training
2d
OptiX MSTP Network Design
Training
Improve
5d
4d
(TDM) 1st Line Maintenance
Training
2d
(TDM) NMC Operation Training
12d
(TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
15d
Evolution and Trends
Principle
IP-oriented Transport Solution
Principl
Training
e
2d
Elective Guide

274
5d
6.1.5
MSTP Products Training Path(Packet)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network
Design Training
2h
3d
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet)
5d
1st Line Maintenance Training
2d
NMC Operation Training
10d
2nd Line Maintenance Training
12d
Principle
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental
Training
Training
2d
2d
Elective Guide

275
6.1.6
MSTP Products Training Path(Packet+TDM)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment
(Packet+TDM) Commissioning
Training
Training
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and
4d
3d
8d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)
Training
4d
2h
2d
(Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance
Training
3d
Training
13d
(Packet+TDM) NMC Operation
Training
Design Training
15d
3d
(Packet+TDM) 2nd Line
18d
Principle
Principle
Training
7d
2d
Elective Guide

276
6.1.7
MSTP Products Training Path(OSN 500/550/580)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
Training
Training
2d
Training
4d
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)
3d
5d
OptiX OSN 500/550/580
(Packet+TDM) Operation and
8d
Principle
Principle
6d
Elective Guide

277
4d
Training
13d
6.1.8
MSTP Products Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
1d
2d
Training
Training
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning
Training
4d
3d
OptiX Metro 1000 1st Line
1d
OptiX Metro 1000 2nd Line
4d
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and
8d
Principle
Principle
4d
Elective Guide

278
4d
Training
13d
6.1.9
WDM Products Training Path(OSN3800680088009800)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Product Overview Training
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation
& Maintenance Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network
Design Basic Training
2d
OptiX NG WDM Network Design
Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM)
Training
3d
0.5d
OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) 3rd Line
13d
9d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)
1st Line Maintenance Training
2d
4d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
NMC Operation Training
8d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)
13d
OptiX OSN 68008800 100G O&M
Training
5d
OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta
Training
3d
OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line
10d
Principle
Principle
2.5d
4d
Elective Guide

279
6.1.10 WDM Products Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet))
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd Line
2d
Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
7d
13d
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd Line
7d
3d
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network
3d
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and
4d
OptiX OSN 1800(Packet)
Training
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
3d
Elective Guide

280
6.1.11 WDM Products Training Path(OSN3800A6800A)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Field
Deployment Training
2d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning
and Design Training
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation
& Maintenance Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 1st Line
4d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM)
Training
3d
2d
13d
2d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 2nd Line
4d
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide

281
6.1.12 WDM Products Training Path(BWS 1600G)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation
Training
2d
OptiX WDM Network Design
Training
2h
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning
Training
3d
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered)
7d
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line
3d
2d
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation
Training
5d
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line
10d
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered)
Sub-marine System Operation and
5d
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)
Sub-marine System Operation and
5d
Principle
WDM Fundamental Training
1d
Elective Guide

282
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line
10d
6.1.13 RTN Products Training Path(RTN 900)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and
Commissioning Training (Hybrid)
OptiX RTN Network Planning
Basic Training
2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning
Training(Packet)
Commissioning Training (Packet)
3d
Training(Hybrid)
5d
(Hybrid+Packet)
3d
Training(Packet+Hybrid)
7d
OptiX RTN 900 1st Line
2d
4d
Advanced Training
7d
5d
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line
Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
5d
2d
Maintenance Training (Packet)
5d
(Hybrid+Packet)
7d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide

283
6.1.14 RTN Products Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Basic Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 3rd Line
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 1st Line
2d
Training(Packet)
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 2nd Line
3d
Training(Hybrid)
10d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002
Training
3d
Advanced Training
5d
2d
5d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 1st Line
2d
2d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd
Line Maintenance Training
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide

284
6.1.15 RTN Products Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Basic Training
2d
4d
2d
3d
OptiX RTN 600 Installation &
5d
2d
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide

285
6.1.16 Transmission Network OSS Training Path
iManager U2000 LCT
Operation Training
ONU01
ONU12
0.5d
U2000 Alarm and
Performance Management
0.5d
ONU02
U2100 System Operation and
Maintenance
OTD08
5d
1d
iManager U2000 Access Network
iManager U2100 Operation and
Monitoring Training
Transmission Network Device
Introduction
ONU07
1d
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training
(Transmission Network only)
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic
Operation
1d
OTD01
OptiX iManager Security &
Database Management
1d
OTD02
Transmission Network Device
Introduction
1d
ONU07
OptiX iManager T2000 Routine
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
1d
OTD03
OptiX iManager T2000
OptiX iManager T2000
Monitoring Training
Administration Training
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby
System Operation & Maintenance
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta
OTD06
OTD07
4d
2d
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7
Standby Training
Delta Training
286
6.1.17 Planning and Design Training Path
OptiX SDH Network Design
Basic Training
2d
Training
Design Training
3d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON
(SDH) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX MSTP Planning & Design Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM
Network Design Basic
Training
2d
OptiX NG WDM Network
Design Training
Training
3d
3d
OptiX NG WDM Packet
Training
3d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A
4d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON
(WDM) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX BWS 1600S
(unrepeatered) Planning and
Design Training
3d
OptiX WDM Planning & Design Training
287
OptiX RTN Network
Planning Basic Training
2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network
Planning Training (Packet)
Planning Training (Hybrid)
3d
3d
Planning Advanced Training
2d
OptiX RTN Planning & Design Training
288
Planning Training
(Hybrid+Packet)
4d
6.1.18 Assessment and Optimization Training Path
OptiX SDH Network
Assessment Training
OptiX SDH Network
Optimization Training
3d
3d
OptiX SDH Network
Expansion and
Reconstruction Training
3d
OptiX MSTP Optimization and Reconstruction Training
OptiX WDM Network
Assessment Training
OptiX WDM Network
2d
OptiX WDM Network
Expansion Training
1d
OptiX WDM Network
2d
3d
OptiX WDM Optimization and Reconstruction Training
OptiX RTN Network
Assessment Training
OptiX RTN Network
2d
1d
OptiX RTN Optimization and Reconstruction Training
289
6.2 List of Training Program(s) for Transmission Network Project
Transmission Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs.
Progra
Training Program
m Level
Duration
(workday
s)
Trainin
Suppor
g
t E-lab
Class
Locatio
Deliver
Size
n
Transmission Engineer Certification
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and
Ⅱ
15
6 ~ 16
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 16
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 16
SDH Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1
No
6 ~ 12
Ethernet Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
ASON Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
1
No
6 ~ 12
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
0.5
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training
Ⅰ
0.5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training
Ⅰ
2h
No
No limit
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
2
Device Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP
Transmission Network Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN
Transmission Network Training
Transmission Network Principle Training
Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training
MSTP Products Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance
Training
290
Yes
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
12
Ⅱ
15
Ⅲ
13
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training
Ⅱ
10
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
12
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
8
Yes
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
3
Ⅱ
15
Ⅱ
18
Ⅱ
4
Ⅱ
5
Ⅱ
8
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
4
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
8
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
1
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
4
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
1
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance
Training
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance
Training
291
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
yes
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WDM Products Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training
Ⅰ
0.5
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training
Ⅰ
2h
No
No limit
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
9
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) NMC Operation Training
Ⅱ
8
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
13
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
13
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 68008800 100G O&M Training
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training
Ⅱ
3
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Field Deployment Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
5
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
5
Ⅳ
5
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
7
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation
292
Yes
Yes
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
10
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training
Ⅳ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
Yes
6 ~ 12
RTN 900 Products Training
(Hybrid)
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
(Packet)
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
7
OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Packet)
Ⅱ
5
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet)
Ⅱ
7
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
7
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
5
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
5
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
4
Yes
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
2
Yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 300 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
Yes
6 ~ 12
(Hybrid+Packet)
Yes
6 ~ 12
293
Ⅱ
5
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 600
Ⅱ
5
No
6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)
Ⅰ
2
yes
6 ~ 16
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training
Ⅱ
1
yes
6 ~ 16
iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training
Ⅰ
2
yes
6 ~ 16
OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training
Ⅲ
2
yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training
Ⅲ
4
no
2~6
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training
Ⅱ
2
yes
6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
4
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training
Ⅱ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Design Training
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training
Ⅳ
3
No
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
4
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training
Ⅲ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid)
Ⅲ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid)
Ⅲ
4
No
6 ~ 12
Transmission Network OSS Training
Transmission Network Planning and Design Training
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design
Training
294
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training
Ⅲ
2
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training
Ⅲ
4
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
3
No
6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Ⅳ
3
no
4~8
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training
Ⅳ
3
no
4~8
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training
Ⅳ
3
no
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training
Ⅳ
2
No
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training
Ⅳ
1
No
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training
Ⅳ
2
No
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training
Ⅳ
3
No
4~8
OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training
Ⅳ
2
No
4 ~ 12
OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training
Ⅳ
1
No
4 ~ 12
Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training
Level Description:Ⅰ:Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ:Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
295
6.3 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs
6.3.1
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device
Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic concept of MPLS
 Describe the basic concept of PWE3
Transmission Technologies and Device
OTH01
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the common SDH network topologies
and their features
15d
 Explain the protection mechanism of
MSP/SNCP
Target Audience
 Explain the system structure and features of
Personnel who are going to take HCNA
the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
 State the main functions of the boards in the
Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
exam
 Accomplish the SDH network configuration and
Personnel who expect to learn about basic optical
monitoring through NMS
transmission principles and Huawei SDH
 Accomplish the PDH service configuration
equipment operation
through NMS
Prerequisites
 Accomplish the Ethernet service
(EPL/EVPL/EPLAN) configuration through
 Having a general knowledge of
NMS
telecommunications
 List the common analysis methods of fault
Objectives
locating
Duration
be able to:
15 working days
 Describe SDH working principle
 Describe WDM working principle
Class Size
 Describe OTN working principle
Min 6, Max 16
 Describe Ethernet working principle
296
6.3.2
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
commissioning
 Describe the complex Networking of SDH
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network
OTH02
Lecture, Lab
 Replacing the
SDH Board
 Analyze the discrete services on the NMS
10d
 Tests for common ethernet services indicators
Target Audience
 Describe the principle of the clock protection
 Describes the notes to do the SDH equipment
Personnel who are going to take HCNP
interconnection
HTMN(MSTP)(Huawei Certified Network
Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
 Complete the ECC maintenance
Network) exam
 Describes the methods for handling typical
Personnel who expect to learn SDH network
faults and alarms to troubleshoot networks in
commissioning, maintenance and troubleshooting
practice
 Describes the mechanism of pointer
Prerequisites
justification
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
 Describes the functions of ASON
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Duration
Objectives
10 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 16
 Describe the procedure of the SDH equipment
297
6.3.3
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
 Describe the network topologies and signal
flow
Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network
OTH03
Lecture, Lab
 Implement the data configuration through
iManager U2000
10d
 Implement the single station and system
Target Audience
commissioning step by step through
iManager U2000
Personnel who are going to take HCNP
 List the common indices of WDM product and
HTON(OTN)(Huawei Certified Network
perform the testing
Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network) exam
 Describe the WDM protection principle
Personnel who expect to learn WDM network
 Describe the notice of traffic interconnection
configuration, commissioning, maintenance and
 Describe the principle of ALC/IPA/APE
troubleshooting
 Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
Prerequisites
testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
replacement, etc
 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
from troubleshooting practice
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the function and features of WDM
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
cabinet, sub-rack and boards
298
6.4 Transmission Network Principle Training Training Programs
6.4.1
SDH Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Illustrate the multiplexing procedure of PDH
signal to SDH signal
SDH Principle
OTA01
 Outline the function of section and path
Lecture
overhead
1d
 Explain the working mechanism of the pointer
SDH Networking and Protection
OTA02
Lecture
and their features
 Explain the protection mechanism of linear
1d
MSP
 Explain the protection mechanism of MS
Target Audience
shared protection ring
 Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
SDH series equipment operation and maintenance
ring/mesh topology
engineer
 Analyze the service signal flow before/after the
SDH series equipment operation and maintenance
protection switch takes place
engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
 NA
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the structure of the SDH frame
299
6.4.2
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the function module and network
WDM Basics
OTC01
structure of WDM system
Lecture
 Outline the characteristics of various fibers
1d
 Explain the functions and characteristics of
Target Audience
various optical components
 Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
WDM network operation and maintenance
for example optical source, optical amplifiers,
engineer
etc
Prerequisites
 Describe the characteristics of optical interface
Having working experience in the planning and
design of WDM networks
in WDM system
Duration
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM
1 working day
Network Design Basic Training and OptiX NG
WDM Network Design Training or having
Class Size
equivalent knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
300
6.4.3
Ethernet Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Illustrate the Ethernet frame structure
 Describe the function of VLAN and L2
Ethernet Basics
OTA03
switching
Lecture
 Outline the classification of Ethernet service
2d
 Explain the function and applications of
Target Audience
different types Ethernet service
Personnel who requires a general knowledge of
 Outline the basic concepts of data traffic
Ethernet over SDH technology
 List basic concepts of network and internet
 Describe the applications of familiar protocol
Prerequisites
and standard
Having a general knowledge of data
 Illustrate basic structure of IP network
telecommunications
Objectives
 Tell the basic knowledge of IP address
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
 Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Class Size
 Explain the technical background of the
Min 6, Max 12
Ethernet and its basic concepts
301
6.4.4
ASON Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives
ASON Basics
be able to:
OTA07
Lecture
1d
 Outline the standards of ASON
 Illustrate the structure of ASON
Target Audience
 Describe the networking characters of ASON
Technical manager, ASON operation and
maintenance engineer
 Explain the service characters of ASON
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having a general knowledge of SDH and data
Class Size
telecommunications basics
Min 6, Max 12
302
6.4.5
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
 Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction
OTA45
Lecture
 Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX
Hybrid MSTP
1d
 Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
 Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
Hybrid MSTP Network Application
OTA46
Lecture
for Ethernet
1d
for TDM E1
 Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Target Audience
networking
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer
 Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
Hybrid MSTP novice
MSTP product
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance
 Classify the service types of Ethernet
engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
Having a general knowledge of SDH and Ethernet
2 working days
communications basics
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the classification of IP addresses
303
6.5 Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Training
Programs
6.5.1
Training Path
Objectives
Hybrid MSTP Network Overview
be able to:
OTA08
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe the background of OptiX Hybrid
MSTP
 Explain the service characters of OptiX Hybrid
All IP Transport Network Solution
OTA19
Lecture
MSTP
 Describe the networking characters of OptiX
0.5d
Hybrid MSTP
 Outline the difference of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
Metro OTN Solution
OTC09
Lecture
network from other network technology
 List the trend of Metro transmission network
0.5d
 Illustrate the features of OTN
 Describe the application of Huawei OTN
products
OptiX RTN Microwave Network Overview
 List the equipment types of OptiX RTN
OTF48
Lecture
0.5d
 Outline main functions of OptiX RTN equipment
 Describe typical networking and protection of
Target Audience
OptiX RTN equipment
 Know the typical solutions of OpiX RTN
Technical manager
equipment
 Outline the technologies of the transmission
Personnel who requires a general understanding
network for All-IP service
of Huawei OptiX RTN equipment and solution
 Describe the solutions for All-IP network
Prerequisites
 Compare the All-IP transport solutions and
 Having the basic knowledge about
telecommunications network, especially
figure out the difference
Duration
transmission network.
2 working days
 Having the experience for telecommunications
equipment
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
304
6.5.2
Training Path
 Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G
transmission
OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU
Technology
OTC81
Lecture
 Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK
modulation method
0.5d
 Describe the basic principle of coherent
Target Audience
detection
 List the main functions and features of the
Technical manager
40G/100G coherent OTU board
Prerequisites
Duration
Having the basic knowledge for communication
0.5 working day
network
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
305
6.6 MSTP Products Training Training Programs
6.6.1
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training
Training Path
 List the function of transmission network
 Describe the network application of the OptiX
NG SDH ＆ OCS system
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Product Overview
OTA27
Lecture
 Describe the structure of the OptiX NG SDH ＆
0.5d
OCS equipment
 List the main cards of the OptiX NG SDH ＆
Target Audience
OCS equipment
 Understand the features of the OptiX NG SDH
Non-technical manager
＆ OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS products novice
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
 NA
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
306
6.6.2
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training
Training Path
 Outline the main boards of the OptiX NG SDH
＆ OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Installation
OTA26
Lecture, WBT
 List the equipment installation procedure
 Describe the preparation for installation
2h
 State the required equipment room
Target Audience
environment and grounding condition checks
 Verify the cabinet, cables and component
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS installation engineer
installations
Prerequisites
Duration
NA
2 hours
Objectives
Class Size
No limit
be able to:
 Describe the features of the OptiX NG SDH ＆
OCS equipment
307
6.6.3
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path
 State the main functions of the cards in the
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS equipment
OTA02
Lecture
and their features
1d
MSP
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Hardware
Description （TDM）
OTA29
Lecture
1.5d
ring/mesh topology
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Commissioning
OTA32
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
U2000
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS commissioning engineer
 Describe the main functions of U2000
 Describe the preparation for the commissioning
Prerequisites
 List the items for single station commissioning
Having working experience in transport network
for OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS system
Be familiar with Windows operating system
 Outline the procedures of network
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course or
commissioning for OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS
having equivalent knowledge
system
Objectives
 Summarize the equipment/network condition
after commissioning
 Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS
be able to:
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX
NG SDH ＆ OCS equipment
system commissioning
Duration
5 working days
the OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS equipment
 Outline the system protection modes of the
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
308
6.6.4
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS System
Description
OTA28
Lecture
 Outline the system protection schemes of the
 Outline the operation environment of OptiX
1d
SDH series equipment
 List the status description of OptiX SDH series
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and
Maintenance
OTA30
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
equipment indicators
 List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH
0.5d
series equipment
 Perform the basic maintenance operations of
OptiX SDH series equipment
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance
 Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
OTA35
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
 Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX
Target Audience
iManager T2000 LCT
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS equipment field
 Create topology including create NE/Link/NM
 Perform the NE configuration, board
Prerequisites
configuration, service dispatching and
protection configuration for equipment via
OptiX iManager T2000 LCT
Having a general knowledge of SDH basics
 Perform the routine maintenance via T2000
Objectives
LCT
Duration
be able to:
 Illustrate the networking applications of the
2 working days
Class Size
 Describe the system structure and features of
Min 6, Max 12
309
6.6.5
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
OTA02
Lecture
Objectives
1d
be able to:
OTA29
Lecture
1.5d
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Products
Configuration
OTA31
Lab, E-lab
2d
and their features
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation
ONU10
Lecture, Lab
1d
MSP
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance
OTA10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
ring/mesh topology
3d
ASON Basics
OTA07
Lecture
U2000
1d
 Accomplish the network protection and SDH
ASON Operation and Maintenance
service configuration through NMS
OTA12
Lecture, Lab
2d
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side
Maintenance
OTA40
Lecture
 List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG
SDH ＆ OCS equipment
0.5d
 Describe the functions and application of the
Target Audience
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS
equipment
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS network operation center
 Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
engineer
Prerequisites
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
310
 State the purpose of Ethernet performance
testing
 List the common indices of Ethernet service
 Implement the creation of ASON network
performance testing
 Create SLA services and test the protection
 Explain the concepts of common testing
and restoration of them
indices
 Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON
 Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
network
performance testing
 Explain the operation precaution of ASON
 Implement the Ethernet performance testing
 Explain the fault reported by the ASON network
and analyze the result
 Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
 Know the operation environment of NMS
 List the maintenance tasks
 Solve the typical ASON trouble
Duration
 Perform the basic maintenance operations
12 working days
 Complete the maintenance records
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
311
6.6.6
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OTA02
Lecture
OTA29
Lecture
OTA12
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
1d
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side
Maintenance
OTA40
1.5d
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS operation and
ONU10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
Prerequisites
Having working experience in the maintenance of
SDH products
Configuration
OTA31
Lab, E-lab
2d
Objectives
Maintenance
OTA10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
3d
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting
OTA14
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
Maintenance
OTA30
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
and their features
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance
OTA35
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
MSP
0.5d
ASON Basics
OTA07
ring/mesh topology
Lecture
1d
312
U2000
iManager T2000 LCT
series equipment
LCT
locating
 Outline the fault handling flow
equipment
 Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
error bit, etc
testing
replacement, etc
 Analyze common faulty of the network consist
performance testing
of OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS series
indices
performance testing
Duration
15 working days
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
313
6.6.7
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OTA29
Lecture
 Describe the principle and process of TPS on
OptiX NG SDH equipment
1.5d
 List the main characteristics of TPS on OptiX
NG SDH equipment
 Implement the configuration of TPS on OptiX
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Features and
Application
3d
OTA34
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
NG SDH equipment
 Describe the feature of power source system in
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS system
 Grasp the protection principle and function of
OptiX SDH Special Topics
all types of power sources in OptiX NG SDH ＆
OTA36
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
OCS equipments
 Grasp the principle of cross-connection ＆
clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
OptiX SDH System Advanced
Troubleshooting
OTA37
Lecture, Lab, Discussion
SDH ＆ OCS system
 Grasp the mechanism of cross-connection ＆
2.5d
clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
SDH ＆ OCS system
 Describe the principle of SCC active/standby
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation
＆ Maintenance
4d
OTA42
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
switching in OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS system
 List the methods of SCC switching in OptiX NG
SDH ＆ OCS system
Target Audience
 Describe the traffic flow and service
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS senior operation and
configuration about the complicated networks
 Analyze the protection capability about the
Prerequisites
complicated networks
 Accomplish the service configuration of the
Completion of OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Equipment
complicated network and verify the protection
(TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training or OptiX NG
 Describe the working mechanism of the L2
SDH ＆ OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation
switching
Training
 Interpret the basic of QoS
Objectives
 Outline the key technology in QoS
 Describe the typical QoS application
be able to:
 Describe the frame structure of MPLS
 Interpret the basic of QinQ
 List the application of MPLS and QinQ
 Describe the working mechanism of virtual
concatenation
 Describe the function of LCAS
 Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
314
 Describe the network application of ECC and
Ethernet signal
 Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
how to separate huge ECC network into
 Analyze the common faults locating
smaller networks
 Illustrate the extended applications of ECC
 Outline the procedures of Ethernet
 Accomplish the configuration of ECC, verify
troubleshooting
 Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
extended ECC and DCC transparent
 Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
transmission
 Outline common ECC command lines
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and
 Get further understand of the feature of OptiX
service OAM
NG SDH ＆ OCS system
 Outline the typical application scenario of
 Analyze common cases in the real network and
Ethernet service OAM
figure out the problem
 Accomplish the OAM testing
 Locate the faulty of the failed network and
 Locate the fault position when error reports
summarize the key point of troubleshooting
 Explain the meaning of clock protection related
synchronization parameters
Duration
 Explain the basic principles of implementing
clock protection networking
13 working days
Class Size
 Accomplish the clock protection configuration
Min 6, Max 12
and verify it while the network fails
 Grasp the working principle of ECC
315
6.6.8
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training
Training Path
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA46
Lecture
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1d
networking
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description
OTA48
Lecture
MSTP product
1d
 Check the equipment condition such as power
connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
ONU10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
 Outline and perform the commissioning
process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
 Perform the commissioning process of the
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning
OTA52
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
network
 Describe methods of operation including circuit
2d
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
Target Audience
fault finding
 Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
 Perform commissioning tests on the network
Prerequisites
U2000
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the networking applications of the
5 working days
Class Size
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the system structure of the OptiX
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
 Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
316
6.6.9
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA48
Lecture
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1d
Maintenance
OTA30
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
series equipment
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance
OTA53
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
Target Audience
 Outline the function of basic menus of
iManager U2000 LCT
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance
 Create topology including create NE/Link
engineer
Prerequisites
configuration, and service dispatching and
iManager U2000 LCT
Objectives
 Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
LCT
be able to:
Duration
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
317
6.6.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OTA45
Lecture
1d
OTA46
Lecture
1d
Hybrid MSTP
OTA48
Lecture
for Ethernet
1d
for TDM E1
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
ONU10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products
Configuration
OTA49
Lab, E-lab
3d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
U2000
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application
OTA50
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
 Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
 Configure the protection of TDM plane ＆
packet transport plane for the network and
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side
1d
OTA51
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
equipment
 Configure the common services for the TDM
plane
Target Audience
 Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer
in the packet transport plane
Prerequisites
 Outline the QoS model
 Describe QoS basic concepts
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics and
 Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
MSTP network
OTA45 Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction
 Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system
courses or having equivalent knowledge
according to the service demand
318
 Perform the basic maintenance operations for
service OAM
Hybrid MSTP equipment
 Describe the working mechanism and
networking
application scene of MPLS OAM
MSTP product
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM
application scene of PW OAM
Duration
10 working days
 Describe the operation environment of NMS
Class Size
 List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP
Min 6, Max 12
equipment
319
6.6.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Prerequisites
OTA45
Lecture
1d
OTA46
Lecture
Objectives
1d
be able to:
OTA48
Lecture
1d
Hybrid MSTP
ONU10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
for Ethernet
for TDM E1
Configuration
OTA49
Lab, E-lab
3d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA50
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1500/3500/7500/7500II
2d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System
Troubleshooting
OTA54
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
U2000
1.5d
1d
OTA51
Lecture, Lab
equipment
OTA53
Lecture, Lab
plane
0.5d
320
iManager U2000 LCT
MSTP network
LCT
 List the common analysis methods of packet
network fault locating
service OAM
 Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc
troubleshooting methods for packet network
 Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
network
networking
MSTP product
equipment
Duration
12 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
iManager U2000 LCT
321
6.6.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA29
Lecture
1500/3500/7500/7500II
1.5d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
 Check the equipment condition such as power
OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS Commissioning
OTA32
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
2d
process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
 Perform the commissioning process of the
network
OTA46
Lecture
1d
 Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
fault finding
OTA48
Lecture
 Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
 Perform commissioning tests on the network
1d
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning
OTA52
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
Prerequisites
 Describe the preparation for the commissioning
 List the items for single station commissioning
for OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS system
 Outline the procedures of network
Objectives
commissioning for OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS
system
be able to:
 Summarize the equipment/network condition
after commissioning
networking
 Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH ＆ OCS
MSTP product
U2000
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
322
Duration
Class Size
8 working days
Min 6, Max 12
323
6.6.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Description
OTA28
Lecture
1d
Maintenance
OTA30
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
series equipment
0.5d
OTA48
Lecture
1d
iManager U2000 LCT
OTA53
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
Target Audience
iManager U2000 LCT
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance
LCT
engineer
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
Duration
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
324
6.6.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
Maintenance
OTA10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
3d
OTA29
Lecture
1.5d
Hybrid MSTP
Configuration
OTA31
Lab, E-lab
for Ethernet
2d
for TDM E1
U2000
OTA45
Lecture
1d
OTA46
Lecture
1d
equipment
plane
Configuration
OTA49
Lab, E-lab
3d
OTA50
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
MSTP network
1d
OTA51
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
service OAM
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer
Prerequisites
325
equipment
equipment
testing
performance testing
indices
performance testing
networking
MSTP product
Duration
15 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
326
6.6.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
1d
OTA51
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
Maintenance
OTA10
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
3d
Target Audience
OTA29
Lecture
Prerequisites
1.5d
Configuration
OTA31
Lab, E-lab
Objectives
2d
be able to:
OTA14
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
Hybrid MSTP
OTA45
Lecture
1d
for Ethernet
for TDM E1
OTA46
Lecture
1d
equipment
Configuration
OTA49
Lab, E-lab
plane
3d
OTA50
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
MSTP network
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System
Troubleshooting
OTA54
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1.5d
service OAM
327
equipment
equipment
testing
performance testing
indices
networking
performance testing
MSTP product
locating
error bit, etc
 Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
replacement, etc
network
Duration
18 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
328
6.6.16 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Appreciate the networking applications of the
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware
＆ Networking
1.5d
OTA60
Lecture
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
 Describe the main functions of the boards used
on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Service ＆
Configuration
1.5d
OTA62
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment
 List the status description of OptiX OSN
Troubleshooting
OTA63
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
500/550/580 equipment indicators
0.5d
 List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine ＆
Maintenance
0.5d
OTA61
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment
OSN 500/550/580 equipment
 Configure protection attributes in OSN
Target Audience
500/550/580 network, such as SNCP, LMP,
RMP etc
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 operation and
 Configure services of OSN 500/550
 /580
Prerequisites
Duration
Having experience in the operation and
4 working days
maintenance of optical network equipment
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
329
6.6.17 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
Hardware ＆ Networking
OTA64
Lecture
be able to:
1.5d
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Service
＆ Configuration
1d
OTA66
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)
on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special
Topic
1d
OTA67
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
OSN 500/550/580 series Equipment
500/550/580 Equipment indicators
Troubleshooting
OTA68
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
0.5d
500/550/580 Equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 Equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine
＆ Maintenance
1d
OTA65
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OSN 500/550/580 Equipment
 Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection
attributes in OSN 500/550/580 network
Target Audience
 Configure packet services on OSN
500/550/580
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
330
6.6.18 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware
＆ Networking
1.5d
OTA60
Lecture
Objectives
Hardware ＆ Networking
OTA64
Lecture
1.5d
be able to:
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special
Topic
1d
OTA67
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)
on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)
Service ＆ Configuration
1.5d
OTA69
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment
Troubleshooting
OTA63
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
500/550/580 equipment indicators
0.5d
500/550/580 equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine ＆
Maintenance
0.5d
OTA61
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment
 Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection,SNCP,
Troubleshooting
OTA68
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
LMP, RMP etc attributes in OSN 500/550/580
network
0.5d
 Configure services of OSN
500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine
＆ Maintenance
1d
OTA65
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
Duration
8 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Target Audience
331
6.6.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the frame structure of MPLS
 Interpret the basic of QinQ
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation
＆ Maintenance
4d
OTA42
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 List the application of MPLS and QinQ
 Describe the working mechanism of virtual
concatenation
Target Audience
 Describe the function of LCAS
 Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
Ethernt over SDH equipment senior operation and
Ethernet signal
 Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Prerequisites
 Analyze the common faults locating
Be familiar with NMS
 Outline the procedures of Ethernet
Be familiar with OptiX SDH service configuration
troubleshooting
and maintenance
 Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
Be familiar with the Ethernet service configuration
 Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
and maintenance
Upon completion of OTA03 Ethernet Basics course
service OAM
or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
be able to:
 Describe the working mechanism of the L2
Duration
switching
4 working days
 Interpret the basic of QoS
Class Size
 Describe the typical QoS application
Min 6, Max 12
332
6.6.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
ASON Basics
OTA07
Lecture
1d
network
OTA12
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
Target Audience
ASON operation and maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
Be familiar with NMS
3 working days
Be familiar with SDH service configuration and
maintenance
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
333
6.6.21 OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation ＆
Maintenance
OTA39
Lecture, Lab
 List the main functions of T2000V2R7
8d
Target Audience
series equipment
OptiX OSN 2000 operation and maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
OptiX OSN 2000
the OptiX OSN 2000
on the OptiX OSN 2000
locating
OptiX OSN 2000
 Describe the common SDH network topology
error bit, etc
and features
 Explain the protection mechanism
 Analyze case of service interruption
 Configure the attributes of equipment via NMS
 Analyze case of bit error
 Configure protection attributes in OptiX OSN
 Analyze case of protection fault
 Analyze case of wrong fiber type
2000 network, such as SNCP,LMP,RMP etc
 Configure services of OptiX OSN 2000
Duration
 Grasp T2000 V2R7 new function
T2000V2R7
8 working days
Class Size
 Describe the directory structure of T2000V2R7
Min 6, Max 12
334
6.6.22 OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the network application of OptiX
Metro 500
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and
Maintenance
OTA15
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 Outline the hardware structure and features of
OptiX Metro 500
1d
 List the functions of OptiX Metro 500
Target Audience
 Describe operation environment of OptiX Metro
100/500 equipment
OptiX Metro 100/500 operation and maintenance
 List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro
engineer
100/500 equipment
Prerequisites
 Accomplish the basic maintenance operations
of OptiX Metro 100/500 equipment
 Describe the functions of basic menus of
Web-LCT
Objectives
configuration, service dispatching and clock ＆
orderwire configuration for equipment via
be able to:
Web-LCT
 Perform the routine maintenance via Web-LCT
Metro 100
Duration
the OptiX Metro 100
1 working day
Class Size
OptiX Metro 100
Min 6, Max 12
OptiX Metro 100
335
6.6.23 OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training
Training Path
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning
OTA17
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
 Complete hardware and software
4d
commissioning of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
Target Audience
 Interconnect all the equipment and perform
OptiX Metro 1000 commissioning engineer
Prerequisites
iManager T2000 LCT
Having working experience in the optical transport
network
Objectives
LCT
be able to:
Duration
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
336
6.6.24 OptiX Metro 1000 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
1000 equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 First Line Maintenance
OTA16
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000
equipment
1d
Target Audience
of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 field maintenance engineer
iManager T2000 LCT
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
LCT
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
337
6.6.25 OptiX Metro 1000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000
Equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 Second Line
Maintenance
OTA18
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
of OptiX Metro 1000 Equipment
4d
Target Audience
T2000V2R7
OptiX Metro 1000 operation and maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites
 Accomplish the network creation and SDH
service configuration of OptiX
Objectives
155/622(H)(Metro 1000) equipment
locating
be able to:
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
error bit, etc
Duration
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
1000 Equipment
338
6.7 WDM Products Training Training Programs
6.7.1
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe the position of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical
OptiX NG WDM System Description
OTC24
Lecture
transport network
 Describe the functions and features of OptiX
0.5d
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
 Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX
Target Audience
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance
include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC,
engineer
XCS etc
 Describe the protection and features of OptiX
Prerequisites
 Having basic knowledge of
telecommunications
OSN 3800/6800//8800(OTN) systems
Duration
0.5 working day
Objectives
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
339
6.7.2
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training
Training Path
different units in OptiX WDM products
 Describe the hardware installation procedure
OptiX WDM Installation
OTC04
Lecture, WBT
 Describe cable routing and related installation
specifications for the equipment
2h
 Outline the safety precautions to be taken
Target Audience
during the installation
 Perform the hardware installation inspection
WDM network installation engineer
according to the checklist
Prerequisites
Duration
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications
2 hours
Objectives
Class Size
No limit
be able to:
 Outline the functions and features of the
340
6.7.3
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training
Training Path
ONU10
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the advantages of OTN
 Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
1d
different components’ function
 Describe the main features of the optical layer
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Hardware Description & Application
OTC25
Lecture
grooming and electrical layer grooming
 Describe OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
2d
system signal flow and fiber connection, which
include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
 Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Products Configuration
OTC26
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
different network elements
3.5d
 Describe the functions, architecture and the
menus of iManager U2000
 Implement iManager U2000 basic operations,
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning
OTC28
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) data
configuration and system management
2.5d
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Target Audience
products through iManager U2000
 Configure the typical protection for the
equipment
OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer
 Check the data configuration correctness and
Prerequisites
validity
 Check the equipment running condition such
network
as power connections, fiber connections,
mounted boards, etc
Objectives
procedure for OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
be able to:
 Perform the single station commissioning of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
 Perform the commissioning of supervisory
 Describe the main functions of the boards
channel
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX
 Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
 List the common network topologies and
 Perform indices testing during the
network elements of OptiX OSN
commissioning process
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
 Eliminate the fault occurring during the
 Describe the network applications of OptiX
Duration
U2000
9 working days
341
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
342
6.7.4
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OSN 3800/6800//8800(OTN) systems
OptiX NG WDM System Description
OTC24
Lecture
 Describe the status of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) products alarm
0.5d
indicators
 Describe the running environment of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
OptiX NG WDM(OTN) Field Maintenance
OTC29
Lecture, Lab
 List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
1.5d
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products,
such as board replacement, fiber connection,
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance
optical power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites
 Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager
U2000/Web LCT
Having a general knowledge of WDM basics
Objectives
configuration, and protection configuration of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via
be able to:
iManager U2000/Web LCT
 Describe the position of OptiX OSN
 Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical
3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via iManager
transport network
U2000/Web LCT
Duration
2 working days
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which
Class Size
include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC,
Min 6, Max 12
XCS etc
343
6.7.5
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
WDM Basics
OTC01
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Lecture
1d
U2000
OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
1d
 Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
signals and function for different layers
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
OTC25
Lecture
 Outline alarm and performance events
2d
generation mechanism
 Analyze the alarm and performance events and
locate the failures in OTN
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
OTC26
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
3.5d
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM network operation center engineer
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
equipment
etc
validity
in WDM system
Duration
8 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
344
6.7.6
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
WDM Basics
OTC01
Lecture
1d
etc
in WDM system
OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
1d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
OTC25
Lecture
2d
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
OTC26
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
3.5d
U2000
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning
OTC28
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
2.5d
NG WDM(OTN) System Troubleshooting
OTC30
Lecture, Lab
2.5d
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites
WDM products
Objectives
be able to:
345
 Explain the troubleshooting ideas and methods
equipment
for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
 Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN
validity
3800/6800/8800(OTN) troubleshooting
 Describe the fault handling flow
mounted boards, etc
 Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
 Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
procedure for OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
case analysis and practice
Duration
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
13 working days
channel
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
346
6.7.7
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Generalize the categories of boards
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet
Operation&Maintenance
OTC32
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
boards
 Outline typical node signal flow of OptiX OSN
3d
3800/6800/8800
 Perform the commissioning for OptiX NG WDM
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)
Advanced Troubleshooting
OTC64
Lecture, Lab
systems
 Describe the characteristics of various
3.5d
protection types and their application scenarios
 Understand the operations related to the OSN
3800/6800/8800 product protection
OptiX NG WDM ASON
Operation&Maintenance
OTC65
Lecture, Lab
 Fulfilled the service configuration and verify the
3d
characteristics of
various protection types
 Locate and eliminate the trouble based on
maintenance rules
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,
Networking & Application Introduction
OTC86
Lecture
 Illustrate troubleshooting common operation
 List the troubleshooting methods
1d
 Briefly introduce the general workflow in OptiX
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service
Configuration
OTC87
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
troubleshooting
 Enhance the troubleshooting analyse and
2d
reaction abilility through case discussion and
practice

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 Hardware
Description & Signal Flow Review
OTC122
Lecture

0.5d
 Explain the IP over WDM principle
 Describe the Ethernet service and protection of
Target Audience
NG WDM equipment
 Configure the Ethernet service and protection
OptiX NG WDM senior operation and maintenance
engineer
through iManager U2000
 Implement the routine maintenance and
Prerequisites
troubleshooting of NG WDM Ethernet service
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)

2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation Training
 Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
Objectives
 List the OSN 8800 packet boards
 Describe the networking application of OSN
be able to:
8800 (Packet)
 Describe the position and networking ability of
 Illustrate the service and protection type of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
OSN 8800 (Packet)
 List the main functions and features of OptiX
 mplement the data configuration through
OSN 3800/6800/8800
iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service
347
and protection
Class Size
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
13 working days
348
6.7.8
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
ring/mesh topology
OTA14
Lecture, Lab
 Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) product
2d
 Configure the required
SDH/Synchronization/Overhead units
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Hardware
Description & Application
OTC48
Lecture
 Configure the typical protection for the network
and equipment
1d
 Configure the common services for the typical
SDH networks
 Analyze and maintain the configured
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Product
Configuration
OTC49
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
equipment/units/services
2.5d
 Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OCS)
product indicators
 Describe the operation environment of OptiX
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Field Maintenance
OTC50
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
1d
configuration, service provisioning and
Target Audience
protection configuration for equipment via NMS
 Perform the routine maintenance via NMS
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) operation and
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment such as
Prerequisites
board replacement, resetting etc
 Complete the routine maintenance records of
Objectives
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
U2000
be able to:
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) system
locating
OSN 8800(OCS) system
error bit, etc
OSN 8800(OCS) system
and their features
replacement, etc
MSP
349
Class Size
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
7 working days
350
6.7.9
OptiX OSN 68008800 100G O&M Training
Training Path
detection
OptiX OSN 68008800 100G Operation and
Maintenance
5d
OTC128
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Configure the common data configuation by
U2000
Target Audience
 Configure the OCh trail by U2000
 Configure 100G board electrical layer services
OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance
by iManager U2000
engineer
 List the Items of Routine Maintenance;
Prerequisites
 Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on
Completion of OptiX NG WDM relatvie technical
U2000
training
 Implement routine operation and maintenance
Objectives
on NMS side
 Describe the optical power commissioning
requirements
be able to:
 List the optical power commissioning
 Describe the position and networking ability of
procedures
OptiX OSN 6800/8800
 Perform the optical power commissioning for
 Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 6800/8800
100Gbit/s and mixed transmission system
subrack
 List the items of testing the network
 List different usage of the common NG WDM
 Master the common methods for trouble
shooting
network node types
 Analyze common faults
 Describe NG WDM network application modes
 Handle typical faults
and main features
Duration
transmission
modulation method
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
351
6.7.10 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM ASON
Operation#Maintenance
OTC65
Lecture, Lab
 Fulfill the WDM ASON trail configuration
3d
 Complete the ASON routine maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM ASON
items
 Describe The Basic Thoughts and Methods of
operation and
NG WDN ASON Fault Locating
 Quickly restore interrupted ASON services
Prerequisites
under emergency conditions.
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)
Duration
2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation Training.
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
352
6.7.11 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN
1800 data configuration and system
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation & Maintenance
OTC46
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
management
 Configure OptiX OSN 1800 through NMS
4d
Target Audience
equipment
validity
engineer
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 1800
WDM products
OSN 1800
Upon completion of OTC01 WDM Basics course or
 Apply different troubleshooting methods
Objectives
according to actual faults
 Perform the common troubleshooting
operations of WDM network
be able to:
 Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of
OptiX WDM network faults
OptiX OSN 1800
 Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
WDM network
OSN 1800
network elements of OptiX OSN 1800
Duration
OSN 1800
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
mounted boards, etc
 Describe OptiX OSN 1800 system signal flow
and fiber connection
353
6.7.12 OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology
Introduction
OTC85
Lecture
0.5d
OSN 1800 equipment.
OptiX OSN 1800 System Introduction
OTC111
Lecture
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.
1d
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.
 System signal flow of OSN 1800
 The protection and design principle of OSN
Configuration
OTC112
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
1800
1.5d
 Metro access backhaul application acenes of
OSN 1800
 Key factors in networking of OSN 1800
OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Features
OTC113
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Describe OSN 1800 product feature (packet)
 Master packet services configuration
1d
 Outline the configuration of protection for OSN
1800 (packet)
OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) Routine
Maintenance
OTC114
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Describe the function and features of QoS in
OSN 1800 (Packet)
0.5d
 Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000
 Describe the function and features of OAM in
OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) System
Troubleshooting
OTC115
Lecture, Lab
OSN 1800 (Packet)
0.5d
 Implement the OAM configuration through
iManager U2000
Target Audience
 List the items of routine maintenance
engineer
U2000
Prerequisites
WDM products
Objectives
be able to:
 Describe the bacis concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
 Analyze common faulty of the OSN 1800
and QinQ
(Packet) network
354
Duration
Class Size
5 working days
Min 6, Max 12
355
6.7.13 OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
WDM Basics
OTC01
Lecture
1d
OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
1d
etc
in WDM system
OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU
Technology
OTC81
Lecture

0.5d

U2000
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description &
Application
2d
OTC116
Lecture

OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration
OTC117
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
2.5d
OptiX OSN 9800 Commissioning
OTC118
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
1.5d
OptiX OSN 9800 System Troubleshooting
OTC119
Lecture, Lab
transmission
1d
modulation method
Target Audience
detection
engineer
Prerequisites
OSN 9800
WDM products
 Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack
Objectives
boards
356
 List different usage of the common OptiX OSN
 Replace the boards
9800 network node Types.
 Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application
 List the items of routine maintenance.
modes and main features.
 List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking
U2000
 Explain the principles of various protection
types applied in the OSN 9800 products
on NMS side
 Review NG WDM network node signal flow
 List the common indices on optical power
 Perform the operations related to the OSN
calculation
9800 product protection
 Calculate the optical power
 Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk
 Perform the Optical Power Commissioning
subnet connection protection (SNCP)
 List the Optical Power Commissioning
 Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by
Procedures
iManager U2000
 Perform the Optical Power Commissioning for
 Backup database by iManager U2000
100Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s and Hybrid Transmission
 Describe the FOADM and ROADM features
System
 Describe the FOADM and ROADM application
 Understand the Operations Related to Tests
scope
Performing
 Understand the FOADM and ROADM
 Describe the basic thoughts and methods of
functional units and the matching relations of
fault
these functional units
 Locating Comprehend the methods of rectifying
 Configure optical layer services by U2000
different types of faults
 Diagram the electrical layer service grooming
 List the common methods for trouble shooting
model of OptiX OSN 9800
 Analyze common faults independently.
 List the boards which have electrical layer
cross-connect function
 Handle typical faults
Duration
 Configure electrical layer services
10 working days
independently by station
 Configure end-to-end electrical layer services
Class Size
independently by trail
Min 6, Max 12
 Outline the equipment operation precautions
357
6.7.14 OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training
Training Path
 Perform the operations related to the OSN
9800 product protection
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description #
Application Overview
1d
OTC120
Lecture
 Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk
subnet connection protection (SNCP)
 Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by
iManager U2000
 Backup database by iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration
Overview
2d
OTC121
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Describe the FOADM and ROADM features
 Describe the FOADM and ROADM application
scope
Target Audience
 Understand the FOADM and ROADM
functional units and the matching relations of
engineer
these functional units
Prerequisites
 Configure optical layer services by U2000
 Diagram the electrical layer service grooming
model of OptiX OSN 9800
WDM products
 List the boards which have electrical layer
cross-connect function
Objectives
 Configure electrical layer services
independently by station
be able to:
 Configure end-to-end electrical layer services
independently by trail
OSN 9800
 Outline the equipment operation precautions
 Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack
 Replace the boards
 List the items of routine maintenance.
boards
 List different usage of the common OptiX OSN
U2000
9800 network node Types.
 Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application
on NMS side
modes and main features.
 List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking
Duration
 Explain the principles of various protection
types applied in the OSN 9800 products
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
358
6.7.15 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Field Deployment Training
Training Path
network elements of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
systems
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Hardware
Description ＆ Application
OTC54
Lecture
OSN 3800A/6800A systems
1d
mounted boards, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Equipment
Commissioning
OTC56
Lecture, Lab
1d
procedure for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
equipment
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A field deployment
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A equipment
engineer
Prerequisites
channel
OSN 3800A/6800A equipment
Objectives
be able to:
Duration
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A systems
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
359
6.7.16 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OTC54
Lecture
 Describe the status of OptiX OSN
3800A/6800A products alarm indicators
1d
OSN 3800A/6800A products
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Field
Maintenance
OTC57
Lecture, Lab
1d
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products, such as
Target Audience
board replacement, fiber connection, optical
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A field maintenance
power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites
 Outline the common menus of iManager U2000
Objectives
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products via
iManager U2000
be able to:
 Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
3800A/6800A products via iManager U2000
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
systems
360
6.7.17 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
different components' function
OTC54
Lecture
1d
 Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A system
signal flow and fiber connection, which include
OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Products
Configuration
OTC55
Lecture, Lab
3d
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A System
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
OTC58
Lecture, Lab
1d
OptiX OSN3800A/6800A data configuration
and system management
Target Audience
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
through iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A operation and
equipment
Prerequisites
validity
Objectives
for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
 Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN
3800A/6800A troubleshooting
be able to:
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
Duration
systems
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
361
6.7.18 OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path
 Implement the equipment hardware
configuration
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and
Maintenance
OTC59
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS
1600S system
2d
 Implement data configuration, optical power
adjustment, protection configuration and
network expansion through iManager U2000
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)
OTC60
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
3d
equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX SLM 1630/RPT 1660 Operation and
Maintenance
1d
OTC61
Lecture, Lab
troubleshooting methods, such as optical
power testing, alarm and performance events
analysis, replacement, etc
Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance
 Describe the structure, functions and features
engineer
of OptiX NPE equipment
Prerequisites
 Explain the functions and specifications of
different boards
Objectives
 Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE
equipment
 Describe the network topologies, system
be able to:
applications and network protection
 Explain the functions, characteristics of optical
mechanisms
components and the key technologies of WDM
 Implement the service configuration, alarm and
sub-marine system
performance monitoring through iManager
 Describe the characteristics of optical
U2000
interfaces in WDM sub-marine system
 State the service application and protection
mechanism
of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
 Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
 Describe the functions and specifications of
configurations and network expansion through
different boards
iManager U2000
 Execute the on-site operation, such as board
replacement, board or equipment resetting and
mechanisms
fiber connection
 Perform iManager U2000 operation and
maintenance, such as alarms and performance
browsing, parameters setting, database
restoration/back-up, security/user management,
browsing, parameters setting, etc
etc
362
configuration
 Implement data configuration through
replacement, etc
iManager U2000
of OptiX SLM/RPT equipment
different boards
Duration
5 working days
mechanisms
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
363
6.7.19 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path
 Implement data configuration, optical power
adjustment, protection configuration and
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and
Maintenance
OTC59
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
network expansion through iManager U2000
 List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
2d
equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)
OTC60
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
troubleshooting methods, such as optical
3d
power testing, alarm and performance events
analysis, replacement, etc
Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites
of OptiX NPE equipment
 Explain the functions and specifications of
different boards
Objectives
 Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE
equipment
be able to:
 Explain the functions, characteristics of optical
components and the key technologies of WDM
mechanisms
sub-marine system
 Implement the service configuration, alarm and
 Describe the characteristics of optical
performance monitoring through iManager
interfaces in WDM sub-marine system
U2000
 State the service application and protection
of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
mechanism
 Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
different boards
configurations and network expansion through
iManager U2000
 Execute the on-site operation, such as board
mechanisms
replacement, board or equipment resetting and
fiber connection
browsing, parameters setting, database
restoration/back-up, security/user management,
etc
configuration
 Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS
replacement, etc
1600S system
364
Class Size
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
5 working days
365
6.7.20 OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training
Training Path
menus of OptiX iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
 Implement OptiX iManager T2000 basic
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description
＆ Application
1.5d
OTC07
Lecture
operations, WDM data configuration and
system management
 Configure OptiX WDM products through OptiX
iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
OptiX WDM Products Configuration
OTC08
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
equipment
2.5d
validity
 Check the equipment running conditions, such
OTC10
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
2d
mounted boards, etc
 Outline the commissioning process for OptiX
BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic Operation
OTD01
Lecture, Lab
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment
1d
Target Audience
channel
BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G commissioning engineer
Prerequisites
 Eliminate the fault during the commissioning
network
process
Be familiar with Windows operating system?
T2000V2
Objectives
 Describe the directory structure of T2000V2
 List the main functions of T2000V2
be able to:
 Perform the basic operations of T2000, such as
start/stop T2000 server and client, backup
database, browsing alarms and performance,
BWS 1600G equipment
browsing help, etc
Duration
network elements of OptiX BWS 1600G system
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600G system
366
6.7.21 OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
BWS 1600G system
OptiX BWS 1600G System Description
OTC06
Lecture
 Describe the status of OptiX WDM products
alarm indicators
1d
WDM products
OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance
OTC11
Lecture, Lab
WDM products
1d
OptiX WDM products, such as board
Target Audience
replacement, fiber connection, optical power
adjusting, etc
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment field maintenance
engineer
WDM products
Prerequisites
T2000-LCT
Objectives
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager
T2000-LCT
be able to:
 Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX
 Describe the position of OptiX BWS 1600G
system in an optical transport network
WDM products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT
Duration
 Describe the functions of OptiX BWS 1600G
2 working days
system
Class Size
BWS 1600G system, which includes OTU,
Min 6, Max 12
MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC, etc
367
6.7.22 OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training
Training Path
& Application
1.5d
OTC07
Lecture
BWS 1600G system
OTC08
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
2.5d
system management
OTD01
Lecture, Lab
1d
equipment
Target Audience
validity
OptiX BWS 1600G network operation center
T2000V2
engineer
Prerequisites
Objectives
be able to:
browsing help, etc
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600G equipment
368
6.7.23 OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
WDM Basics
OTC01
Lecture
1d
etc
in WDM system
& Application
1.5d
OTC07
Lecture
BWS 1600G equipment
OTC08
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
2.5d
OTC10
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
BWS 1600G system
2d
OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance
system management
OTC11
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
1d
OptiX WDM System Troubleshooting
equipment
OTC12
Lecture, Lab
2d
validity
Target Audience
 Describe the status of OptiX WDM products
alarm indicators
OptiX BWS 1600G operation and maintenance
engineer
WDM products
Prerequisites
WDM products
WDM products
OptiX WDM products, such as board
Objectives
replacement, fiber connection, optical power
adjusting, etc
be able to:
WDM products
T2000-LCT
369
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager
process
T2000-LCT
 Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX
for OptiX WDM products
WDM products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT
 Illustrate basic operation for OptiX WDM
troubleshooting
mounted boards, etc
OptiX WDM products
BWS 1600G equipment
Duration
10 working days
channel
Class Size
BWS 1600G equipment
Min 6, Max 12
370
6.7.24 OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
BWS 1600G equipment
WDM Optical Power Management Topic
OTC02
Lecture, Lab
2d
BWS 1600G system
OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
mounted boards, etc
1d
BWS 1600G equipment
& Application
1.5d
OTC07
Lecture
channel
OTC10
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
BWS 1600G equipment
2d
process
OptiX WDM Testing
OTC27
Lecture, Lab
 Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power
0.5d
calculation
 Outline OptiX WDM system testing overview,
which includes complied standards, system
OptiX WDM System Advanced
Troubleshooting
OTC35
Lecture, Lab
reference points and test instruments
 Outline OptiX WDM system common testing
3d
indices
Target Audience
 Implement the main path indices testing, which
include OTU/MUX/DEMUX/OA units testing
OptiX BWS 1600G senior operation and
 Implement the supervisory channel indices
testing
Prerequisites
 Perform orderwire telephone testing, bit error
Completion of OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line
testing etc
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training
Objectives
be able to:
 Illustrate the function of IPA
 Describe ALC technology used in WDM system
371
 Describe the functions and features of APE
 Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
technology
WDM network
 Apply different troubleshooting methods
according to actual faults
 Perform the common troubleshooting
Duration
operations of WDM netwok
10 working days
 Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of
OptiX WDM network defaults
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
372
6.7.25 OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training
Training Path
 Outline the optical commissioning procedure by
MDS 6630
OptiX MDS 6630(Optical Power
Commissioning)
OTC123
Lecture, Lab
 Perform the basic operations of MDS 6630
 Describe the Attention Matters for
2d
Commissioning
Target Audience
 Master the common methods for
troubleshooting
OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer
 Analyze and handle the common
Prerequisites
commissioning faults
Duration
WDM products
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the main functions of MDS 6630
373
6.7.26 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the bacis concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
and QinQ
OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology
Introduction
OTC85
Lecture
0.5d
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,
Networking & Application Introduction
OTC86
Lecture

 Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
1d
 List the OSN 8800 packet boards
 Describe the networking application of OSN
8800 (Packet)
Configuration
OTC87
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Illustrate the service and protection type of
2d
OSN 8800 (Packet)

 Implement the data configuration through
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Features
iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service
OTC88
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
1.5d
and protection
 Describe the function and features of QoS in
OSN 8800 (Packet)
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Routine
Maintenance
OTC89
Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
 Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000
1d
 Describe the function and features of OAM in
OSN 8800 (Packet)
 Implement the OAM configuration through
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) System
Troubleshooting
OTC90
Lecture, Lab
iManager U2000
1d
 Implement the NMS side routine maintenance
for OSN 8800 (Packet)
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 8800 packet network operation and
Prerequisites
Having working experience in WDM transmission
network
Upon completion of OptiX OSN
 Analyze common faulty of the OSN 8800
3800/6800/8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance
(Packet) network
Training or having equivalent knowledge
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
374
6.8 RTN 900 Products Training Programs
6.8.1
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid)
Training Path
Objectives
OptiX RTN 900 System Description
be able to:
OTF47
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe the relation among the different parts
of OptiX RTN 900
 Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application
OTF32
Lecture
of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
 Implement the outdoor and indoor components
0.5d
installation of OptiX RTN 900
 Describe the installation criterions for each part
OptiX RTN 900 Installation
OTF18
Lecture
of OptiX RTN 900
 Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
1d
900
 Describe the system structure, functions and
application of every unit
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning
 Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
OTF38
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
microwave
 Describe the networking application under
PDH/SDH, hybrid microwave and packet
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid
Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab
microwave modes
 List out the protection technologies in OptiX
RTN 900 network
 Describe the features and applications of the
Target Audience
protection technologies
 Finish proper preparations before the
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and
commissioning engineer
commissioning
 Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN
Prerequisites
900
 Having basic experience of
 Perform system commissioning of the OptiX
telecommunications equipment installation
RTN 900
criterion
 Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
 Having working experience in the optical
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
transport network and microwave products
 Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
 Be familiar with Windows operating system
900
 Having equivalent knowledge of digital
microwave communication basics
Duration
5 working days
375
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
376
6.8.2
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Packet)
Training Path
of OpitX RTN 900
OTF47
Lecture
0.5d
of OptiX RTN 900
OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
900
OTF18
Lecture
microwave
1d
PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
OTF38
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
RTN 900 network
1d
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Packet
Domain)
2d
OTF29
Lab, E-lab
commissioning
900
RTN 900
Target Audience
 Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
 Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
configuration in packet plane
Prerequisites
 Implement Ethernet service / CES service /
Having basic experience of telecommunications
ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
equipment installation criterion
plane via NMS
 Describe the parameters' meaning in service
configuration of packet plane
network and microwave products
Duration
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave
communication basics
5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
377
6.8.3
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid+Packet)
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OTF47
Lecture
0.5d
of OpitX RTN 900
OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
of OptiX RTN 900
OTF18
Lecture
1d
900
OTF38
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
microwave
Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab
RTN 900 network
Domain)
2d
OTF29
Lab, E-lab
commissioning
900
Target Audience
RTN 900
Prerequisites
900
plane via NMS
378
Duration
Class Size
7 working days
Min 6, Max 12
379
6.8.4
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OTF47
Lecture
0.5d
900
OptiX RTN 900 Field Operation &
Maintenance
OTF33
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
microwave
 Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX
RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 NE Database Topic
OTF34
Lab, E-lab
0.5d
RTN 900
 Implement the maintenance operations of
OptiX RTN 900
Target Audience
 Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 series field maintenance engineer
 Describe the functions of CF card
Prerequisites
 Routing maintenance of NE database
Be familiar with Windows operating system.
Having the general knowledge of Microwave
 Backup NE database
Duration
basics
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and
QinQ
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
380
6.8.5
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
Training Path
 Describe the concept and characters of digital
microwave communication
Digital Microwave Communication Basics
OTF01
Lecture
 Describe the theory and function of every part
in the digital microwave system
0.5d
 List the networking application for digital
microwave system
 List the fadings in microwave propagation
OTF47
Lecture
 List the common technologies of antifading
0.5d
900
OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
microwave
Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting
 Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OTF35
Lecture
1.5d
OptiX RTN 900
 Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
Target Audience
 Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
OptiX RTN series operation and maintenance
RTN 900
engineer
Prerequisites
900
Microwave products
Duration
5 working days
QinQ
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
381
6.8.6
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Packet)
Training Path
OTF01
Lecture
microwave system
0.5d
OTF47
Lecture
900
0.5d
OTF32
Lecture
microwave
0.5d
Domain)
2d
OTF29
Lab, E-lab
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900
OTF35
Lecture
1.5d
locating
RTN 900
Target Audience
engineer
Prerequisites
Microwave products
plane via NMS
QinQ
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
382
6.8.7
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet)
Training Path
be able to:
OTF01
Lecture
0.5d
OTF47
Lecture
microwave system
0.5d
OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
plane via NMS
Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab
900
Domain)
2d
OTF29
Lab, E-lab
microwave
OTF35
Lecture
1.5d
RTN 900 network
Target Audience
engineer
OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites
locating
Microwave products
RTN 900
QinQ
900
Objectives
383
Duration
Class Size
7 working days
Min 6, Max 12
384
6.8.8
OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
testing
Hybrid Services Testing
OTF23
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
performance testing
 Explain the concept of common testing indices
1.5d
performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 QoS & OAM Technology
OTF36
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 Outline the basic concept of QoS and
ETH-OAM
1.5d
 Describe the working principles of QoS
 Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Clock & DCN Topic
OTF31
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 List the planning principles of QoS
 Describe the configuration flow of QoS
1.5d
 Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
 Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900 System Control Unit and IF
Feature Topic
1d
OTF30
Lecture
 Configure clock protection
 Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
 Check clock status in RTN 900 network
 Manage and configure ECC link
OTF35
Lecture
 Configure extended ECC
 Enable/disable ECC link
1.5d
 Configure IP over DCC, inband DCC
 Configure DCC transparent transmission
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN series senior operation and
locating
Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line
RTN 900
 Describe system architecture and functions of
Objectives
the SCC unit
 Outline the new features supported by OptiX
RTN 900
be able to:
 Describe the function and application of the
new features
 Know the technical background of the Ethernet
and its basic concepts
Duration
 Draw the Ethernet frame structure
7 working days
Class Size
switching
Min 6, Max 12
385
6.8.9
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
 List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and
antenna
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Hardware &
Network Application
OTF17
Lecture
 Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900
 Explain the functions of AM and Hybrid
1d
Microwave
OTF18
Lecture
1d
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Commissioning
 Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900
OTF19
Lecture, Lab
1d
Ethernet services
of OpitX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Data
Configuration
OTF21
Lecture, Lab
2d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 series installation and
of OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites
commissioning
900
RTN 900
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
910950
Objectives
910950
be able to:
Duration
900
5 working days
Class Size
 Describe the system structure, software and
Min 6, Max 12
hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900
 List the types and features of the IDU
 List the functions of boards in the IDU
386
6.8.10 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
application of every units
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 System
Description
OTF45
Lecture
 List all the protection modes which supported
by OptiX RTN 900
0.5d
 Configure the OptiX RTN 900 equipment for all
types of the network application
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Field
Maintenance
OTF20
Lecture, Lab
Microwave
1.5d
 Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX
RTN 900
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series field maintenance
RTN 900
engineer
 Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
Prerequisites
RTN 900
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
900
387
6.8.11 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OTF01
Lecture
900
0.5d
 Describe the system structure, software and
hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900
Network Application
OTF17
Lecture
 List the functions of boards in the IDU
1d
 List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and
antenna
Configuration
OTF21
Lecture, Lab
2d
Microwave
Configuration (Scenarized For Second
Line)
0.5d
OTF44
Lecture, Lab
RTN 900 network
 Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900
Troubleshooting
OTF22
Lecture, Lab
Ethernet services
1d
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
Target Audience
910950
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series operation and
910950
Prerequisites
OptiX RTN 900
Microwave products
locating
RTN 900
Objectives
 Configure TDM services in mixed networking
 Apply the tag attributes in different scenario
be able to:
 Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN
Services
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
microwave system
Min 6, Max 12
388
6.8.12 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
testing
Hybrid Services Testing
OTF23
Lecture, Lab
performance testing
 Explain the concept of common testing indices
1.5d
performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 QOS & OAM
Technology
1.5d
OTF24
Lecture, Lab
 Outline the basic concepts of QoS and
ETH-OAM
 Describe the working principles of QoS
 Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Clock & DCN
Processing
1d
OTF25
Lecture, Lab
 List the planning principles of QoS
 Describe the configuration flow of QoS
 Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
 Manage and configure ECC link
Troubleshooting Case Study
OTF26
Lecture, Lab
 Configure extended ECC
1d
 Enable/disable ECC link
 Configure IP over DCC
Target Audience
 Configure DCC transparent transmission
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series senior operation
 Configure clock tracing
and maintenance engineer
 Configure clock protection
Prerequisites
 Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
 Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line
 Read the actual faulty cases of OptiX RTN 900
 Analyze the causes of fault that occurs in
Objectives
actual network
 Improve the competency of troubleshooting
be able to:
 Practice the troubleshooting skills in the lab
Duration
 Know the technical background of the Ethernet
5 working days
and its basic concepts
 Draw the Ethernet frame structure
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
switching
389
6.8.13 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Field Operation
＆ Maintenance
1d
OTF14
Lecture, Lab
RTN 900
Network Application
OTF42
Lecture
RTN 900
1d
RTN 900
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series field maintenance
RTN 900
engineer
Prerequisites
900 include the AM function
 Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN
Having the general knowledge of Microwave
900
basics
 List the functions and features of the boards in
IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna
QinQ
Objectives
 Describe the classification of the services in the
OptiX RTN 900 network
be able to:
 Describe the networking application of OptiX
RTN 900
RTN 900 network
900
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
RTN 900
390
6.8.14 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Implement data configuration and maintenance
operations for OptiX RTN 900 series through
Ethernet Basics
OTA03
iManager T2000 (Web LCT)
Lecture
 List out the contents, meaning and operation
2d
methods of all the OptiX RTN 900 series
maintenance items
 Complete data configuration and daily
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation &
Maintenance
OTF15
Lecture, Lab
maintenance for OptiX RTN 900 series
7d
 Explain reasons of OptiX RTN 900 series
common faults and outline the common
methods for troubleshooting
Network Application
OTF42
Lecture
 Analyze the common faults of OptiX RTN 900
1d
series and perform the troubleshooting
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series operation and
900
Prerequisites
Microwave products
QinQ
RTN 900
Objectives
RTN 900 network
be able to:
 Describe the basic principle of IP routing
 Describe the MPLS tunnel (LSP) creation
900
procedure
 Outline the MPLS OAM functions
for TDM, Ethernet and ATM services
 Outline the PWE3 application scenarios of
OptiX RTN 900
RTN 900
 Complete iManager T2000 ( Web LCT)
software installation
RTN 900 network
 Apply all menus in iManager T2000 (Web LCT)
391
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
10 working days
392
6.9 RTN 300 Products Training Programs
6.9.1
Training Path
 Be familiar with windows operating system
Objectives
OTF80
Lecture
0.5d
be able to:
300
OptiX RTN 300 Feature Description
OTF81
Lecture
0.5d
of OpitX RTN 300
OTF82
Lecture
 Describe the features and application of OptiX
RTN 300
0.5d
of antenna, RTN 300 and PI
 Implement the installation of OptiX RTN 300
OTF83
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
of OptiX RTN 300
commissioning
OptiX RTN 300 Data Configuration
OTF84
Lab, E-lab
1.5d
300
RTN 300
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 300 installation and commissioning
engineer
 Configure services of the OptiX RTN 300
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
criterion
393
6.9.2
Training Path
300
OTF80
Lecture
0.5d
of OpitX RTN 300
OptiX RTN 300 Field Operations &
Maintenance
OTF85
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
RTN 300
1.5d
RTN 300
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 300 field maintenance engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having a general knowledge of microwave basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
394
6.9.3
OptiX RTN 300 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OTF80
Lecture
0.5d
300
OptiX RTN 300 Feature Description
OTF81
Lecture
0.5d
of OpitX RTN 300
 Describe the features and application of OptiX
OptiX RTN 300 Data Configuration
OTF84
Lab, E-lab
RTN 300
1.5d
of antenna, RTN 300 and PI
 Configure services of the OptiX RTN 300
OptiX RTN 300 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
OTF86
Lecture
 Implement the routine maintenance via NMS
0.5d
OptiX RTN 300
Target Audience
locating
OptiX RTN 300 operation and maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites
RTN 300
Duration
Microwave products
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
395
6.10
RTN 600 Products Training Programs
6.10.1 OptiX RTN 600 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 600 Hardware and Network
Application
OTF02
Lecture
1d
of OptiX RTN 600
OTF07
Lecture, WBT
600
 Describe the system structure and software
0.5h
and hardware structure of OptiX RTN 600
 List the functions of boards in the IDU, ODU,
Hybrid coupler and antenna
OTF08
Lecture, Lab
1d
Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance
OTF03
Lecture, Lab
 List the common network types of OptiX RTN
600
2.5d
Target Audience
RTN 600
 List the network and equipment protection
schemes supported by the OptiX RTN 600
 Describe the configuration requirements of all
Prerequisites
types of protection mode in OptiX RTN 600
 Describe the functions of the T2000 and the
T2000 Web LCT
criterion
 Install the T2000 Web LCT
 Having working experience in the optical
 Configure services and protection by using the
transport network and microwave products
T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
 Be familiar with Windows operating system
RTN 600
Objectives
RTN 600
be able to:
commissioning
 Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX
of OpitX RTN 600
RTN 600
 Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX
396
RTN 600
RTN 600
Duration
commissioning
5 working days
 Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX
RTN 600
Class Size
 Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX
No limit
397
6.10.2 OptiX RTN 600 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Application
OTF02
Lecture
Microwave
1d
600
OptiX RTN 600 Field Maintenance
OTF05
Lecture, Lab
RTN 600
1d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 600 series field maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
RTN 600
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics
Objectives
RTN 600
be able to:
Duration
2 working days
600
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
398
6.10.3 OptiX RTN 600 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
600
OTF01
Lecture
0.5d
Application
OTF02
Lecture
1d
Microwave
600
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance
OTF03
Lecture, Lab
2.5d
RTN 600
OTF06
Lecture, Case
1d
 Describe the functions of the T2000 and the
Target Audience
T2000 Web LCT
OptiX RTN 600 series operation and maintenance
 Install the T2000 Web LCT
engineer
 Configure services and protection by using the
T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
Prerequisites
RTN 600
Microwave products
RTN 600
Objectives
locating
be able to:
 Outline the Fault Handling Flow
error bit, etc
Duration
microwave system
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
399
400
401
6.11
Transmission Network OSS Training Training Programs
6.11.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)
Training Path
Transmission Network Device Introduction
ONU07
Lecture
alarm
1d
common alarm events
Target Audience
U2000 operator and maintainer
performance events
 Explain the networking and application of
Prerequisites
Huawei Transmission network equipment;
 Having the basic knowledge of network
 Describe the functions of Huawei network
management
products;
 Having the basic principle and equipment
 Describe the capacity and features of Huawei
knowledge of Transmission network
network products;
Objectives
 Locate the alarm in the network.
Duration
be able to:
2 working days
U2000
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
402
6.11.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training
Training Path
 List the main menus of iManager U2000 LCT
 Perform the NE configuration, service
iManager U2000 LCT Operation
ONU12
Lecture, Lab
configuration for NG SDH equipment via
U2000 LCT
1d
Target Audience
LCT

U2000 LCT user
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Having the basic knowledge of Windows OS
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
403
6.11.3 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic command of Solaris and
Sybase
U2100 System Operation and
Maintenance
OTD08
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the system structure, management
capacity and menus of iManager U2100
5d
 Browse the SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail
Target Audience
and their alarm through iManager U2100
 Create and delete SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid
U2100 adminstrator and operator
MSTP trail through iManager U2100
Prerequisites
 Check the running status of U2100 and perform
Be familiar with Windows operating system and
the routine maintenance
SQL Server
 Perform the U2100 troubleshooting, deal the
Having the knowledge of Solaris and Sybase
basics
NMS and network problems with U2000
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 List the features and basics of Solaris and
Sybase
404
6.11.4 OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training
Training Path
T2000V2
Transmission Network Device Introduction
ONU07
Lecture
1d
OTD01
Lecture, Lab
browsing help, etc
1d
Huawei Transmission network equipment;
Target Audience
T2000 operator and maintainer
products;
Transmission network routine monitor and
maintainer
network products;
Prerequisites
 Locate the alarm in the network.
Duration
optical transport network
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
405
6.11.5 OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training
Training Path
 Complete the operation of NE and NMS
security management
OptiX iManager Security ＆ Database
Management
1d
OTD02
Lecture, Lab
 Explain the concept of data management
 Complete the operation of NE and NMS data
management
 List T2000 routine maintenance items
OptiX iManager T2000 Routine
Maintenance ＆ Troubleshooting
OTD03
Lecture, Lab
 Perform operations of routine maintenance
 Complete routine maintenance for T2000 and
1d
network
Target Audience
localization
T2000 operator and maintainer
 Locate T2000 NMS faults
Prerequisites
 Get the experience for T2000 troubleshooting
 Analyze and handle the typical faults
Be familiar with Windows operating system and
SQL Server
Duration
Upon completion of OTD00 Solaris ＆ Sybase
2 working days
Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Explain the concept of security management
406
6.11.6 OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training
Training Path
Concepts
 Describe Veritas Volume Management and
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby
System Operation ＆ Maintenance
OTD06
Lecture, Lab
Replication Principle
 Describe Veritas Cluster Management Working
4d
Principle
Target Audience
 Perform Veritas hot backup system basic
operations
T2000 Veritas system administrator
 Execute Veritas hot backup system routine
Prerequisites
maintenance
Upon completion of
Solaris ＆ Sybase Basics
 Perform Veritas hot backup system
course or having equivalent knowledge
troubleshooting
Objectives
 Outline Veritas Hot Backup System Installation
Preparations
 Describe Veritas Hot Backup System
be able to:
Installation Procedure
 Outline the main features of Solaris
 List Veritas Hot Backup System Installation
 Perform some basic operation of SUN
Checking Items
workstation
 Describe some basic commands of Solaris
Duration
 Outline the main features of Sybase
 Start, shutdown, backup and restore Sybase
4 working days
Class Size
database
Min 2, Max 6
 Describe some basic SQL language
 Outline Veritas Hot Backup System Basic
407
6.11.7 OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training
Training Path
T2000V2R7
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta
OTD07
Lecture, Lab
 List the new features of T2000V2R7
2d
 Describe the realization method of the new
Target Audience
features
 Perform the operation of the new features
T2000 administrator and maintainer
 Describe the concepts and architecture of
Prerequisites
T2000V2R7 distributing management system
Be familiar with OptiX iManager T2000 before
 List the functions of T2000V2R7 distributing
V2R7 version
management system
Objectives
 Add instance in distributing management
system
 Perform the routine maintenance
be able to:
Duration
T2000V2
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
408
6.12
Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Training
Programs
6.12.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training
Training Path
 Describe the structure of SDH network
 Outline the service types of SDH network
OptiX SDH Network Design Basics
OTA13
Lecture, Lab
 Illustrate the common protection mechanism of
SDH network
1d
 List the procedures of SDH network design
 Describe the basic factors that should be
Description
OTA28
Lecture
involved in the SDH network design
 Accomplish the SDH/PDH service design
1d
Target Audience
SDH network junior planning ＆ design engineer
Prerequisites
 Having the basic knowledge of
Duration
telecommunications and SDH network
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
409
6.12.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path
service demand
 List the procedures of SDH network design
OTA44
Lecture, Case
 Outline network protection types
 Describe the key point of complicated network
3d
design
Target Audience
 Figure out the details of network reliability
design
SDH network planning ＆ design engineer
 Perform SDH network design including the
Prerequisites
network reliabilty and clock trace design
Having the basic knowledge of
 List the factors of data service design
telecommunications and MSTP network
 Describe the key point of the data service
planning according to the bandwidth
design of MSTP networks
requirement
Objectives
 Perform data service design in the SDH
network
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH ＆
OCS system
3 working days
Class Size
 Outline the equipment capacity of OptiX NG
Min 6, Max 12
SDH ＆ OCS system
 Choose the right equipment according to the
410
6.12.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path
system
 Outline the equipment capacity for packet
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design
OTA47
Lecture, Case
service access of OptiX NG SDH system
 Outline the common boards for packet service
3d
of OptiX NG SDH equipment
Target Audience
service demand
Hybrid MSTP network planning ＆ design
 Consider all the required main points for
engineer
planning a Hybrid MSTP network
Prerequisites
 List the procedure for designing the Hybrid
MSTP network
telecommunications and Hybrid MSTP network
 Perform the Hybrid MSTP network design
Duration
design of Hybrid MSTP networks
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH
411
6.12.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
 List the configuration of iManager MDS 6600
 Describe the characters of iManager MDS
iManager MDS 6600 ASON (SDH)
Netowrk Design
OTA33
Lecture, Case
6600
 Perform SDH ASON network design through
4d
iManager MDS 6600
Target Audience
 Describe the considerations of ASON planning
OptiX SDH ASON senior network planning ＆
 List the steps of ASON planning
design engineer
 Describe the function of ASON planning tool
 Accomplish SDH ASON network design
Prerequisites
 Perform data import/export operation between
telecommunications and SDH network
iManager MDS 6600 and NMS
Having a general knowledge of ASON
 Verify the import/export operation
Duration
design of SDH networks
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the structure of iManager MDS 6600
412
6.12.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design
Basics
OTC47
Lecture
etc
2d
in WDM system
Target Audience
different units in OptiX WDM/NG WDM
WDM network junior planning
products
design engineer
 Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
Prerequisites
network planning, such as power budget,
Having a general understanding of
dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation
telecommunications
and nonlinearity
 Outline the design process of WDM network
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
413
6.12.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training
Training Path
different units in OptiX WDM products
 Evaluate the WDM networks including the
OTC03
Lecture, Case
network architecture, protection mechanism,
signal flow and network capacity
3d
 Analyze typical configuration of OptiX WDM
Target Audience
series products
WDM network planning
 Analyze the design process of WDM network
design engineer
 Design a complete OptiX WDM network
according to requirements
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
414
6.12.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training
Training Path
capacity and features
 Describe WDM network topologies and system
OTC31
Lecture, Case
applications
 Outline the designing procedure of WDM
3d
network
Target Audience
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX NG
WDM
OptiX NG WDM network planning ＆ design
 Memorize the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
engineer
system capacity with different traffics
Prerequisites
 Apply the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 system
functions and configuration principles in
design of WDM products
network planning
 Describe the designing procedure of NG WDM
Network Design Basic Training or having
FOADM network
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of NG WDM
Objectives
FOADM network
Duration
be able to:
 Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
3 working days
Class Size
networking
Min 6, Max 12
 Outline OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
functions
 Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
415
6.12.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
 Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
steps
OptiX NG WDM ASON Network Planning
＆ Design
2d
OTC36
Lecture, Case
 Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
 Understand the special topics of NG WDM
ASON network planning and design
 Understand NG WDM ASON network features
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner
Operation
OTC74
Lecture, Lab
 Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
1d
steps
 Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Operation
OTC75
Lecture, Lab
 Describe features and functions of the
1d
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner
 Plan WDM network
Target Audience
 Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Planner operation
OptiX NG WDM ASON senior network planning ＆
 Implement the WDM network plan by the MDS
design engineer
6600 WDM Planner
Prerequisites
 Outline system architecture of iManager MDS
6600
 Describe features and functions of the
design of WDM products
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
 Complete WDM network design
 Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Designer operation
 Implement the WDM network design by the
Objectives
MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Duration
be able to:
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe NG WDM ASON network features
416
6.12.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OTF01
Lecture
0.5d
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic
OTF40
Lecture
1.5d
microwave system
Target Audience
Microwave network junior planning engineer
 Familiar with the microwave network design
Prerequisites
contents
Having a general knowledge of Digital Microwave
 Know the basic information about microwave
Communication
planning
Duration
QinQ
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet and
QoS
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
417
6.12.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)
Training Path
contents
OTF49
Lecture
in the digital microwave system for details
 Know the microwave planning principles
1.5d
 Familiar the interference analysis methods
 Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service,
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning
(Packet)
OTF60
Lecture
CES service, ATM/IMA service and MPLS
tunnel planning
0.5d
 Know how to select the proper equipment type
and functions for different scenarios
 Implement network design according to the
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning
OTF51
Lecture
guideline to ensure the high and efficient
packet service delivery
1d
 Familiar with the working mechanism of clock &
Target Audience
DCN
 Know how to select the proper clock & DCN
Microwave network planning engineer
mode for different scenarios
Prerequisites
 Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
guidelines
Communication
 Implement clock & DCN design according to
the guideline to ensure the high and efficient
QinQ
planning delivery
Duration
QoS
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
418
6.12.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid)
Training Path
contents
OTF49
Lecture
1.5d
 Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service
(Hybrid)
OTF59
Lecture
and TDM service planning
0.5d
guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid
OTF51
Lecture
service delivery
1d
DCN
Target Audience
Prerequisites
guidelines
Communication
planning delivery
TDM
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
419
6.12.12 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid)
Training Path
OTF49
Lecture
 Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service
and TDM service planning
1.5d
(Hybrid)
OTF59
Lecture
guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid
0.5d
service delivery
(Packet)
OTF60
Lecture
tunnel planning
0.5d
OTF51
Lecture
1d
DCN
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case
Analysis
OTF61
Lecture
0.5d
guidelines
Target Audience
Prerequisites
planning delivery
Communication
tunnel planning
QinQ
QoS
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
4 working days
contents
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
420
6.12.13 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training
Training Path
DCN
OptiX RTN Network QoS Planning
OTF62
Lecture
0.5d
guidelines
planning delivery
OTF51
Lecture
1d
tunnel planning
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case
Analysis
OTF61
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
Microwave senior network planning engineer
Prerequisites
tunnel planning
Communication
QinQ
QoS
Duration
Be familiar with RTN product
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
421
6.12.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training
Training Path
products
 Evaluate the network resilience, which include
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Network
Planning ＆ Design
OTC53
Lecture, Case
network architecture, protection mechanisms,
signal flow, and network capacity
4d
 Outline the designing procedure of WDM
Target Audience
network
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of optical and
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A senior network
electrical layer grooming
planning ＆ design engineer
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX OSN
Prerequisites
3800A/6800A
Having working experience in planning and design
 Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
telecommunication networks
network planning, such as power budget,
dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation
Objectives
and nonlinearity
 Complete the exercises of WDM network
design
be able to:
Duration
 Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A access
4 working days
Class Size
capacity
Min 6, Max 12
 Identify wavelength distribution and service
process ability for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
422
6.12.15 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training
Training Path
capacity
 Identify wavelength distribution and service
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning
and Design
3d
OTC71
Lecture, Case
process ability for OptiX BWS 1600S products
 Evaluate the network resilience, which include
network architecture, protection mechanisms,
Target Audience
signal flow and network capacity
 Outline the designing procedure of OptiX BWS
OptiX BWS 1600S senior network planning ＆
1600S network
design engineer
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX BWS
Prerequisites
1600S products
 Complete the exercises of OptiX BWS 1600S
network design
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600S products
 Describe OptiX BWS 1600S system access
423
6.12.16 OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
service access of OptiX NG WDM system
 Outline the common boards for packet service
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning
and Design
3d
OTC110
Lecture, Case
of OptiX NG WDM equipment
service demand
Target Audience
 Consider all the required main points for
planning a OptiX NG WDM packet network
OptiX NG WDM packet network planning＆design
 List the procedure for designing the OptiX NG
engineer
WDM packet network
Prerequisites
 Perform the OptiX NG WDM packet network
design of NG WDM Packet Network
design
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the application of OptiX NG WDM
packet system
 Outline the equipment capacity for packet
424
6.13
Training Programs
6.13.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Training Path
 Describe the main contents about SDH service
capacity and efficiency assessment
SDH Network Assessment
OTA93
Lecture, Case
 Describe the items and contents about SDH
network security assessment
3d
 Describe the measures about SDH survivable
network assessment
Target Audience
 List the methods about trail usability
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or
assessment
senior maintenance engineer
network O＆M assessment
Prerequisites
 Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
 Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment
assessment
 Having working experience with at least 2
 Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
years in the maintenance of optical transport
assessment
network
 Describe the methods about spare part
Objectives
assessment
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
 List the main items of SDH network resource
 List the main items of SDH network
Class Size
assessment
Min 4, Max 8
 Describe the requirement of SDH network
resource assessment
425
6.13.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training
Training Path
SDH equipment
 Optimize the trails to improve the network
SDH Network Optimization
OTA94
Lecture, Case
usage efficiency
3d
network security optimization
Target Audience
 Describe the measures about SDH survivable
network optimization
 List the methods about trail usability
optimization
Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment
network O＆M optimization
Having working experience with at least 2 years in
 Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
the maintenance of optical transport network
optimization
Upon completion of OptiX SDH Network
 Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
Assessment Training
optimization
Objectives
 Describe the methods about spare part
optimization
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the causes and effects of discrete
services
3 working days
Class Size
 Recognize the discrete services of the network
Min 4, Max 8
 Eliminate discrete services
 Optimize the lower level cross-connection of
426
6.13.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training
Training Path
SDH Network Expansion ＆
Reconstruction
OTA43
Lecture, Lab
 List the key point of network expansion
 Interpret the operation of SDH network
expansion
 Perform SDH network expansion and verify the
3d
service interconnection
Target Audience
 Outline the scenario of SDH network
reconstruction
 List the key point of network reconstruction
 Interpret the operation of SDH network
Prerequisites
reconstruction
 Perform SDH network reconstruction and verify
SDH products
Having been attend SDH series 2nd Line
the service interconnection
Duration
maintenance training
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
be able to:
 Outline the scenario of SDH network expansion
427
6.13.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training
Training Path
 Describe methods of assessing WDM network
design performance
OptiX WDM Network Assessment
OTC72
Lecture, Case
 Analyze and assess WDM network design
performance
2d
 Provide suggestions on optimizing WDM
Target Audience
network design performance
 Describe methods of assessing running
OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or
performance of a WDM network
 Analyze and assess running performance of a
Prerequisites
WDM network
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
 Provide suggestions for optimizing running
Second Line Maintenance Training program or
OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance
Duration
Training program
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
be able to:
428
6.13.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe the procedure for designing a solution
OptiX WDM Network Optimization
OTC73
Lecture, Lab
to design performance optimization of a WDM
network
1d
 Complete the solution to the design
Target Audience
performance optimization of a WDM network
 Describe how to optimize operating
 Describe the process of optimizing operating
Prerequisites
 Design solutions to optimizing operating
Duration
Training program
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
be able to:
 Describe the method for optimizing design
429
6.13.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training
Training Path
Objectives
OptiX WDM Network Expansion
be able to:
OTC51
Lecture, Lab
2d
 Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power
calculation
Target Audience
 Outline the process of OptiX WDM network
expansion
 Implement the indices testing during network
Prerequisites
expansion
 Complete the OptiX WDM network service
expansion of OTM/OADM stations
Duration
Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second
Line Maintenance Training program
2 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
430
6.13.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training
Training Path
reconstruction methods, which include 2 5G
upgrading to 10G, 10G upgrading to 40G and
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction
OTC52
Lecture, Lab
400G upgrading to 800G
 Describe OptiX WDM equipment software
3d
upgrade methods
Target Audience
 Describe OptiX WDM netwok reconstruction
methods, which include the site type
reconstruction, the protection type
reconstruction and wavelength reconstruction
Prerequisites
 Complete the OptiX WDM network
reconstruction
Duration
3 working days
Training program
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
be able to:
 Describe OptiX WDM system upgrade ＆
431
6.14
Programs
6.14.1 OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training
Training Path
 Analyze and access microwave network
performance
Microwave Network Performance
Assessment
OTF63
Lecture
 Complete microwave network performance
assessment
0.5d
 Describe the methods about capacity
assessment
 Describe the methods about frequency
Microwave Network General Assessment
OTF64
Lecture
assessment
0.5d
 Describe the methods about reliability
assessment
 Describe the methods about NMS DCN
Microwave Network Assessment Case
Analysis
OTF65
Case Study
assessment
1d
assessment
 Complete microwave network capacity
Target Audience
assessment
OptiX RTN network optimization engineer or senior
 Complete microwave network frequency
assessment
Prerequisites
 Complete microwave network reliability
assessment
 Be familiar with OptiX RTN series equipment
 Complete microwave network NMS DCN
 Having working experience with at least 1
assessment
years in the maintenance of microwave
transport network
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 4, Max 12
 Describe methods of assessing microwave
network performance
432
6.14.2 OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training
Training Path
performance optimization of a RTN network
 Describe how to optimize the capacity of a RTN
Microwave Network Optimization
OTF66
Lecture
network
 Describe the methods about frequency
0.5d
optimization
 Describe the methods about topology
Microwave Network Optimization Case
Analysis
OTF67
Case Study
optimization
 Describe the methods about NMS DCN
0.5d
optimization
Target Audience
optimization
 Complete microwave network capacity
OptiX RTN network optimization engineer or senior
optimization
 Complete microwave network frequency
Prerequisites
optimization
Be familiar with OptiX RTN equipment
 Complete microwave network reliability
Having working experience with at least 2 years in
optimization
the maintenance of microwave transport network
 Complete microwave network NMS DCN
Upon completion of OptiX RTN Network
Assessment Training
optimization
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 4, Max 12
 Describe the microwave network optimization
procedure
 Complete the solution to the design
433
7 Access Network Training Courses
7.1 Access Network Training Path
7.1.1
Principle Training Path
Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/R
adius) Basis Training
IP Basis Training
1d
1d
IPTV(IGMP Proxy/
Snooping) Basis Training
VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis
Training
1d
1d
PON and SDH/MSTP/
PTN Product Interconnection
Training
1d
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
GPON Fundamental Training
GPON Fundamentals(WBT)
0.5d
1h
0.5d
434
7.1.2
Evolution and Trends Training Path
FTTx System Overview(WBT)
FTTx Network Overview
Training
1h
1d
FTTO Solution Overview
Training
FTTM Solution Overview
Training
0.5d
0.5d
xDSL Access Network
Overview Training
ODN Overview Training
0.5d
0.5d
Vectoring Overview Training
10G/40G PON Network
Overview Training
0.5h
0.5d
G.fast Overview Training
iODN Solution Overview
Training
0.5d
0.5d
FTTx PON+EoC Solution
Training
MSO CMTS Solution
Training
0.5h
0.5d
435
7.1.3
MA5600T Products Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
MA5600T Hardware
2d
MA5600T Commissioning
Training
5d
MA5600T 1st Line
3d
436
Improve
7.1.4
FTTx PON Products Training Path(GPON)
Plan & Design
FTTx Planning Training
3d
Implement & Operate
Improve
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C)
2nd Line Maintenance
Training
10d
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
(Feature Implementation)
5d
Training
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd
7d
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
(Advanced Troubleshooting)
Training
5d
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd
7d
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line
3d
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line
3d
FTTx P2P 2nd Line
3d
Principle
Training
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN
Product Interconnection
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
1d
0.5d
437
7.1.5
FTTx PON Products Training Path(ODN)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
ODN Installation and
ODN Planning Training
3d
2d
ODN Operation and
iODN Planning Training
3d
3d
iODN Operation and
2d
iODN NMS Administrator
Training
2d
MSO CMTS Operation and
5d
FTTx PON+EoC Operation
7d
Principle
IP Basis Training
Training
1d
438
Improve
7.1.6
DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path
Plan & Design
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T
Series Planning Training
3d
Implement & Operate
Improve
Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
7d
Series 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
10d
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU
VDSL Vectoring Operation and
3d
DSLAM MA5616 Operation
3d
iManager U2000 DSALM
MA5600T Series Operation
and Maintenance Training 3d
Principle
Training
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
1d
439
7.1.7
DSLAM MA5100 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100
Series Commissioning
Training
4d
Training
5d
Principle
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
Training
1d
440
7.1.8
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
4d
Training
5d
Principle
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
Training
1d
441
7.1.9
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
5d
Training
10d
Training
7d
Principle
Training
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
1d
442
7.1.10 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path
Plan & Design
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600T(VoIP) Series
Planning Training
Principle
Implement & Operate
2d
Improve
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd
Line Maintenance Training 3d
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600T(VoIP) Series
2d
iManager U2000 MSAN
MA5600T(VoIP) Operation
2d
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
Training
1d
443
7.1.11 MSAN UA5000 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
MSAN UA5000 Planning
Training
MSAN UA5000 Hardware
3d
Improve
MSAN UA5000 3rd Line
2d
MSAN UA5000
6d
MSAN UA5000 1st Line
2d
MSAN UA5000 2nd Line
10d
iManager U2000 MSAN
UA5000 Operation and
Principle
Training
3d
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
1d
444
10d
7.1.12 HONET Series Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
HONET V6 MD5500 and
UA5000 2nd Line
Principle
Improve
8d
Training
1d
IP Basis Training
Training
1d
445
7.1.13 BITS Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line
3d
SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line
2d
SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line
3d
446
Improve
7.1.14 OSS N2000 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
iManager N2000 BMS
3d
iManager N2000 BMS
Operation Training (GPON)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS
Operation Training (DSLAM)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS
Operation Training (MSAN)
3d
447
Improve
iManager N2000 BMS
Advanced Operation and
5d
7.1.15 OSS N2510 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
iManager N2510 Software
Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 Hardware
Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 OLS
Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510
448
Improve
7.2 List of Access Network Training Programs
Access Network Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Principle
IP Basis Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
VDSL2 Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
1h
No limit
Ⅱ
1h
No limit
FTTx Network Overview Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
FTTO Solution Overview Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
FTTM Solution Overview Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
xDSL Access Network Overview Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
10G/40G PON Network Overview Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
iODN Solution Overview Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training
Ⅲ
0.5
6 ~ 12
MSO CMTS Solution Training
Ⅱ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
Planning
449
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
MA5600T Hardware Installation Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
MA5600T Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
MA5600T 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
ODN Installation and Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
ODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2.5
6 ~ 12
iODN NMS Administrator Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
7
6 ~ 12
MA5600T Products
FTTx PON Products
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting)
Training
DSLAM Products
450
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
6
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
8
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and
DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and
MSAN Products
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance
Training
BITS
SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training
451
SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Administration Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
OSS
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
452
7.3 Principle Training Programs
7.3.1
IP Basis Training
Training Path
Objectives
IP Network Technologies Fundamental
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe the functions of TCP/IP
 Describe routing process
 Describe the function and process of ARP
MPLS/PWE3 Fundamental
 Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBA03
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe MPLS service implementation
process
 Describe PWE3 service implementation
Target Audience
process
Technical Support Engineers
Duration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
 A basic understanding of telecommunication
Min 6, Max 12
network
453
7.3.2
Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe function and message of PPP and
Broadband Service Protocols
OBA02
Lecture
PPPoE protocol
 Describe function and message of RADIUS
1d
protocol
Target Audience
 Describe function and message of DHCP
protocol
Duration
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication
1 working day
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
454
7.3.3
IPTV (IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe multicast definition and application
IP Multicast Technologies
OBA04
Lecture
 Describe multicast network structure
 Describe multicast service implementation
1d
process
Target Audience
 Describe function and message of IGMP
protocol
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
455
7.3.4
VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe SIP function and position in network
Voice Service Protocols
OBA05
Lecture
 Describe SIP typical call flow
 Describe H.248 function and position in
1d
network
Target Audience
 Describe H.248 message structure and typical
call flow
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
456
7.3.5
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training
Training Path
attenuation
 Calculation of the sub-optical power
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product
Interconnection
OBA01
Lecture
attenuation
 Describe a variety of fiber optic connectors and
1d
passive optical devices
Target Audience
 Description of the fiber optic cable related
knowledge
 Description of SDH features and functions
 List SDH network protection
Prerequisites
 Describe WDM principle and OTN frame
network
structure
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the structure of optical fiber
 Calculation of the optical fiber optical power
457
7.3.6
VDSL2 Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives
VDSL2 Fundamental
be able to:
OBA21
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
 Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
Target Audience
 Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles
 Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
 Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
Prerequisites
Duration
network
0.5 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
458
7.3.7
Training Path
 Describe the upstream and downstream
technology
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
 Describe the key performance parameters on
distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
0.5d
received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Target Audience
 Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT
 Describe service encapsulation and
multiplexing measures
Prerequisites
 Describe the QoS and security solution in
GPON
network
Objectives
 Describe ONT management measures
Duration
be able to:
0.5 working day
Class Size
 Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Min 6, Max 12
GPON components
459
7.3.8
Training Path
technology
GPON Fundamentals (WBT)
OBA23
WBT
1h
Target Audience
and T-CONT
Prerequisites
GPON
network
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
1 hour
Class Size
No limit
GPON components
460
7.4 Evolution and Trends Training Programs
7.4.1
Training Path
 Describe FTTx network architecture
 Describe OLT appearance, typical
FTTx System Overview (WBT)
OBA23
WBT
configuration, parameter and connections
 Describe MxU appearance, typical
1h
configuration, parameters
 Describe ONT appearance, typical
Target Audience
configuration, parameters
 Describe FTTx cable
 Describe FTTH/B/C/O solutions
Prerequisites
Duration
network
1 hour
Class Size
Objectives
No limit
be able to:
461
7.4.2
FTTx Network Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe FTTx features and orientation
 Describe FTTx network solution for
FTTx Network Overview
OBA10
Lecture
FTTH/B/C/O/M scenarios
 Describe FTTx service solution, such as high
1d
speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
Target Audience
enterprise private line services, mobile back
haul services, etc.
Technical Manager
 Describe FTTx OAM solution
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
network
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
462
7.4.3
FTTO Solution Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe FTTx network solution for FTTO
FTTO Solution Overview
OBA07
Lecture
scenario
 Describe FTTO service solution, such as high
0.5d
speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
Target Audience
enterprise private line services, etc.
 Describe FTTO OAM solution
Technical Manager
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
463
7.4.4
FTTM Solution Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe FTTx network solution for FTTM
FTTM Solution Overview
OBA08
Lecture
scenario
 Describe FTTM service solution, such as
0.5d
enterprise private line services, mobile back
Target Audience
haul services, etc.
 Describe FTTM OAM solution
Technical Manager
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
464
7.4.5
xDSL Access Network Overview Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe XDSL network solution
xDSL Network Overview
OBA13
Lecture
 Describe XDSL service solution
 Describe function of components in XDSL
0.5d
network
Target Audience
 Describe XDSL modulation mode
 Describe XDSL band plans and profiles
Technical Manager
 Describe XDSL service encapsulation process
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
465
7.4.6
Training Path
Objectives
ODN Overview
be able to:
OBA11
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe ODN network solution
 Describe ODN typical equipment
Target Audience
 Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
466
7.4.7
10G/40G PON Network Overview Training
Training Path
Objectives
NGPON Overview
be able to:
OBA12
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe NGPON features
 Describe NGPON implementation principle
Target Audience
 Describe NGPON network solution
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
467
7.4.8
Training Path
Objectives
Vectoring Overview
be able to:
OBA13
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe vectoring technology features
 Describe vectoring key technology
Target Audience
 Describe vectoring network solution
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
468
7.4.9
Training Path
Objectives
G.fast Overview
be able to:
OBA14
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe G.fast technology features
 Describe G.fast key technology
Target Audience
 Describe G.fast network solution
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
469
7.4.10 iODN Solution Overview Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe ODN Network Composing
OBG37
Lecture, Lab
 Describe ODN Network Maintenance
Challenge
0.5d
 Describe iODN Network Structure
Target Audience
 Describe iODN Solution Module
 Outline iODN advantage
Technical Manager
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network and GPON
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
470
7.4.11 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe traditional cable network Introduction
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview
OBA14
Lecture
 Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
network
0.5d
 Describe PON+EOC solution overview
Target Audience
 Outline the difference between CMTS and
xPON
Technical Manager
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
471
7.4.12 MSO CMTS Solution Training
Training Path
Objectives
MSO CMTS Solution Overview
be able to:
OBA14
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe CMTS introduction
Target Audience
 Describe MSO CMTS solution
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
472
7.5 Planning Training Programs
7.5.1
Training Path
 Outline OLT/ONU product functions and
specification
GPON Planning
OBG10
 Outline OLT/ONU hardware architecture and
Lecture
specification
3d
 Design GPON network for multiple services
 Design hardware system
Target Audience
 Plan bandwidth for internet service
Planning Engineers
 Plan bandwidth for leased line service
Prerequisites
 Plan bandwidth for VoIP service
 Plan bandwidth for IPTV service
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about
 Plan VLAN, IP and site name
telecommunications and data communications
 Be familiar with GPON technology
 Plan QoS
 At least 1 years experience in
 Design security and protection solution
 Design OAM solution
telecommunication network planning
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe GPON network architecture
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe GPON network design background
473
7.5.2
Training Path
 Describe Closure function and application
 Describe Splitter function and application
ODN Overview and Components
OBG39
Lecture, Lab
 Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application
 Describe ODN project lifecycle
0.5d
 Outline ODN planning process
 Outline ODN planning considerations
ODN Planning
OBG40
 Outline ODN topology design
Lecture, Lab
 Describe ODN splitting strategy
2.5d
 Describe ODN protection design
Target Audience
 Describe ODN design scenario models
 Describe ODN Cable Plan Considerations
Planning Engineers
 Perform ODN Cable Route Design
Prerequisites
 Perform ODN Cable Core Design
Be familiar with basic knowledge about
 Perform ODN Cable Type Selection
 Describe ODN civil work methodology
Be familiar with GPON Network
 Outline ODN duct type
At least 1 years experience in telecommunication
 Outline ODN manhole and handhole
network planning
 Describe ISP typical scenarios and solutions
Objectives
 Outline ISP modules and workflow
 Describe ODN Case
be able to:
Duration
 Describe ODN architecture
3 working days
 Describe ODF function and application
 Describe FDT function and application
Class Size
 Describe FAT function and application
Min 6, Max 12
474
7.5.3
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBG37
Lecture, Lab
0.5d
Challenge
iODN Components
OBG41
Lecture, Lab
0.5d
iODN Planning
OBG42
 Describe iODF function and application
Lecture, Lab
 Describe iFDT function and application
2.5d
 Describe iField component
Target Audience
 Describe iODN planning process
 Outline iODN topology design
Planning Engineers
 Describe iODN splitting strategy
Prerequisites
 Describe iODN protection design
Be familiar with GPON Network
 Describe iODN design scenario models
Duration
3 working days
network planning
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
475
7.5.4
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives
SmartAX MA5600T (DSLAM) Planning
be able to:
OBL10
Lecture
3d
 Design DSLAM MA5600T network to carry
multiple service
Target Audience
 Plan DSLAM MA5600T hardware system
Planning Engineers
 Plan DSLAM MA5600T service bandwidth
Prerequisites
 Plan DSLAM MA5600T QoS and security
 Plan OAM solution for DSLAM MA5600T
Be familiar with DSLAM technology
Duration
network planning
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
476
7.5.5
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Design MA5600T(VoIP) network to carry VoIP
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning
OBM10
Lecture
service
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) hardware system
2d
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) service bandwidth
Target Audience
 Plan VoIP interface parameters
Planning Engineers
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) QoS and security
Prerequisites
 Plan OAM solution for MA5600T(VoIP)
Duration
2 working days
Be familiar with VoIP technology
Class Size
network planning
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
477
7.5.6
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives
MSAN UA5000 Planning
be able to:
OBU10
Lecture
3d
 Describe system structure
 Describe service implementation and solution
Target Audience
 Plan hardware system
Planning Engineers
 Plan bandwidth for internet service, VoIP
Prerequisites
service, and multicast service
 Plan VLAN, PVC,IP and site name
 Plan V5 or MG Interface
Be familiar with MSAN technology
Duration
network planning
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
478
7.6 MA5600T Products Training Programs
7.6.1
MA5600T Hardware Installation Training
Training Path
networking
 Outline MA5600T product functions
MA5600T System Overview
OBG00
Lecture
 Describe MA5600T system features
 List device management method
0.5d
 Describe MA5600T cabinet
 Outline MA5600T shelf
MA5600T Hardware Installation
OBG20
Lecture
 Describe MA5600T functions of boards
 Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
1.5d
 Install MA5600T devices cabinet, frame and
board properly
Target Audience
 Perform MA5600T devices cable routing and
termination properly
Installation technician
 Identify the cautions and facts which may affect
Prerequisites
MA5600T system running due to improperly
equipment installation
installation
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe MA5600T product positioning and
Min 6, Max 12
479
7.6.2
MA5600T Commissioning Training
Training Path
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
MA5600T Basic Operation and
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d

Describe MA5600T product networking

Outline MA5600T product functions

Describe MA5600T system features

List device management method

Describe MA5600T cabinet

Outline MA5600T shelf

Describe MA5600T functions of boards

Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection

Establish the connection and login to the
system

MA5600T Service Commissioning
OBG33
Lecture, Lab
query status of hardware and software,
3.5d
backup and restore data, system name
change and alarm query etc.
Target Audience

System and service Commissioning Technicians
commissioning and service commissioning

A basic understanding of telecommunication and
Perform the commissioning verification
Duration
At least 1 year operation and maintenance
experience of the telecommunication equipment
Perform the hardware commissioning,
stand-alone commissioning, network
Prerequisites
data communication
Perform the common basic operation, such as
5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
480
7.6.3
MA5600T 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Lecture
OBG00
0.5d
MA5600T Basic Operation and
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab

Describe MA5600T system features

List device management method

Describe MA5600T cabinet

Outline MA5600T shelf

Describe MA5600T functions of boards

Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection

Establish the connection and login to the
system
1d

Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software,
backup and restore data, system name
ODN Overview (Optional)
change and alarm query etc.
Lecture
OBA11
0.5d

Describe the general methods of field
maintenance

MA5600T Field Maintenance
Perform the alarm query and running status
query by indications of the LED
OBG31
Lecture, Lab

1d
Perform simple OLT/ONT diagnose according
to field situation and daily maintenance
Target Audience
Field Technicians
Prerequisites
Perform component replacement

Describe ODN network solution

Describe ODN typical equipment

Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Duration
data communication
Objectives

3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:

Describe MA5600T product networking

Outline MA5600T product functions
481
7.7 FTTx PON Products Training Programs
7.7.1
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
0.5d
GPON components
GPON FTTx System Overview
OBG00
Lecture
technology
0.5d
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
and T-CONT
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation
and Maintenance
3d
OBG50
Lecture, Lab
GPON
 Introduce FTTx network
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service
OBG51
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
frames, boards and cables
3d
 Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions
 Establish the connection and login to the
system
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting
OBG60
Lecture, Lab
 Perform the common basic operation, such as
1.5d
query status of hardware and software, backup
and restore data, system name change and
Target Audience
alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
process
 Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,
Prerequisites
maintenance and verification.
 Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
and IP Technology
configuration, maintenance and verification
 Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
482
 Troubleshooting ONU
 Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
 Troubleshooting internet access service
 Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
 Troubleshooting multicast service
 Troubleshooting voice service
 Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service
Duration
10 working days
 Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
Class Size
 Troubleshooting hardware and software
Min 6, Max 12
system
483
7.7.2
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
GPON components
0.5d
technology
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
GPON
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation
and Maintenance
3d
OBG50
Lecture, Lab
system
alarm query etc.
OBG60
Lecture, Lab
1.5d
 Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
process
Target Audience
 Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,
maintenance and verification.
 Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
Prerequisites
 Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
IP Technology
Objectives
system
be able to:
484
Duration
Class Size
7 working days
Min 6, Max 12
485
7.7.3
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
GPON components
0.5d
technology
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
GPON
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service
OBG51
Lecture, Lab
system
3d
alarm query etc.
OBG60
Lecture, Lab
1.5d
 Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
 Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
Target Audience
 Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service
 Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
Prerequisites
IP Technology
system
Objectives
be able to:
Duration
7 working days
486
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
487
7.7.4
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
GPON
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
GPON FTTO Data/Voice Service
OBG51
Lecture, Lab
system
1d
Target Audience
alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTO networking
 Perform GPON FTTO data service
Prerequisites
 Perform GPON FTTO VoIP service
IP Technology
Objectives
 Troubleshooting GPON FTTO data/voice
service
be able to:
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
GPON components
Min 6, Max 12
technology
488
7.7.5
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lecture
0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
GPON
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
GPON FTTM Base station access Service
1d
OBG51
Lecture, Lab
system
Target Audience
alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTM networking
 Perform GPON FTTM base station access
Prerequisites
service configuration, maintenance and
verification
IP Technology
 Troubleshooting GPON FTTM base station
Objectives
service
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
GPON components
technology
489
7.7.6
FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBG00
Lecture
0.5d
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
1d
system
FTTx P2P Service Operation and
Maintenance
OBG51
Lecture, Lab
1.5d
alarm query etc.
 Describe FTTx P2P networking
Target Audience
 Perform FTTx P2P Triple-play service
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
IP Technology
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
490
7.7.7
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training
Training Path
Objectives
GPON Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OBG70
Lecture, Lab
be able to:
5d
 Describe Layer2 features
 Outline QoS features
Target Audience
 Explain multicast features
 Describe network protection features
 Describe security features
Prerequisites
Duration
Completion of GPON 2nd Line Maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
491
7.7.8
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Troubleshooting OLT hardware and software
GPON Advanced Troubleshooting
OBG90
Lecture, Lab
System
5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
Completion of GPON 2nd Line Maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
492
7.7.9
U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training
Training Path
be able to:
ONU01
Lecture
U2000
0.5d
 Login to U2000 server via client
 Add a map and device
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance
(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture
 Deal with the alarm
 Backup and auto save the configuration
 Add a management user
 Perform GPON service pre-deployment via
U2000
U2000 GPON Service Provisioning
OBH50
Lecture, Lab
 Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via
3d
U2000
 Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
Target Audience
U2000
Duration
4 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
General understanding of telecommunication
Min 6, Max 12
network and GPON
Objectives
493
7.7.10 U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training
Training Path
be able to:
ONU01
Lecture
U2000
0.5d
U2000 Alarm and Performance
Management
ONU02
Lecture, Lab
alarm
0.5d
common alarm events
Access Network Device Introduction
performance events
ONU08
Lecture
1d
 Locate the alarm in the network
Target Audience
Huawei Access network equipment
products
Prerequisites
network products
Having the basic knowledge of network
management
Duration
Having the basic principle and equipment
knowledge of Access network
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
494
7.7.11 U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
 Outline configuring a Service Level for an ONT
 Describe Remote MDU Acceptance
U2000 FTTx Troubleshooting
OBG43
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Replacing an Ethernet-Upstream
Device Quickly
1d
 Describe Replacing a PON MDU Quickly
 Describe FTTx Alarm types
U2000 GPON Maintenance
OBH60
Lecture
 Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Analysis
 Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Management
2d
 perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
Target Audience
Monitoring
 Perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
Management
 Analysis FTTx common faults troubleshooting
Prerequisites
on U2000
 Describe FTTx faults diagnose through U2000
management
 Describe FTTx faults information collection
through U2000
 Describe FTTx case study on U2000
knowledge of Access network
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Class Size
 Describe FTTx fast operation and maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe upgrading ONTs Automatically
 Describe replacing ONTs
495
7.7.12 ODN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Having the basic knowledge of Access network
Objectives
ODN Overview
OBA11
Lecture
0.5d
be able to:
OBG39
Lecture, Lab
0.5d
ODN Installation and Commissioning
OBG44
Lecture, Lab
 Describe ODN deployment method
1d
 Describe ODN test method
Target Audience
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
management
496
7.7.13 ODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
ODN Overview
OBA11
Lecture
0.5d
OBG39
Lecture, Lab
 Describe ODN common operation
 Describe preventive maintenance purpose
0.5d
 List the maintenance tools
 List of preventive
 List of planed maintenance items
ODN Operation and Maintenance
OBG45
Lecture, Lab
Maintenance items
 Complete maintenance tasks
2d
 Outline troubleshooting flow
 Analysis the ODN common fault
Target Audience
 Locate the ODN common fault
 Complete corrective maintenance tasks
 Describe common fault category
Prerequisites
 Outline typical fault troubleshooting method
management
 Complete fault troubleshooting
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
497
7.7.14 iODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe ODN common operation
 Describe preventive maintenance purpose
iODN System Introduction
OBG36
Lecture, Lab
 List the maintenance tools
 List of preventive
0.5d
Maintenance items
 List of planed maintenance items
 Complete maintenance tasks
ODN Operation and Maintenance
OBG45
Lecture, Lab
 Outline troubleshooting flow
 Analysis the ODN common fault
1.5d
 Locate the ODN common fault
Target Audience
 Complete corrective maintenance tasks
 Describe common fault category
 Outline typical fault troubleshooting method
 Complete fault troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Duration
Having the basic knowledge of ODN
2 working days
knowledge of ODN
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
498
7.7.15 iODN NMS Administrator Training
Training Path
 Perform U2000 ODN NMS server and client
configuration
iODN System Introduction
OBG36
Lecture, Lab
 Describe iField function and applications
 Describe alarms and events in U2000 ODN
0.5d
NMS
 Describe monitoring network alarms
iODN NMS Administrator Operation and
Maintenance
1.5d
OBG46
Lecture, Lab
 Describe setting and handling alarms
 Outline analyzing alarm correlation
 Describe U2000 ODN NMS security
management
Target Audience
 Describe U2000 ODN NMS log management
operation
 Outline U2000 ODN NMS time localization
Prerequisites
management operation
 Adjusting the U2000 ODN NMS
management
 Managing License
 Managing U2000 ODN NMS database, files
and disks
Objectives
 Describe method of checking resource usage
of the server
be able to:
 Describe how to check running status of
processes and services
 Describe method of backing up U2000 ODN
Challenge
NMS data
 Outline normal troubleshooting process and
typical cases
Duration
 Describe iODF function and application
2 working days
 Describe iFDT function and application
 Describe iField component
Class Size
 Describe U2000 ODN NMS characteristics and
Min 6, Max 12
software structure
 Describe U2000 ODN NMS ex-interface
499
7.7.16 MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Prerequisites
data communication
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
MSO CMTS Solution Overview
OBA14
Lecture
0.5d
D-CMTS Principle
 Describe EOC concepts
OBG57
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe EOC technologies
 Describe CMTS introduction
iManager U2000 Service Provision
(D-CMTS)
OBG60
Lecture, Lab
 Describe MSO CMTS solution
1d
 Describe FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service
configuration procedure
 Finish FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service
FTTx D-CMTS Troubleshooting
OBG62
Lecture
configuration correctly based on data planning
 Finish the FTTx D-CMTS service provisioning
0.5d
on U2000
 Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx D-CMTS
common faults and deal with emergencies in
FTTx D-CMTS Operation and Maintenance
services and functions
OBG64
Lecture, Lab
2d
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
500
7.7.17 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
data communication
Objectives
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
be able to:
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview
OBA14
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe EOC concepts
 Describe EOC technologies
Maintenance
OBG30
Lecture, Lab
 Describe FTTx basic concepts and applications
 Describe FTTx EOC product architecture
1d
 Describe FTTx EOC MA563x features
 Describe how to integrate EOC product in
PON+EOC Principle
OBG56
Lecture
CATV network
1d
 Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
network
 Describe PON+EOC solution overview
FTTx EOC System Overview
 Outline the difference between CMTS and
OBG58
Lecture
0.5d
xPON
system
iManager U2000 Service Provision (EOC)
OBG59
Lecture, Lab
1d
alarm query etc.
FTTx EOC Troubleshooting
OBG61
Lecture
 Finish the ONU adding and check the ONU
status
0.5d
 Describe FTTx EOC HSI service configuration
procedure
 Finish FTTx EOC HSI service configuration
FTTx EOC Operation and Maintenance
correctly based on data planning
OBG63
Lecture, Lab
2d
 Finish the FTTx EOC service provisioning on
U2000
Target Audience
 Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx EOC
common faults and deal with emergencies in
services and functions
Prerequisites
Duration
7 working days
501
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
502
7.8 DSLAM Products Training Programs
7.8.1
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe xDSL network solution
 Describe xDSL service solution
xDSL Technology Fundamental
OBA20
Lecture
 Describe xDSL service process
 Describe MA5600T product positioning and
1d
networking
 Outline MA5600T product functions
 Describe MA5600T system features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview
OBL00
Lecture
 List device management method
0.5d
 Describe MA5600T cabinet
 Outline MA5600T shelf
 Describe MA5600T functions of boards
MA5600T (DSLAM) Basic Operation and
Maintenance
1d
OBL30
Lecture, Lab
 Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
system
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service Configuration
OBL50
Lecture, Lab
and restore data, system name change, alarm
3d
query, etc.
 Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
MA5600T (DSLAM) Troubleshooting
OBL60
Lecture
implementation in MA5600T
1d
MA5600T
 Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
Target Audience
 Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
configuration
 Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
maintenance
Prerequisites
 Complete multicast service configuration
 Perform multicast service operation and
and data communication
maintenance
Objectives
system
be able to:
503
Class Size
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
7 working days
504
7.8.2
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
PPPoE protocol
OBA02
Lecture
protocol
1d
protocol
 Describe xDSL modulation mode
xDSL Technology In-depth
OBA80
Lecture
 Describe xDSL band plans and profiles
 Deal with noise of xDSL line
0.5d
 Describe xDSL packet transfer mode
 Describe triple-play solution introduction
 Complete triple-play service configuration
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced Operation
and Maintenance
7d
OBL70
Lecture, Lab
 Describe and provision xDSL features
 Describe and provision layer2 features
 Describe and provision QoS features
 Describe and provision network protection
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced
Troubleshooting
OBL90
Lecture, Lab
features
1.5d
 Describe and provision user security features
 Describe and provision multicast features
Target Audience
 Troubleshoot complex faults in hardware and
software system
 Troubleshoot complex faults in the Internet
access service
Prerequisites
 Troubleshoot complex faults in the multicast
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series
service
2nd Line Maintenance Training or having
Duration
Objectives
10 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
505
7.8.3
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
 Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
 Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
VDSL2 Fundamental
OBA21
Lecture
 Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles
 Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
0.5d
 Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
 Describe vectoring technology features
Vectoring Overview
OBA13
Lecture
 Describe vectoring key technology
 Describe vectoring network solution
0.5d
 Describe VDSL2 service implementation
 Complete VDSL2 service configuration
DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Service
Configuration
OBL50
Lecture, Lab
 Perform VDSL2 service operation and
1.5d
maintenance
DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Troubleshooting
maintenance
OBL60
Lecture
0.5d
 Troubleshooting vectoring hardware and
software system
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting internet/multicast service
based on vectoring technology
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
506
7.8.4
DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe MA5616 system features
 Describe MA5616 functions of boards
MA5616 (DSLAM) Overview
OBL00
Lecture
 Outline MA5616 cables and interconnection
0.5d
implementation in MA5616
 Describe multicast service implementation in
MA5616 (DSLAM) Service Configuration
OBL50
Lecture, Lab
MA5616
2d
configuration
MA5616 (DSLAM) Troubleshooting
maintenance
OBL60
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
maintenance
system
Prerequisites
data communication
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe MA5616 product positioning and
networking
 Outline MA5616 product functions
507
7.8.5
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
ONU01
Lecture
0.5d
U2000
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series
2d
OBH51
Lab
(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture
 Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
U2000
Target Audience
 Perform VDSL2 service configuration via
U2000
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
DSLAM
Min 6, Max 12
508
7.8.6
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning
OBC22
Lecture, Lab
3.5d
 Perform the hardware commissioning,
Target Audience
commissioning, service commissioning and the
commissioning verification
System Commissioning Technicians
Service Commissioning Technicians
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
509
7.8.7
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
OBJ22
Lecture, Lab
3.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
510
7.8.8
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
OBK22
Lecture, Lab
4.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
511
7.8.9
Training Path
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe System Overview
SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and
Maintenance
3.5d
OBC20
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Hardware Architecture
 Describe Functional Features
 Describe Networking Applications
 Introduce CLI
 Perform System Maintenance
SmartAX MA5100 Series Troubleshooting
OBC21
Lecture, Lab
 Perform ATM-DSLAM Service Configuration
1d
 Perform IP-DSLAM Service Configuration
 Troubleshooting ADSL service
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting LAN service
Duration
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
512
7.8.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe product positioning and networking
Maintenance
3.5d
OBJ20
Lecture, Lab
 Describe hardware architecture
 Describe functional features
 Describe networking applications
 Perform service configuration and maintenance
 Perform system maintenance
OBJ21
Lecture, Lab
1d
system
Target Audience
Duration
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
data communication
Objectives
513
Training Path
be able to:
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe system networking and positioning
Maintenance
5.5d
OBK20
Lecture, Lab
 Describe hardware architecture
 Describe functional features
 Describe networking applications
 Perform system daily maintenance
 Perform service configuration and maintenance
OBK21
Lecture, Lab
1d
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting Multicast service
Duration
7 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
data communication
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
514
Training Path
protocol
OBA02
Lecture
protocol
1d
OBA80
Lecture
0.5d
 Describe and provision QinQ VLAN features
 Describe and provision VLAN Stacking
features
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced
OBK70
Lecture, Lab
 Describe and provision PITP features
7.5d
 Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
 Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
 Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced
Troubleshooting
OBK61
Lecture, Lab
features
1d
 Describe and provision Triple-play service
 Troubleshooting complex faults in MA5600
Target Audience
system
 Troubleshooting complex faults in ADSL
service
 Troubleshooting complex faults in internet
Prerequisites
access service
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series
 Troubleshooting complex faults in multicast
2nd Line Maintenance Training or having
service
Duration
Objectives
10 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
PPPoE protocol
515
7.9 MSAN Products Training Programs
7.9.1
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
H.248 or SIP Protocol
OBA06
Lecture
 Describe SIP message and message flow
0.5d
network
 Describe H.248 message structure and call
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System
Overview
0.5d
OBM00
Lecture
flow
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
function and networking application
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Basic
1d
OBM30
Lecture, Lab
cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
system
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Service
Configuration
0.5d
OBM50
Lecture
query, etc.
 Describe VoIP service implementation process
 Complete VoIP service configuration
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series
Troubleshooting
OBM60
Lecture
 Perform VoIP service operation and
0.5d
maintenance
 Troubleshooting hardware
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting software
 Troubleshooting VoIP service
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
516
7.9.2
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System
Overview
0.5d
OBM00
Lecture
be able to:
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
function and networking application
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Service
Commissioning
OBM33
Lecture, Lab
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
1.5d
cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
data communication
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
517
7.9.3
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
ONU01
Lecture
U2000
0.5d
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T (VoIP)
1d
OBH53
Lab
 Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
via U2000
(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture
 Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
U2000
 Perform MSAN multicast service configuration
Target Audience
via U2000
Duration
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
518
7.9.4
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training
Training Path
 Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
 Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
MSAN UA5000 System Overview
OBU00
Lecture
 Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
 Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and
0.5d
ports
 Install UA5000 cabinet, frame and board
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation
OBU20
Lecture, Lab
properly
 Perform UA5000 cable routing and termination
1.5d
properly
 Identify the cautions and facts which may affect
Target Audience
UA5000 system running due to improperly
Installation technician
Prerequisites
installation
Duration
data communication
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning
519
7.9.5
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
ports
OBU00
Lecture
system
0.5d
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and
Maintenance
OBU30
Lecture, Lab
query, etc.
1d
mounted boards, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service
Commissioning
OBU31
Lecture, Lab
 Perform the broadband system commissioning,
network commissioning, XDSL service
2d
commissioning
process
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service
Commissioning
OBU32
Lecture, Lab
 Perform the narrowband system
2.5d
commissioning, stand-alone commissioning,
network commissioning, voice service
Target Audience
commissioning
Prerequisites
process
Duration
data communication
6 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
520
7.9.6
MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBU00
Lecture
0.5d
ports
Maintenance
OBU30
Lecture, Lab
system
1d
query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance
 Describe the general methods of field
OBU33
Lecture, Lab
0.5d
maintenance
 Perform the alarm query and running status
Target Audience
query by indications of the LED
 Perform simple diagnose according to field
Field Technicians
situation and daily maintenance
Prerequisites
 Perform component replacement
data communication
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
521
7.9.7
MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
ports
OBU00
Lecture
system
0.5d
Maintenance
OBU30
Lecture, Lab
query, etc.
1d
implementation process
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service
Configuration
OBU50
Lecture, Lab
process
3d
configuration
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service
Configuration
OBU51
Lecture, Lab
maintenance
3d
maintenance
MSAN UA5000 Broadband
Troubleshooting
OBU60
Lecture
 Describe Voice service implementation process
2d
 Complete Voice service configuration
 Perform Voice service operation and
maintenance
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband
Troubleshooting
OBU61
Lecture
 Troubleshooting IPM System
0.5d
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting Ethernet port
 Troubleshooting PVM System
 Troubleshooting Voice service
 Troubleshooting E1 port
Prerequisites
Duration
data communication
Objectives
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
522
7.9.8
MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
protocol
OBA02
Lecture
protocol
1d
OBA05
Lecture
1d
network
OBA80
Lecture
0.5d
call flow
 Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
 Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation
features
OBU70
Lecture, Lab
5d
 Describe and provision VLAN features
 Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
 Describe and provision DHCP multicast
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Troubleshooting
OBU62
Lecture, Lab
features
 Describe triple play service solution
2.5d
 Complete Triple-play service configuration
Target Audience
 Describe and provision hairpin connection and
self-switching
 Describe line test networking and device
requirement
Prerequisites
 Troubleshooting system
Completion of MSAN UA5000 2nd Line
 Troubleshooting Internet Access Service
Maintenance Training or having equivalent
 Troubleshooting Multicast Service
knowledge
 Troubleshooting VoIP service
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
PPPoE protocol
523
7.9.9
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00
Lecture
0.5d
network
OBA05
Lecture
call flow
1d
 Describe provision xDSL service
 Describe provision IMA service
 Describe provision Ethernet service
HONET V6 Operation and Maintenance
OBU54
Lecture, Lab
 Describe provision CES service
6.5d
 Perform V5 interface configuration
 Perform PV8/RSP frame configuration
Target Audience
 Perform user configuration
 Perform POTS service configuration
 Perform ISDN service configuration
Prerequisites
 Perform daily operation and maintenance
Duration
network
Objectives
8 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
524
7.9.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
ONU01
Lecture
U2000
0.5d
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation
and Maintenance
2d
OBH52
Lab
via U2000
(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture
U2000
Target Audience
via U2000
Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
525
7.10
BITS Training Programs
7.10.1 SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
network
 Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance
OSU01
Lecture, Lab
SYNLOCK V3
 Outline main functions of boards
3d
 Configure different levels of clock source
 Configure SYNLOCK V3 hardware
Target Audience
 Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V3 network
management system
 Perform SYNLOCK V3 network management
Prerequisites
system maintenance
SYNLOCK V3
network
 Complete the maintenance records of
Objectives
SYNLOCK V3
 Describe the common analysis methods of fault
be able to:
locating
 Understand basic concepts of synchronization
network
 Analyze the typical faults
Duration
 Describe the composition of synchronization
3 working days
network
 Describe the applications of synchronization
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
526
7.10.2 SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V5
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance
OSU02
Lecture, Lab
 Outline main functions of boards
 Configure different levels of clock source
2d
 Configure SYNLOCK V5hardware
Target Audience
 Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V5 network
management system
 Perform SYNLOCK V5 network management
system maintenance
Prerequisites
SYNLOCK V5
network
 Complete the maintenance records of
Objectives
SYNLOCK V5
 Describe the common analysis methods of fault
locating
be able to:
 Analyze the typical faults
 Understand basic concepts of synchronization
network
Duration
 Describe the composition of synchronization
network
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
network
network
527
7.10.3 SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Query the device status and alarm via
SYNLOCK V3
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and
Maintenance
OSU03
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the network structure and function of
SYNLOCK V3
3d
 Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system
Target Audience
configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
 Query the device status and alarm via
SYNLOCK V3
 Explain the meaning of network
Prerequisites
synchronization
 Differentiate between clock synchronization
network
and time synchronization
Objectives
 List common technologies for network
synchronization
 Describe common synchronization modes for
be able to:
SDH networks
 Outline product positioning of SYNLOCK
 Describe clock levels and quality requirements
T6020
of clock at different levels
 Describe hardware structure of SYNLOCK
 Explain the functions of IEEE 1588v2 clock and
T6020
its advantages/disadvantages
 State the functions of boards and interfaces
 List the typical system configuration of
Duration
SYNLOCK T6020
 Describe the network structure and function of
3 working days
Class Size
SYNLOCK V3
Min 6, Max 12
 Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system
configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
528
7.11
OSS Training Programs
7.11.1 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training
Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS
 Perform server configuration, server startup
iManager N2000 BMS Administration
OBN56
Lecture, Lab
and shutdown
 Perform system user management, N2000
3d
user management, NE user Management and
so on
Target Audience
 Perform service and process management,
Database management and NTP configuration
 Perform database backup and restoration,
routine management, emergency management,
Prerequisites
 Having the basic knowledge of NMS
as well as know how to use management tool
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe system structure, orientation features,
Min 6, Max 12
network application and functions of the
529
7.11.2 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Northbound TL1 interface
 Background of TL1 interface
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Features
OBN80
Lecture
 Describe hardware and software architecture of
iManager N2000 BMS
4d
 Describe the functions of each application
components
iManager N2000 BMS Installation
OBN20
Lecture, Lab
 Describe typical management solution which
may cooperate with OSS and third-party
1d
application and cases
 Describe fault, provisioning, performance,
Target Audience
management and security solution
 Describe the solution and implementation of
NBI (North Bound Interface)
Prerequisites
 Perform NBI operation and maintenance
 Describe the solution and implementation of
Having the basic knowledge of NMS
dual system
Objectives
 Describe the installation procedure
be able to:
 Describe HA solution
 Install iManager N2000 system properly
Duration
5 working days
 Describe Watchman principles
 Perform Watchman maintenance
Class Size
 Describe NMS northbound interface
Min 6, Max 12
 Northbound SNMP/CORBA interface
530
7.11.3 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe network management architecture
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction
OBN00
Lecture
 Describe the hardware and software
architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
0.5d
 Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
 Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation
and Maintenance
OBN30
Lab
 Login to N2000 Server via Client
1d
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and
Maintenance (GPON)
OBN50
Lecture, Lab
 Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
1.5d
iManager N2000 BMS
 Perform GPON FTTB/FTTC service
Target Audience
configuration via iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
network and GPON
Objectives
531
7.11.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)
Training Path
be able to:
iManager N2000 BMS Operation (DSLAM)
OBN51
Lab
1.5d
OBN00
Lecture
0.5d
and Maintenance
OBN30
Lab
 Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
1d
iManager N2000 BMS
 Perform VDSL2 service configuration via
Target Audience
iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
network and DSLAM
Objectives
532
7.11.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)
Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS Operation (MSAN)
OBN52
Lab
1.5d
OBN00
Lecture
0.5d
via N2000 BMS
and Maintenance
OBN30
Lab
1d
N2000 BMS
 Perform MSAN V5 service configuration via
Target Audience
N2000 BMS
Prerequisites
via N2000 BMS
Duration
network and MSAN
3 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
533
7.11.6 iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the function of each functional unit of
iManager N2510 Software Test System
Overview
OBS01
Lecture
iManager N2510 AOS test system
 Analyze test item such as SELT, DELT
0.5d
 Understand the limits of measurements
 Perform the N2510 system login
iManager N2510 Software Test System
OBS32
Lecture, Lab
 Perform the System Configuration
 Carry out the line Testing operation
2.5d
 Carry out the line analysis operation
Target Audience
 Carry out the line Optimization operation
 Carry out the line Evaluation operation
Duration
Prerequisites
General understanding of access network and
3 working days
Class Size
xDSL technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
534
7.11.7 iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System
Overview
1d
OBS02
Lecture
be able to:
 Describe LTS system typical networking
 Outline LTS system function features
 List part of testing measurement
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System
2d
OBS33
Lecture, Lab
 Describe LTS system typical networking
 Complete line resource configuration
 Perform DMM, LB, FR and DMT via iManager
Target Audience
N2510
 Complete some of the testing demonstration
Duration
Prerequisites
General understanding of access network and
3 working days
Class Size
xDSL technology
Min 6, Max 12
535
7.11.8 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager N2510 OLS System Overview
be able to:
OBS03
Lecture
1d
 Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking
 Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution
functions
iManager N2510 OLS System Operation
and Maintenance
2d
OBS34
Lecture, Lab
 List part of ODN common fault
 Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
 Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and
Target Audience
maintenance
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
General understanding of PON technology and
Min 6, Max 12
related parameters
536
7.11.9 iManager N2510 Administration Training
Training Path
 Outline the system architecture, the network
position, the networking solution and the
iManager N2510 Test System Overview
OBS04
Lecture
functional structure of iManager N2510
 Describe the workstation platform solution of
0.5d
iManager N2510 software test system, such as
PC solution and ATAE solution
 Describe the interfaces and its function of
iManager N2510 Test System
Administration
OBS40
Lecture, Lab
iManager N2510 software test system
2.5d
 Describe iManager N2510 installation
procedure
Target Audience
 Describe iManager N2510 administration item
 Perform iManager N2510 administration
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
General understanding of access network and OS
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 1
be able to:
537
8 GSM Training Courses
Field Maintenance
Engineer
8.1 GSM Training Path
WBT (Pre-learning)
WBT (Pre-learning)
1H
1H
SingleRAN MBTS GUL
Product Overview
O&M Engineer
WBT (Pre-learning)
0.5H
SingleRAN GUL O&M
Tools Introduction
WBT (Pre-learning)
0.5H
PCU6000 (External PCU)
Operation and
ILT
5D
GSM BSS8.1/9.0/12.0/13.0
/14.0/15.0 BSS Operation
ILT
5D
ILT/LVC
2D
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS12.0
Delta Training
ILT/LVC
Product Delta Training
ILT/LVC
ILT/LVC
ILT/LVC
RNP
Engineer
5D
GSM IPRAN Application
Training
ILT
5D
GSM BSS14.0/15.0
Emergency Maintenance
Training
ILT
1D
1D
Product Delta Training
GSM BSS14.0/15.0
Antenna and Feeder
ILT
1D
1D
GSM Radio Network
Design and Planning
Training
ILT
4D
In-building Coverage
Overview
WBT (Pre-learning)
GSM Indoor Coverage
Training
1H
GPRS EDGE Signaling
Training
ILT
RNO Engineer
ILT
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/
14.0/15.0 BSS
Reconfiguration Training
ILT
5D
GSM BSS14.0/15.0 Patch
and Upgrade Training
ILT
2D
2D
Delta Training
1D
GSM BSS8.1/9.0/12.0/
13.0/14.0/15.0 BSS
GSM IPRAN
ILT
3D
Product Delta
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0
Delta Training
0.5H
GSM BSS8.1/9.0/12.0/
13.0/14.0/15.0 BSS
Configuration Training
ILT 5D/7D/7D/7D/7D/7D
SingleRAN MBSC GU
Product Overview
WBT (Pre-learning)
GSM BTS8.1/9.0/12.0/13.0
/14.0/15.0 BTS Operation
ILT
5D
SingleRAN MBTS GUL
Site Solution
SingleRAN MBTS GUL
Product Overview
GSM Radio Channel
WBT (Pre-learning)
0.5H
Evolved EDGE Principle
Introduction
WBT (Pre-learning)
1H
2D
BSC6000/6900/6910
GSM Radio Network
ILT
10D
Evolved EDGE Training
ILT
1D
BSC6000/6900/6910
GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Planning and
ILT
5D
ILT
2D
GSM Radio Network
Analysis Training
ILT
2D
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio
Network Interoperability
Training
ILT
1D
GSM Highway and Highspeed Railway Solution
Training
ILT
1D
GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Analysis Training
ILT
1D
RNO Feature Delta
GSM BSS14.0 Feature
Delta Training
ILT/LVC
1D
GSM BSS15.0 Feature
Delta Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D
The WBT courses are optional modules
538
8.2 List of GSM Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
GSM Product Technology Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
BSC6900/BSC6910 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
GSM Indoor Coverage Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
GSM-R BSS basic O&M training (BSC6000 V901R013)
GSM-R BSS O&M Training (BSC6000V901R013) (Including
GSM-R BSS Basic O&M Training)
GSM RNP/RNO
GPRS/EDGE RNP/RNO
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization
Training
GSM BSC6900/BSC6910 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning
and Optimization Training
539
8.3 GSM Product Technology Training Programs
8.3.1
GSM-R BSS basic O&M training (BSC6000 V901R013)
BTS GSM-R basic O&M
 Have general knowledge of GSM-R wireless logical
Course Schedule
channels and channel combinations.
 Have general knowledge of basic working principles of
GSM-R communication principle fundamentals
GSM-R key techniques.
Lecturing
 Have general knowledge of BSC6000 features.
0.5 days
 Have general knowledge of BSC6000 hardware
structure.
 Have general knowledge of applications of
BSC6000 GSM-R V901R013 production
introduction
DBS3900/BTS3900 in specific environments.
Lecturing
 Have a good command of DBS3900/BTS3900 hardware
0.5 days
structure.
 Have a good command of functions of
DBS3900/BTS3900 modules.
GSM-R BTS product description
Lecturing
 Have a good command of DBS3900/BTS3900 typical
0.5 days
configuration.
 Have general knowledge of characteristics of BTS3012
and BTS3012AE.
BSC6000 GSM-R V901R013 basic O&M
Lecturing and hands-on exercise
 Have a good command of hardware structure
and functions of BTS3012 and BTS3012AE.
0.5 days
 Have a basic command of signal flow of
BTS3012 and BTS3012AE.
 Have a good command of typical configurations
BTS GSM-R basic O&M
of BTS3012 and BTS3012AE.
1 day
 Have a good command of equipment
networking of BTS3012 and BTS3012AE.
 Have general knowledge of basic concepts of BSC6000
Training Object
O&M.
GSM-R BSS technical support engineers
 Have a good command of common functions of BSC
GSM-R BSS field O&M engineers
O&M.
Enrollment Requirements
 Have a good command of common BTS O&M
 Have knowledge about wireless communication
functions.
 Maintain BTSs on the LMT.
fundamentals
 Perform daily maintenance tasks.
 Have experience in maintaining GSM-R wireless
networks for more than 1 year
Duration
Objectives
On completion of this program, you will be able to:
3 working days (1 working day for hands-on exercise)
Class Size
 Have general knowledge of GSM-R
Six at a minimum and 16 at a maximum
development history.
540
8.3.2
GSM-R BSS O&M Training (BSC6000V901R013) (Including GSM-R BSS Basic
O&M Training)
Course Schedule
Training Object
GSM-R BSS technical support engineers
GSM-R communication principle
GSM-R BSS field O&M engineers
Lecturing
1 day
 Have knowledge about wireless communication
fundamentals
BSC6000 GSM-R V901R013 product description
 Have experience in maintaining GSM-R wireless
Lecturing
1 day
networks for more than 1 year
Objectives
DBS3900/BTS3900 GSM-R product description
Lecturing
 Have general knowledge of GSM-R development
0.5 days
history.
 Have general knowledge of GSM-R wireless logical
channels and channel combinations.
BTS3012 GSM-R product description
Lecturing
 Describe basic working principles of GSM-R key
0.5 days
techniques.
 Have general knowledge of BSC6000 features.
 Have a basic command of BSC6000 hardware structure.
 Have a good command of BSC6000 working principles
BSC6000 GSM-R V901R013 data configuration
and process.
2.5 days
 Have a good command of BSC6000 typical
configuration.
 Have general knowledge of applications of
BTS GSM-R data configuration
DBS3900/BTS3900 in specific environments.
0.5 days
 Have a good command of DBS3900/BTS3900 hardware
structure.
 Have a good command of functions of
BSC6000 GSM-R V901R013 O&M
DBS3900/BTS3900 modules.
 Have a good command of DBS3900/BTS3900 typical
2 days
configuration.
 Have general knowledge of characteristics of BTS3012
and BTS3012AE.
BTS GSM-R O&M
 Have a good command of hardware structure and
1 day
functions of BTS3012 and BTS3012AE.
 Have a basic command of signal flow of BTS3012 and
BTS3012AE.
 Have a good command of typical configurations of
GSM-R BSS troubleshooting
1 day
 Have a good command of equipment networking of
541
 Perform daily maintenance tasks.
 Have general knowledge of basic concepts of BSC6000
 Have a good command of BSS troubleshooting
O&M.
methods.
 Have a good command of principles and process of
 Have general knowledge of procedures for fault
BSC6000 data configuration.
determination and location.
 Have a good command of BSC6000 data configuration
 Have a good command of BSS fault preventive
process.
methods.
 Have a good command of BTS fault location
 Have general knowledge of basic principles of
and rectification methods.
BSC6000 data configuration.
 Have a good command of BTS fault preventive
 Have a good command of initial data configuration of
measures.
BTSs connected to the BSC6000.
 Have a good command of data modification of BTSs
Duration
connected to the BSC6000.
10 working days (4 working days for hands-on
 Have a good command of common BSC O&M
exercise)
functions.
 Have a good command of common BTS O&M
Class Size
functions.
 Maintain BTSs on the LMT.
542
8.4 GSM RNP/RNO Training Programs
8.4.1
Training Path
 Implement selecting the suitable antenna type
 Outline the key specifications of antenna
GSM Antenna Basics
OMP00
Lecture
 Implement GSM radio network coverage
planning
0.5d
 Explain the link budget model and its
application
GSM Radio Network Planning
OMP01
Lecture, Case
 Explain the advance technology for improving
coverage
3.5d
 Implement GSM radio network traffic capacity
planning on TCHF/TCHH/SDCCH
Target Audience
 Explain the capacity enhancement technology
 Explain the location area planning?
GSM Radio Network Planning Engineers
 Describe the paging ability of radio network
Prerequisites
 Explain GSM frequency resource, C/I
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications
conception, frequency reuse definition, and
Objectives
frequency tighten reuse technology and its
application
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the theory of radio signal propagation
 Describe the radio signal propagation model
4 working days
Class Size
 Interpret the structure of the antenna
Min 6, Max 12
equipments
 Interpret the features of the antenna
equipments
543
8.4.2
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
interface
 Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis
BSC6000 GSM Air Interface
OMA00
Lecture, Lab
interface
 Explain the important message parameters
2.5d
 Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
signaling flow
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Functionality
OMO00
Lecture, Lab
 List the MS behaviors in idle mode
 Describe the parameters associated with MS
2.25d
behaviors in idle mode
 List the types of frequency hopping
 Describe the functions of frequency hopping
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Features
algorithm
OMO02
Lecture, Lab
4.75d
 Describe the parameters of frequency hopping
 Describe the general flow of GSM power
control algorithm
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Performance
Management
0.5d
OMO04
Lecture, Demo
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III
 Describe the other features about power
Target Audience
control
 Describe the general flow of GSM handover
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers
algorithm
Prerequisites
 Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
Basic knowledge of mobile communications
 Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
At least 1 year working experience in GSM
 Describe the half rate algorithm
wireless network optimization
 Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm
Objectives
 Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
algorithm II
 Describe the operations about performance
be able to:
 Describe the function of each kind of logical
management based on M2000
 Interpret the general analysis procedure of
channel
 Describe the general radio signal process on
traffic analysis
 Interpret the functions of some typical counters
Um interface
 State the techniques used on Um interface
Duration
 Describe typical GSM communication flow
 Perform the operation for interface message
trace
10 working days
Class Size
 Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
Min 6, Max 12
544
8.4.3
BSC6900/BSC6910 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
interface
 Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis
BSC6900/BSC6910 GSM Air Interface
OMA01
Lecture, Lab
interface
 Explain the important message parameters
2.5d
 Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
signaling flow
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
Network Functionality
OMO01
Lecture, Lab
 List the MS behaviors in idle mode
 Describe the parameters associated with MS
2.25d
behaviors in idle mode
 List the types of frequency hopping
 Describe the functions of frequency hopping
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
Network Features
OMO03
Lecture, Lab
algorithm
4.75d
 Describe the parameters of frequency hopping
 Describe the general flow of GSM power
control algorithm
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
Network Performance Management
OMO05
Lecture, Demo
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III
0.5d
 Describe the other features about power
Target Audience
control
 Describe the general flow of GSM handover
algorithm
Prerequisites
 Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
 Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
 Describe the half rate algorithm
 Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm
Objectives
 Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
algorithm II
be able to:
 Interpret the general analysis procedure of
channel
 Describe the general radio signal process on
traffic analysis
 Interpret the functions of some typical counters
Um interface
 State the techniques used on Um interface
Duration
 Describe typical GSM communication flow
 Perform the operation for interface message
trace
10 working days
Class Size
 Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
Min 6, Max 12
545
8.4.4
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training
Training Path
Objectives
GSM 2G/3G/4G Interoperability
be able to:
OMO10
Lecture
1d
 Describe the inter-RAT CS cell reselection
conditions
Target Audience
 Describe the inter-RAT PS cell reselection
conditions
Prerequisites
 Describe the inter-RAT handover algorithm
 Describe the signaling flow of inter-RAT
Completion of the following program(s):
handover
GSM BSC6000 Radio Network Optimization
Training,
Duration
OR GSM BSC6900 Radio Network Optimization
Training
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
546
8.4.5
GSM Indoor Coverage Training
Training Path
 List the types of common components for
indoor coverage
Common Components for Indoor
Coverage and Repeater Introduction
OMP03
Lecture
 Describe the functions of common
components for indoor coverage
0.5d
 Describe the functions of repeaters
 Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage
GSM Indoor Coverage Planning and
Optimization
OMP04
Lecture
planning
 Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage
1.25d
optimization
 Describe the method of indoor and outdoor
inter-operation
GSM Indoor Coverage Solution
 Describe the stadium coverage solution
OMO12
Lecture
0.25d
 Describe the metro coverage solution
 Describe the airport coverage solution
Target Audience
 Describe the resident location coverage
solution
 Describe the commercial building coverage
Prerequisites
solution
 Describe the campus coverage solution
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
547
8.4.6
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the enhanced part in handover
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta
OMO15
Lecture
algorithm I
1d
algorithm II
Target Audience
 Describe the feature of VAMOS
 Describe the feature of PS power control
 Describe the feature of HSCSD
Prerequisites
 Describe the feature of smart pipe
Duration
1 working day
Training,
Class Size
Training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
548
8.4.7
Training Path
be able to:
GSM BSS15.0 Feature Delta
OMO17
Lecture
algorithm I
1d
algorithm II
Target Audience
 Describe the feature of VAMOS
 Describe the feature of PS power control
 Describe the feature of HSCSD
Prerequisites
 Describe the feature of smart pipe
Duration
1 working day
Training,
Class Size
Training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
549
8.4.8
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training
Training Path
solution
 Describe the networking strategy of highway
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway
Solution
1d
OMO11
Lecture
and high-speed railway
 Describe the feature and equipment of highway
Target Audience
 Describe the scenario solutions of highway and
high-speed railway
 Describe the optimization method of highway
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe highway and high-speed railway
550
8.4.9
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training
Training Path
 Describe the key KPIs of TCH/SDCCH call
drop
BSC6900/BSC6910 GSM Radio Network
Optimization
2d
OMO14
Lecture, Case
 Summarize the typical problems of call drop in
realistic network
 Analyze the main reasons of call drop
Target Audience
 Describe the key KPIs of handover
 Summarize the typical problems of handover
failure in realistic network
Prerequisites
 Analyze the main reasons of handover failure
 Study the cases
Duration
Training,
2 working days
Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
551
8.5 GPRS/EDGE RNP/RNO Training Programs
8.5.1
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training
Training Path
channel
 Describe the typical application scenarios of
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Air Interface
OMA02
Lecture, Lab
different logical channel
 Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
2d
GPRS/EDGE MS
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
Features
1.5d
OMO06
Lecture, Case
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow
 List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
radio network optimization
 Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
Performance Management
1d
OMO08
Lecture, Demo
 Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm
 Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection
conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning
OMP00
Lecture, Case
 Interpret the functions of typical counters
0.5d
 List the typical KPIs
 Interpret the definition and measurement points
Target Audience
of typical KPIs
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and
 Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
Optimization Engineers
network planning
Prerequisites
 Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
capacity planning
 Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
 At least 1 year working experience in
coverage planning
GPRS/EDGE wireless network planning and
optimization
frequency planning
Objectives
 Describe the influence to the GSM network
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
 Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and
functions of entities in GPRS network
Class Size
 Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of
Min 6, Max 12
Um interface
552
8.5.2
GSM BSC6900/BSC6910 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and
Training Path
 Describe the typical application scenarios of
different logical channel
BSC6900/BSC6910 GPRS/EDGE Air
Interface
OMA03
Lecture, Lab
 Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
GPRS/EDGE MS
2d
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 GPRS/EDGE
Radio Network Features
1.5d
OMO07
Lecture, Case
 List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
radio network optimization
 Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
 Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 GPRS/EDGE
Radio Network Performance Management
1d
OMO09
Lecture, Demo
 Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection
conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning
OMP00
Lecture, Case
 Interpret the functions of typical counters
 List the typical KPIs
0.5d
 Interpret the definition and measurement points
Target Audience
of typical KPIs
 Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
network planning
 Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
Prerequisites
capacity planning
At least 1 year working experience in GPRS/EDGE
coverage planning
wireless network planning and optimization
Objectives
frequency planning
 Describe the influence to the GSM network
be able to:
Duration
 Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and
functions of entities in GPRS network
 Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Um interface
channel
553
8.5.3
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training
Training Path
 Describe the layer3 of Um interface and
relative signalling flows
GPRS EDGE Signaling
OMA05
Lecture
relative signaling flows
2d
Target Audience
relative signaling flows
 Describe the Gb interface and relative signaling
flows
 Describe the Gn/Gp interface and relative
Prerequisites
signaling flows
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
554
8.5.4
Training Path
Objectives
Evolved EDGE
be able to:
OMA04
Lecture
1d
 Describe the principle of evolved EDGE
 List the feature set
Target Audience
 Describe the EGPRS2 resource allocation and
operation
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
555
8.5.5
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the general analysis method of TBF
BSC6900/BSC6910 GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Optimization
1d
OMO16
Lecture, Case
setup success rate problem
 Introduce the detailed solution of TBF setup
success rate problem
Target Audience
 Describe the general analysis method of
download speed problem
 Introduce the detailed solution of download
Prerequisites
speed problem
GSM BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
 Study the cases
Duration
Optimization Training,
1 working day
OR GSM BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
556
9 CDMA Training Courses
Field Maintenance
Engineer
9.1 CDMA Training Path
BTS3900 CDMA Product
Overview
WBT
1H
CDMA BTS/DBS3900
Installation and Testing
Training
ILT
5D
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900
Advanced Training
CDMA BSS6.0/7.0/8.0/9.0
Data Configuration
Training
ILT
5D
ILT
5D
O&M Engineer
BSC6680 Overview
CDMA BSS IPRAN Training
WBT
1H
ILT
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900
Operation and
ILT
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B
System Commissioning
5D
O&M Engineer
RNP Engineer
RNO Engineer
RNP Engineer
ILT
cdma2000 1X Radio
Network Design and
Planning Training
ILT
5D
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A
Radio Network Design and
Planning Training
ILT
4D
cdma2000 1X Radio
Network Optimization
Training
ILT
7D
cdma2000 1X Radio Network
Topics Optimization Training
ILT
5D
cdma2000 1xEV-DO
Rev.A Radio Network
ILT
4D
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A
Network Topics Optimization
Training
ILT
5D
CDMA-LTE Network
Construction Solutions
Training
ILT
5D
5D
557
2D
9.2 List of CDMA Product Technology Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
CDMA
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training
Ⅱ
5h
No limit
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Advanced Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training
Ⅲ
7
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training
Ⅳ
4
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 16
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 16
CDMA-LTE Network Construction Solutions Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 16
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Network Topics Optimization Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 16
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 16
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning
Training
558
9.3 CDMA Training Programs
9.3.1
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training
Training Path
Rev.A.
 List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A.
cdma2000 1X / EV-DO Rev.A System
Overview
ORA02
Lecture
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking.
 List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology.
1d
 Describe Structure of the BTS3900.
 Describe Modules Functions.
BTS/DBS3900 CDMA Installation and
Testing
ORB01
Lecture, Lab, WBT
 Describe Application Scenario.
 Describe Antenna.
4h
 Describe Key Technologies.
 Complete Antenna Installation.
Target Audience
 Complete Measuring VSWR.
BTS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
 Complete Locating Antenna-Feeder Fault.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
 Describe Precautions and FAQ.
Prerequisites
 Complete Operation of Analog PowerMeter.
 Complete Operation of Digital PowerMeter.
 Complete BTS Data Configuration.
Objectives
 Complete BTS Commissioning.
 Describe Operation / Maintenance System.
be able to:
 Complete Routine Operation / Maintenance.
 Describe various wireless communication

protocol and evolution of cdma2000.
 Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh
code application.

Duration
 Describe the reverse and forward Radio
Configurations and their correspondence.
5 hours
Class Size
 Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and
No limit
softer handoffs.
 List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO
559
9.3.2
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking.
 List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology.
cdma2000 1X / EV-DO Rev.A System
Overview
ORA02
Lecture
 Outline BSC6680 features.
 Describe the structure of BSC6680.
1d
 Describe the functions of all boards.
 Know the signaling flow in BSC6680.
BSC6680/BTS3900 CDMA BSS7.0
Product Description
ORC02
Lecture
 Describe BSC6680 typical configurations.
 Describe types of 3900 series BTS.
2d
 Outline functions of modules.
 Find typical application scenarios.
 Describe Antenna Functions.
BSC6680/BTS3900 CDMA Operation and
Maintenance
2d
ORC05
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Antenna Technologies.
 Describe Antenna Installation.
 Know about the basic knowledge about
Target Audience
ATM/IP.
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
 Outline the structure of operation and
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
maintenance system.
Prerequisites
 Describe IP address in CBSS.
 Describe the networking of the O/M system.
 Describe the software structure of BSS.
Objectives
 List the file structure of
 Perform LMT main operation.
be able to:
 Describe the routine maintenance tasks.
 Describe various wireless communication
 Fulfill BSC6680 routine maintenance tasks.
protocol and evolution of cdma2000.
 Outline the O/M system of BTS3900.
 Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh
 Manage the routine maintenance operation of
code application.
BTS3900.
 Describe the reverse and forward Radio
Configurations and their correspondence.
Duration
 Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and
softer handoffs.
BSC6680 BAM.
5 working days
Class Size
 List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO
Min 6, Max 12
Rev.A.
 List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A.
560
9.3.3
Training Path
 Describe the procedure of BSC6680
configuration.
BSC6680/BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Data
Configuration
5d
ORC06
Lecture, Lab
 Make the initial configuration script of
BSC6680.
 Implement the data loading and checking of
Target Audience
BSC6680.
 Describe the principle and process of BTS data
BSS Field Technicians, Second Line Operation
configuration.
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
 Complete BTS data configuration and
Prerequisites
commissioning.
Duration
Successful completion of the following program(s):
5 working days
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Field Operation and
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
561
9.3.4
Training Path
BSC6680.
Configuration
3d
ORC07
Lecture, Lab
BSC6680.
configuration.
BSC6680/BTS3900 CDMA
Troubleshooting
ORC08 Lecture, Lab, Discussion
commissioning.
2d
 List the basic process of BSC6680
troubleshooting.
Target Audience
 Describe the treatment of typical emergency
fault.
 Outline the procedure of the emergency
Prerequisites
maintenance.
 Understand the processing of troubleshooting.
 Handle the common faults and troubles of
CDMA BSS.
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
configuration.
562
9.3.5
Training Path
BSC6680.
Configuration
3d
ORC10 Lecture, Lab, Discussion
BSC6680.
configuration.
Troubleshooting
ORC11
commissioning.
2d
troubleshooting.
Target Audience
fault.
Prerequisites
maintenance.
CDMA BSS.
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
configuration.
563
9.3.6
CDMA BSC6680/BTS3900 Advanced Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe CDMA-LTE development and
BSC6680/BTS3900 CDMA Advanced
Training
ORC09
Lecture, Lab
features.
 Outline LTE network architecture.
4.5d
 Explain LTE key technologies.
 Describe LTE protocol and channel.
CDMA-LTE System Overview
ORA05
Lecture
 Describe LTE deployment.
 Describe CDMA-LTE solution.
0.5d
 Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 CDMA
Target Audience
Expansion.
 Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 Interface
Reconstruction.
 Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 CDMA
Prerequisites
Software Upgrade.
At least 2 years working experience in CDMA
 Understand CDMA EV-DO Troubleshooting.
wireless network operation and maintenance
 Understand CDMA interface Troubleshooting.
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
564
9.3.7
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
 Describe BSC6680 Typical Configuration.
 List the typical type of 3900 series BTS.
cdma2000 1X System Principle
ORA01
Lecture
 Describe the system structure of 3900 series
BTS.
1d
 State the function of each module.
 Outline application scenarios.
Product Overview
ORC01
Lecture
 Master the basic knowledge of Radio
Propagation.
1d
 Describe some typical Propagation Models and
their applicability.
 Comprehend the key parameters and
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and
Planning
3d
ORP02
Lecture
calculation methods of Link Budget.
 Know about the basic principle of Site, Antenna
/ Feeder Selection.
Target Audience
 Understand interference analysis method.
Network Deployment Engineers, System
 Describe the relative factors for capacity.
Technicians, System Engineers
 Implement the capacity planning.
Prerequisites
 List Paging Channel Construction.
 Describe LAC Planning.
At least 1 year working experience in CDMA
 Implement Paging Optimization.
 Describe the basic method for PN offset
planning in the CDMA network.
Objectives
 Outline the basic principle for Neighbor
planning in the CDMA network.
be able to:
 Describe
 Describe the development of mobile system.
 List the structure of cdma2000 1X network.
the precautions when planning the
PN and the Neighbor cells.
Duration
 State the signal process flow of cdma2000 1X.
5 working days
 State the key technology of cdma2000 1X.
 Describe the air interface of cdma2000 1X.
Class Size
 Describe the numbers in cdma2000 1X.
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe BSC6680 System Architecture.
 Describe BSC6680 Hardware Function.
565
9.3.8
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
CDMA.
 Analyze reverse power control algorithm.
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization
ORO01
Lecture
 Analyze forward power control algorithm.
 Optimize power control parameter.
7d
 Describe function and classification.
Target Audience
 Explain some conception related with handoff.
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,
 Apply different handoff algorithm.
System Engineers
 Optimize handoff parameters.
 Describe Registration Process.
Prerequisites
 Describe Voice Call Flow.
 Describe Handoff Flow.
 Describe Data Call Flow.
 Describe Huawei performance system
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning
structure.
Training
 Know the meaning of performance indexes.
Objectives
 Analyze abnormal performance indexes.
 Describe process of network optimization.
be able to:
 Solve typical problems of network.
 Describe the function of the cdma2000 1X
configuration message.

Duration
 Explain the important elements of the
7 working days
cdma2000 1X configuration message.
 Modify the parameters of configuration
Class Size
message.
Min 6, Max 12
 State the significance of power control in
566
9.3.9
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
be able to:
 List basic conceptions of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A System
Principle
ORA03
Lecture
 Outline 1xEV-DO Rev.A Air interface
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A key technologies
1d
 Coverage Planning Process.
 Link Budget and Propagation Model.
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network
Design and Planning
3d
ORP03
Lecture
 Balance between Forward and Reverse Link.
 Describe capacity planning procedure.
 Describe the principle of capacity planning.
Target Audience
 Outline feature of 1X EV_DO capacity
planning.
 Describe Subnet Capacity.
 Complete Subnet and Color Code Planning.
Prerequisites

Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
567
9.3.10 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
Rev.A configuration message.
 Modify the parameters of configuration
Optimization
4d
ORO03
Lecture
message.
 Describe
the significance of power control in
CDMA.
Target Audience
 List reverse power control algorithm.
 List power control data configuration.
System Engineers
 List the handoff algorithm command.
 Apply different handoff algorithms.
Prerequisites
 Optimize 1xEV-DO Rev.A handoff parameters.
 Describe signaling procedure of EVDO
networking.
 Outline key and messages and parameters.
 Describe rules and methods of EV-DO
Training
Performance analysis.
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design
 Understand meaning, statistic and optimization
and Planning Training
Objectives
of KPI.
Duration
4 working days
be able to:
 Describe the function of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
Class Size
configuration message.
Min 6, Max 12
 Explain the important elements of 1xEV-DO
568
9.3.11 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe Idle State Standby Policy.
 Describe Access State Assignment Policy.
Topics
5d
ORO02
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
Handoff Policy.
 Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances.
Target Audience
 Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy.
 Describe Traffic Balance.
System Engineers
 Describe Idle State Standby Policy.
 DescribeAccess State Assignment Policy.
Prerequisites
 Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
Handoff Policy.
 Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances.
 Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy.
 Describe Call Drop Mechanism and Statistic
Training
Analysis.
Objectives
 Describe Analysis and Solutions for Common
Types of Call Drop.
be able to:
 Describe Network Access Protocols.
 Describe Search Windows.
 Describe Cause Analysis of Network Access
 Complete Neighboring Cell Configuration and
Failures.
 Describe Analysis of and Solutions to a
Optimization.
 Complete Soft Handoff Optimization.
 Complete Hard Handoff Optimization.
Common Network Access Failure.
Duration
 Complete Coverage Optimization.
 Describe Capacity Expansion.
 Complete Main RRM Tasks.
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe Main RRM Algorithms.
 Describe Traffic Balance.
569
9.3.12 CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning
Training Path
 Key Technology of EV-DO Rev.B.
 Describe the evolution of
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Principle
ORA04
Lecture
EV-DO version.
 Describe the difference of EV-DO Rev.B and
Rev.A.
1d
 Describe the feature of EV-DO Rev.B system.
 Describe the key technology of EV-DO Rev.B
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System
Commissioning
ORC10
Lecture, Lab
system.
 Describe the structure and principle of EV-DO
1d
Rev.B system.
 Describe the data configuration procedure of
Target Audience
EV-DO Rev.B feature.
 Complete the data configuration of EV-DO
System Engineers
Rev.B.
Prerequisites




CDMA BSS7.0 Product Training

Objectives
Duration
be able to:
2 working days
Class Size
 EV-DO Evalution.
Min 6, Max 16
 Difference between EV-DO Rev.B and EV-DO
Rev.A.
 New Feature of EV-DO Rev.B.
570
9.3.13 CDMA BSS9.0 Data Configuration Training
Training Path
BSC6680.
Configuration
3d
N/A
BSC6680.
configuration.
Troubleshooting
N/A
commissioning.
2d
troubleshooting.
Target Audience
fault.
Prerequisites
maintenance.
CDMA BSS.
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 16
configuration.
571
9.3.14 CDMA-LTE Network Construction Solutions Training
Training Path
Objectives
CDMA-LTE Network Construction
Solutions Training
N/A
Lecture
be able to:
5d
 Understands the LTE principle and interface
technology
Target Audience
 Understands the LTE site construction plan
 Described the CDMA-LTE interoperability
principle and process
Prerequisites
 Understands LTE wireless network plan main
step and method
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
572
9.3.15 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Network Topics Optimization Training
Training Path
 Understand the data transmission process.
 Master a roadmap for locating throughput
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Network Topics
5d
N/A
Lecture
faults.
 Master basic Principles for Troubleshooting.
 Analyze why the RLP data retransmission rate
Target Audience
is high.
 Know how to optimize the RLP data
retransmission rate.
System Engineers
 Learn troubleshooting principles and methods.
Prerequisites
 Understand troubleshooting methods of
connection problems.
 Understand troubleshooting methods of call
drop problems.
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Radio Network Design and
 Understand troubleshooting methods of
Planning Training
handoff problems.
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
573
9.3.16 CDMA BSS IPRAN Training
Training Path
 Interface board IP address planning and
configuration
N/A
 Understand the Reliability mechanism of
IPRAN
5d
 Understand the principles of reliability detection
Target Audience
mechanism and application
 Grasp the basic concept of IP QoS
 Understand and master IPRAN product
implementation and application QoS
configuration
 Understanding IP transmission Fails
Prerequisites
troubleshooting
 Understanding IP transmission failure typical
case troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
 Master RAN device IP address allocation
principles
574
10 eLTE Training Courses
10.1
eLTE Training Path
eNodeB O&M Training
5d
10.2
List of eLTE Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
eLTE
Training
Class
Location
Size
Product Technology Training
Ⅱ
eNodeB O&M Training
575
5
6 ~ 12
10.3
eLTE
Product Technology Training
10.3.1 eNodeB O&M Training
 Briefly describes principles of radio interface
Course Schedule
techniques, such as OFDM and MIMO.
 Describes LTE channel structure and radio
frame structure.
LTE system overview
 Have a good command of eNodeB product
Lecturing
1 day
description.
 Have general knowledge of eNodeB product
architecture.
 Have a basic command of eNodeB
eNodeB product description
Lecturing
application scenarios and typical
configurations.
0.5 days
 Have general knowledge of O&M system
structure.
eNodeB O&M
 Log in to the eNodeB O&M system.
1 day
 Know eNodeB equipment management.
，
 Have a basic command of eNodeB transmission
management.
eNodeB data configuration
 Have a good command of eNodeB wireless
1.5 days
management.
 Back up eNodeB configuration files.
 Describe the eNodeB data configuration process.
eNodeB TOP alarm handling
 Have a good command of eNodeB data
configuration.
1 day
 Have a good command of eNodeB data
modification.
Training Object
 Have general knowledge of eNodeB TOP alarms.
Maintenance engineers
 Have a good command of eNodeB TOP alarm
handling.
 Have a basic command of communication
Duration
technologies and knowledge about the mobile
5 working days (2 working days for hands-on
communication system.
exercise)
Objectives
Class Size
 Describe mobile network evolution.
 Draw the E-UTRAN/EPC network architecture.
 Introduce E-UTRAN interfaces and protocols.
576
11 Wireless OSS Training Courses
11.1
Wireless OSS Training Path
M2000
PRS
Nastar
Probe
iManager PRS System
Administrator Training
(HP)
iManager Nastar System
(HP)
Assistant
iManager M2000 V2
System Administration
Training (SUN)
ILT
4.5D
iManager M2000 V2
System Administration
Training (ATAE Cluster)
ILT
Routine 0&M
3D
iManager M2000
V200R011 to V200R012
Delta Training
ILT
1D
ILT
1D
iManager PRS System
(ATAE)
ILT
1D
ILT
1D
iManager Nastar System
(ATAE)
ILT
1D
iManager M2000
V200R012 Client
Operation & Maintenance
Training
ILT
2.5D
iManager Nastar GSM
Performance Analysis
System Application
Training
ILT
2D
RNO
iManager PRS Client
Application Training
ILT
1D
iManager Nastar
WCDMA Performance
Analysis System
Application Training
ILT
2D
iManager Nastar LTE
Performance Analysis
System Application
Training
ILT
577
2D
GENEX Probe GSM
Operation Training
ILT
1D
1D
1D
1D
ILT
GENEX Probe LTE
Operation Training
ILT
ILT
GENEX Assistant
WCDMA Operation
Training
ILT
1D
GENEX Probe WCDMA
Operation Training
ILT
GENEX Assistant GSM
Operation Training
GENEX Assistant LTE
Operation Training
1D
11.2
List of Wireless OSS Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
M2000
Ⅱ
4.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2.5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R013 New Features Training
Ⅰ
1
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training(Sun)
Ⅱ
4.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
4.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2.5
6 ~ 12
Ⅰ
1
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R013 System Administration Training(ATAE
Cluster)
iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance
Training
Cluster)
Training
Cluster)
Training
578
11.3
M2000 Training Programs
11.3.1 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administration Training(Sun)
Training Path
administration
Personnel who works on M2000 server
Operation System Management
NW11
Lecture
administration
Personnel who works on M2000 system
0.33d
administration
Database Management
NW12
Lecture
administration
0.33d
administration
Prerequisites
iManager M2000V200R013 OSS Solution SUN
0.5d
NW22
Lecture
 Having basic knowledge in telecommunication
and mobile communication
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R013 System
Administration
NW25
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
 Describe the basic concept of M2000
1d
 Master the structure of M2000 system
 Describe the networking of M2000 system
iManager M2000V200R013 Server
Operation and Maintenance - SUN
NW26
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 The types of M2000 northbound interfaces and
their suitable scenarios
1.42d
 The functions of M2000 northbound interfaces
 How to configure M2000 northbound interfaces
 How to use and maintenance M2000
iManager M2000V200R013
Troubleshooting
NW27
Lecture
northbound interfaces
0.58d

 Describe the commands in UNIX system.
 Grasp the UNIX hard disk management.
iManager M2000V200R013 Northbound
Interface Introduction
0.33d
NW29
Lecture
 Grasp the UNIX network configuration
management.
 Grasp the UNIX backup and restoration.
 Initialize and drop devices in database.
Target Audience
 Define the database parameters.
 Perform database security administration.
administration
 Perform database backup and restore.
 Describe topology management function and
administration
perform topology management.
 Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
 Collect and browse logs from M2000.
579
 Implement the routine maintenance items of
 Describe the method to eliminate faults in
M2000V2 system.
M2000V2 such as checking the disk space
 Collect files and logs for M2000V2 problem
usage, querying the log information and
checking software version.
locating.
 Manage the M2000V2 and database
 Perform basic troubleshooting to M2000V2
processes.
 Perform M2000V2 data backup and
application, database and operating system.
Duration
restoration.
4.5 working days
 Install the M2000V2 system license.
 Install and upgrade the NE mediation software.
Class Size
 Describe the strictly prohibited operations.
Min 6, Max 12
580
11.3.2 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administration Training(ATAE Cluster)
Training Path
Objectives
Overview - ATAE Cluster
NW21
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
0.5d
 Describe ATAE platform
 Master the basic concept and structure of ATAE
Cluster
Administration
NW25
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Master the networking and technology solution
1d
of ATAE Cluster
iManager M2000V200R013 ATAE Cluster
Server Operation and Maintenance
1.17d
NW28
Lecture, Lab, Demo

0.33d
NW29
Lecture
 Describe the system structure and basic
function of OSMU
 Master the system management of OSMU
Target Audience
 Master the equipment management, service
Personnel who require a general knowledge of
management, software management, general
iManager M2000V2 ATAE Cluster system
maintenance OSMU
 Master the method to backup and restore the
different data types of ATAE Cluster
administration

administration
administration
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication and
Class Size
mobile communication
Min 6, Max 12
581
11.3.3 iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the performance counter and object
categories in M2000V2 system.
Overview - SUN
NW20
Lecture
 Query the performance result by the setting
conditions.
0.5d
 Export the performance result files.
 Check the performance task status.
iManager M2000V200R013 Client Monitor
and Maintenance
1.17d
NW23
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Query the NE configuration data from
M2000V2 client.
 Configure data to NE from M2000V2 client.
 Describe the performance counter categories
and the difference between them.
iManager M2000V200R013 Client
Performance and Maintenance
NW24
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Describe the performance object categories.
0.83d
conditions.
Target Audience
 Export the performance result file.
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance
 Define the performance query template.
Technician and Engineer
M2000V2 Performance Operation and
 Describe the overall architecture, hardware
Maintenance Technician and Engineer
architecture, software architecture, typical
configuration and interfaces of the M2000V2.
iManager M2000V2 system
 Describe the software structure of the
Prerequisites
M2000V2 equipment, the functions of different
parts.
 Describe the system reliability of the M2000
system from the aspects of system security.
Objectives
 Describe the performance specifications of the
M2000 system, including system capacity,
be able to:
bandwidth, storage capacity, processing
 Describe the alarm categories and levels in
capability, and client number.
M2000V2 system.
Duration
 Describe the alarm processing ability
2.5 working days
supported by the M2000V2 server.
 Browse and query the current alarms in
Class Size
M2000V2 clients.
Min 6, Max 12
 Manage the alarm level and name in M2000V2
and NE.
582
11.3.4 iManager M2000V200R013 New Features Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R013 Delta(GUI)
NW40
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
be able to:
 The new function of M2000V2R13
Target Audience
 The changes of functions of M2000 GUI
between M2000V2R12 and R13 version

Duration
1 working day
administration
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
583
Training Path
administration
NW11
Lecture
administration
0.33d
administration
Database Management
NW12
Lecture
Prerequisites
0.33d
Objectives
0.5d
NW22
Lecture
be able to:
Administration
NW25
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
NW26
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1.42d

Troubleshooting
NW27
Lecture
0.58d
management.
0.33d
NW29
Lecture
Target Audience
administration
administration
administration
administration
584
processes.
locating.
restoration.
Duration
4.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
M2000V2 system.
585
Training Path
Objectives
NW21
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
0.5d
Cluster
Administration
NW25
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
of ATAE Cluster
1.17d
NW28
Lecture, Lab, Demo

0.33d
NW29
Lecture
function of OSMU
Target Audience
maintenance OSMU
administration

administration
administration
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
586
Training Path
Overview - SUN
NW20
Lecture
conditions.
0.5d
and Maintenance
1.17d
NW23
Lecture, Lab, Demo
M2000V2 client.
NW24
Lecture, Lab, Demo
0.83d
conditions.
Target Audience
Prerequisites
parts.
Objectives
be able to:
M2000V2 system.
Duration
2.5 working days
Class Size
M2000V2 clients.
Min 6, Max 12
and NE.
587
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R012 Delta(GUI)
NW40
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
be able to:
Target Audience

Duration
1 working day
administration
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
588
Training Path
administration
NW11
Lecture
administration
0.33d
administration
Database Management
NW12
Lecture
Prerequisites
0.33d
Objectives
0.5d
NW32
Lecture
be able to:
Administration
NW35
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
NW36
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1.42d

Troubleshooting
NW37
Lecture
0.58d
management.
0.33d
NW39
Lecture
Target Audience
administration
administration
administration
administration
589
processes.
locating.
restoration.
Duration
4.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
M2000V2 system.
590
Training Path
Objectives
NW31
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
0.5d
Cluster
Administration
NW35
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
of ATAE Cluster
1.17d
NW38
Lecture, Lab, Demo

0.33d
NW39
Lecture
function of OSMU
Target Audience
maintenance OSMU
administration

administration
administration
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
591
Training Path
Overview - SUN
NW30
Lecture
conditions.
0.5d
and Maintenance
1.17d
NW33
Lecture, Lab, Demo
M2000V2 client.
NW34
Lecture, Lab, Demo
0.83d
conditions.
Target Audience
Prerequisites
parts.
Objectives
be able to:
M2000V2 system.
Duration
2.5 working days
Class Size
M2000V2 clients.
Min 6, Max 12
and NE.
592
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R011 Delta(GUI
NW41
Lecture, Lab, Demo
1d
be able to:
Target Audience

Duration
1 working day
administration
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
593
12 PS Training Courses
12.1
PS Training Path
12.2
List of PS Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
PS
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Principle Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Ⅲ
10
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Ⅲ
9
6 ~ 12
USN9810 Delta and new feature Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
The Difference between ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G)
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Ⅲ
8
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
8
6 ~ 12
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Ⅲ
7
6 ~ 12
UGW9811 Delta and new feature Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (Windows)
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (UNIX)
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA)
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training
(2G/3G/4G )
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training
(2G/3G/4G)
594
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
EPC Alarm Monitoring and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
PS Performance Monitoring and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
PS Performance Analysis Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Performance Monitoring and Management Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
PS Emergency Recovery Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
EPC Emergency Recovery Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
GUL Convergence Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
EPC VOLTE Solution Training (CSFB)
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
EPC VOLTE Solution Training (SRVCC)
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
PS IPv6 Feature Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
MME POOL Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
PS QOS Training
Ⅳ
1
6 ~ 12
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
PS Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Signaling Analysis Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Troubleshooting Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
EPC Network Planning and Design Training
Ⅳ
2
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
595
uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
WASN Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
MAG9811 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
TGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
PS Nastar Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
PS PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
HCNA LTE HUAWEI Certification
Ⅱ
6
6 ~ 12
HCNP EPC HUAWEI Certification
Ⅲ
13
6 ~ 12
HCIE EPC HUAWEI Certification
Ⅳ
8
6 ~ 12
596
12.3
PS Training Programs
12.3.1 GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
be able to:
OWA01
Lecture
2d
 Describe the UMTS PS Network Structure.
 Describe the PS Core Network interface and
Target Audience
Protocol.
 Describe the PS Core Network Working
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line
Principle.
Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
 A general mobile communication and data
2 working days
Class Size
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
597
12.3.2 EPC Principle Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OEA10
Lecture, LVC
2d
 Describe the EPC network structure.
 Describe the EPC network interface and
Target Audience
protocol.
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel
Prerequisites
 Describe the EPC network working procedures.
Duration
A general understanding of mobile communication
and data communication.
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
598
12.3.3 EPC Equipment Commissioning Training
Training Path
communication.
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training
Objectives
OEB90
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
be able to:
 Perform USN9810 commissioning.
Target Audience
 Perform UGW9811 commissioning.
Duration
2 working days
Engineer
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
A general understanding of GPRS network
principle, mobile communication and data
599
12.3.4 USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G )
Training Path
 Describe system structure and hardware
structure of USN9810.
USN ATCA platform Operation and
OEB9B
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Perform software related installation and
upgrade procedure.
3d
 Perform hardware operation and maintenance.
Target Audience
 Perform the Routine Operation and
Maintenance including security management,
system information management, alarm
Engineer
management, trace management, data
management, license management,
Prerequisites
performance management.
Duration
3 working days
Successful completion of the program EPC
Principle Fundamental Training.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
600
12.3.5 USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration
Training (4G)
OEB9B
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
3d
 Describe the functions of protocol stacks of
different interfaces.
Target Audience
 Perform configuration of USN hardware,
System Information, interworking with eNodeB,
HSS, MME, S-GW, DNS and NTP.
Engineer
 Perform configuration of mobility management
Prerequisites
and session management.
Duration
Successful completion of the program USN ATCA
3 working days
Class Size
platform Operation and Maintenance Training .
Min 6, Max 12
601
12.3.6 USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
be able to:
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data
Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
OEB9B
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Perform configuration of SGSN Gb, Iu-PS, Gn,
10d
Ga and Gr interfaces.
Target Audience
 Perform configuration of SGSN basic service.
Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
602
12.3.7 USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration
Training (2G/3G)
OEB91
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
9d
 Perform configuration of SGSN hardware.
 Perform configuration of SGSN Gb, Iu-PS, Gn,
Target Audience
Ga and Gr interfaces.
 Perform configuration of SGSN basic service.
Duration
Engineer
9 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
603
12.3.8 USN9810 Delta and new feature Training
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 Delta and new feature Training
be able to:
OEB10
Lecture
1d
 Perform data Describe basic concept of VPN,
APN and charging.
Target Audience
 Perform configuration of VPN, APN and
charging.
 Describe the SA principles, content based
Engineer
charging principles and PCC concepts.
Prerequisites
 Perform configuration of the SA function,
service control function and PCC.
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
604
12.3.9 USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution
Training
OEB31
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
2d
 Understand principle of international roaming.
 Master roaming data configurations of
Target Audience
SGSN/GGSN/DNS/FW.
 Understand principle of APN rectify.
 Master data configurations of APN rectify.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
605
12.3.10 The Difference between ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program SGSN
(CPCI) data configuration Training.
CPCI and ATCA SGSN Delta Training
OWB25
Lecture, Lab
Objectives
3d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe Software Difference Between ATCA
and CPCI.
 Describe Hardware Difference Between ATCA
Engineer
and CPCI.
Prerequisites
 Describe the Routine Operation and
Maintenance of ATCA SGSN.
A general mobile communication and data
communication.
Duration
Successful completion of the program
GPRS/UMTS Principle Training.
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
(CPCI) Routine Operation and Maintenance
training.
606
12.3.11 UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
structure of UGW9811.
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
OEB21
Lecture, Lab, Demo
upgrade procedure.
Target Audience
Maintenance including authorization
management, system information management,
Engineer
alarm management, trace management ,log
management, license management ,patch
Prerequisites
management ,data backup and restore.
Duration
2 working days
Principle Training.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
607
12.3.12 UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Training Path
Objectives
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration
Training
OEB30
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
6d
 Perform data configuration of S1-U/S11, S5/S8
and SGi interfaces Describe basic concept of
VPN, APN and charging.
SA Application Configuration Training
OWD30
Lecture, Lab
charging.
2d
Target Audience
Engineer
 Describe GGSN SA Structure.
Second line Maintenance Engineer, Senior
 Perform the SA application content base
charging and service control.
Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program of UGW
Min 6, Max 12
Routine Operation and Maintenance Training.
608
12.3.13 UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
Objectives
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data
OED99
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
6d
OWD30
Lecture, Lab
charging.
2d
Target Audience
Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
609
12.3.14 UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Training Path
Objectives
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training
be able to:
OED99
Lecture, Lab, Demo
5d
APN and charging.
OWD30
Lecture, Lab
charging.
2d
Target Audience
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
610
12.3.15 UGW9811 Delta and new feature Training
Training Path
Objectives
UGW9811 Delta and new feature Training
be able to:
OED10
Lecture
1d
APN and charging.
Target Audience
charging.
Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
611
12.3.16 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (Windows)
Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (Windows)
Training
OWI30
Lecture, Lab
be able to:
2d
 Describe the charging principle of PS core
network.
Target Audience
 Describe the CG9812 system structure.
 Configure key maintenance parameters in CG
server.
Engineer
 Perform Routine Operation and Maintenance of
Prerequisites
CG server.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.
Min 6, Max 12
612
12.3.17 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (UNIX)
Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (UNIX) Training
be able to:
OWI31
Lecture, Lab
2d
 Describe the charging principle of PS core
network.
Target Audience
 Describe the CG9812 system structure.
 Configure key maintenance parameters in CG
server.
Engineer
Prerequisites
Maintenance of CG server.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
613
12.3.18 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA)
Training Path
Get familiar with TCP/IP.
Objectives
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance
Training(ATCA)
OWI50
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
be able to:
 Perform CG9812 routine maintenance.
Target Audience
 Master CG9812 client software installation and
CDR browsing/query.
Duration
Engineer
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
614
12.3.19 From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
be able to:
OEA11
Lecture
3d
 Describe difference between GPRS Protocol
and EPC Protocol.
Target Audience
 Describe different interface between GPRS
and EPC network.
 Perform the different routine operation and
Engineer
maintenance between GPRS and EPC
Prerequisites
equipment.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
Min 6, Max 12
615
12.3.20 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program of
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
OWB93
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Understand basic alarm.
 Understand basic method of alarm monitoring
Engineer
and management.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1 years related experience in PS equipment
maintenance.
616
12.3.21 EPC Alarm Monitoring and Management Training
Training Path
maintenance.
EPC Alarm Monitoring and Management
Training
1d
OEB93
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
 Master the basic alarm monitoring.
 Master the basic alarm analysis and process.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
617
12.3.22 PS Performance Monitoring and Management Training
Training Path
PS Performance Monitoring Training
OWB92
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Master Key Performance Indicator of SGSN.
 Master Key Performance Indicator of GGSN.
 Perform KPI collection method.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
618
12.3.23 PS Performance Analysis Training
Training Path
PS Performance Analysis Training
OWW66
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
2d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Master System Resource KPI Analysis.
 Master the Signaling Procedure KPI Analysis
Engineer
overview.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
619
12.3.24 EPC Performance Monitoring and Management Training
Training Path
EPC Performance Monitoring and
Management Training
OEB92
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe the KPIs in USN.
 Describe the KPIs in UGW.
 Describe the KPIs in CG.
Engineer
Prerequisites
 Master the observation method of KPI.
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
620
12.3.25 PS Emergency Recovery Training
Training Path
PS Emergency Recovery Training
OWB91
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Master SGSN9810 Emergency O/M.
 Master GGSN9811 Emergency O/M.
 Master CG9812 Emergency O/M.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
621
12.3.26 EPC Emergency Recovery Training
Training Path
EPC Emergency Recovery Training
OWB91
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Master USN9810 Emergency O/M.
 Master UGW9811 Emergency O/M.
 Master CG9812 Emergency O/M.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
622
12.3.27 GUL Convergence Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe EPC Principle.
GUL Convergence Training
OWA90
Lecture, LVC
 Outline EPC Network Deployment Policy.
 Outline EPC Network Element Deployment
3d
Policy.
Target Audience
 Describe the networking of GUL interoperation.
 Describe the principle of GUL Interoperation.
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel
 Describe key point of GUL Interoperation
Prerequisites
Deployment.
Duration
3 working days
Principle Fundamental and GPRS/UMTS PS
Class Size
Fundamental Training.
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
623
12.3.28 EPC VOLTE Solution Training (CSFB)
Training Path
OEB33
Lecture
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Understand network structure of CSFB.
 Understand signaling analysis of CSFB.
Duration
Engineer
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
624
12.3.29 EPC VOLTE Solution Training (SRVCC)
Training Path
EPC VOLTE Solution Training (SRVCC)
OEB30
Lecture
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Understand network structure of SRVCC.
 Understand signaling analysis of SRVCC.
Duration
Engineer
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
625
12.3.30 eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training
Training Path
Training.
Objectives
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature
Training
1d
OED99
Lecture
be able to:
 Understand of the Feature of eMBMS Smart
Target Audience
Content Delivery.
 Implementation of eMBMS Smart Content
Engineer
Delivery.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program of EPC
626
12.3.31 PS IPv6 Feature Training
Training Path
Equipment Commissioning Training.
IPv6 Solution for PS/EPC
OEY00
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe the IPv6 implementation for PS and
EPC.
 Describe the data configuration for IPv6
Engineer
Prerequisites
solution in PS and EPC.
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program of EPC Data
Configuration Training.
627
12.3.32 GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training
Training Path
Routine Operation and Maintenance training.
Successful completion of the program SGSN data
SGSN POOL Training
OWB76
Lecture, Lab, Case,
configuration Training.
4d
Objectives
Discussion
Target Audience
be able to:
 Understand the principle of SGSN POOL.
 Perform data configuration of SGSN POOL.
Engineer
 Perform Operation and Maintenance of SGSN
POOL.
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
communication.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
628
12.3.33 MME POOL Training
Training Path
Training (2G/3G/4G ).
Successful completion of the program of USN9810
MME POOL Training
OEB32
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Data Configuration Training.
2d
Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
 Understand principle of MME pool.
 Master data configuration of MME pool.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program of USN
ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance
629
12.3.34 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training
Training Path
Objectives
PS Network Security Training
be able to:
OWB50
Lecture, Lab
1d
 Describe the Common Network Attack to
CN-PS.
Target Audience
 Perform the configuration to avoid of typical
Senior Engineer, Specialist, Expert
Prerequisites
network attack.
Duration
Successful completion of the programs.
SGSN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training.
1 working day
Class Size
GGSN9811 Operation and Maintenance Training.
Min 6, Max 12
630
12.3.35 PS QOS Training
Training Path
Objectives
PS QOS Training
be able to:
OWA11
Lecture
1d
 Describe PS QoS parameter.
 Describe PS QoS negotiation process.
Target Audience
 Describe PS service QoS parameter default
Routine Maintenance Engineer, Optimization
value.
Engineer, Senior Maintenance Engineer.
 Describe SGSN QoS handling.
Prerequisites
 Describe UE and Radio Part QoS handling.
Duration
Get familiar with TCP/IP and GPRS principle.
1 working day
Class Size
2 years related experience in PS domain.
Min 6, Max 12
631
12.3.36 IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
Training Path
technology.
 Describe interconnection solution between PS
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
OWA06
Lecture, Lab, Demo
and CE.
 Describe IP Planning between PS and CE.
4d
 Describe Data configuration between PS and
Target Audience
CE.
 Describe Iu/Gb/Gr/Gn/Ga interface networking
and reliability solution.
 Describe O/M interface networking and
Prerequisites
reliability solution.
 Describe PS networking troubleshooting
method.
Get familiar with TCP/IP and GPRS Principle.
Objectives
 Common troubleshooting case study.
Duration
be able to:
4 working days
Class Size
 Describe TCP/IP fundamental related to
Min 6, Max 12
GPRS/UMTS PS network.
 Describe IP backbone and key Datacom
632
12.3.37 PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and
Troubleshooting
OWB76
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
2d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe important procedures and parameters
of MM/SM.
Prerequisites
 Perform MM/SM/Service Troubleshooting.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
633
12.3.38 PS Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
PS Interface Signaling Analysis and
OWB77
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
3d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe important procedures and parameters
of RANAP/MAP/GTP.
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
634
12.3.39 PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training
OWA78
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Objectives
2d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Perform locating method of Data Transfer fault.
 Perform Troubleshooting method of Data
Prerequisites
Transfer fault.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance.
635
12.3.40 EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Perform USN9810 signaling tracing method.
EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training
OEA02
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Perform S1-MME interface signaling flow and
key parameters analysis.
2d
 Perform S6a interface signaling flow and key
Target Audience
parameters analysis.
 Perform S5/S8 interface signaling flow and key
EPC Engineer and Experts, PS Network Planning
Engineer, System Design Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
636
12.3.41 EPC Signaling Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OEA03
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
 Perform UGW9811 signaling tracing method.
Target Audience
 Perform EMM signaling flow and key
EPC Engineer and Experts, PS Network Planning
Engineer, System Design Engineer
 Perform ESM signaling flow and key
Prerequisites
Duration
communication.
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
637
12.3.42 EPC Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OEB04
Lecture, Lab, Demo
3d
 Describe USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
troubleshooting method.
Target Audience
 Common USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
Senior maintenance Engineer, Specialist, Experts
related troubleshooting case study.
Prerequisites
 Perform USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
related fault located with signaling analysis.
Duration
EPC USN9810 Data Configuration Training.
3 working days
Class Size
EPC UGW9811 Data Configuration Training.
Min 6, Max 12
638
12.3.43 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training
Training Path
SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Optimization Training
OWB67
Lecture, Lab
Objectives
3d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Outline the general procedure of PS core
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimization Engineer,
network optimization.
System Design Engineer, Senior Engineer and
 Analyze the PS core network KPI.
Experts
 Describe Traffic Statistics Model Extraction.
Prerequisites
 Master Evaluation and Optimization of the
SGSN9810/GGSN9811/DNS/CG Resource
communication.
Capacity.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
SGSN/GGSN Routine Operation and Maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
training.
639
12.3.44 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Planning Training
OWB68
Lecture
Objectives
2d
be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe PS Network Planning Principle.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning Engineer,
 Perform the Networking Scheme for
System Design Engineer, Senior Engineer and
Gb/Iu/SS7/Gn/Gp/OM/Ga/Li/Gy and
Experts
GGSN-SUR, GGSN-SCCG networking
Prerequisites
scheme.
Duration
communication.
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
SGSN/GGSN Routine Operation and Maintenance
training.
640
12.3.45 EPC Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
EPC Network Planning and Design
Training
OEA07 Lecture, Case, Discussion
be able to:
2d
 Describe EPC planning and designing steps.
 Determine IP address, QoS, APN needs for
Target Audience
different services.
PS Network Planning Engineer, System Design
 Determine capacity for different interfaces.
Engineer, Senior Engineer and Experts
 Determine the internetworking for different
Prerequisites
interfaces.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Protocol and Procedure Training.
Equipment Commissioning Training
641
12.3.46 iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
M2000 Routine Operation and
OWL21
Lecture, Lab
configuration and interfaces of the M2000.
 Describe the software structure of the M2000
2d
equipment, the functions of different parts.
Target Audience
Maintenance of M2000 client.
Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
642
12.3.47 DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
of DNS9816.
 Describe the theory of system realizing and
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance
Training
OEN11
Lecture, Lab, Demo
query procedure of DNS9816.
1d
architecture of DNS9816.
Target Audience
 Perform the basic data configurations of
DNS9816.
 Perform the data configurations of optional
features about equipment.
Engineer.
 Perform the routine operation and
Prerequisites
maintenance.
Duration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the main functions and key features
643
12.3.48 uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
be able to:
OWB34
Lecture, Lab
4d
 Describe the physical and logical structure of
UAG equipment.
Target Audience
 Explain the functions of different boards in
UAG.
 Perform the hardware, eIU, Iu-PS, Iu-Cs and
Engineer
Prerequisites
AHR/NTP interface data configuration of UAG.
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
644
12.3.49 WASN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
structure of WASN9770.
 Describe signaling flow and message.
WASN9770 Operation and Maintenance
Training
5d
OXE30
Lecture, Lab
 Perform operation and maintenance of
hardware and software.
 Perform data configuration of basic service,
Target Audience
route, and VPN.
 Describe typical application scenarios of IP-CS
authentication access, Mobile IP, hot-lining,
Engineer
Eth-CS.
 Perform system commissioning and
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
645
12.3.50 MAG9811 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Understand principle of AP and Subscriber
MAG9811 Engineer Training
OXC11
Lecture, Lab, Demo
accessing like some concept of PPPOE and
DHCP.
3d
 Understand WLAN network structure solution.
Target Audience
 Understand MAG9811 software and hardware
structure.
 Master MAG9811 Routine O/M.
Engineer
 Master MAG9811 data configuration.
 Master MAG9811 Subscriber management.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
646
12.3.51 TGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the physical and logical structure of
the TGW.
TGW9811 Operation and Maintenance
Training
OXT11
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Describe the board function of TGW.
 Perform the software upgrade and
3d
patch/license loading procedure.
Target Audience
 Perform the routine operation and
maintenance.
TGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Engineer,
 Perform configuration of Wu, Wm and Gn’
Second line Engineer, Technical Support Engineer
interfaces.
Prerequisites
 Perform configuration of Charging.
 Perform configuration to AAA.
 Perform commissioning of TGW.
Get familiar with TCP/IP and Principle.
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe WLAN solution and product overview.
647
12.3.52 CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Master principle of WAG.
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance
Training
4d
OWX90
Lecture, Lab
 Describe WAG hardware structure.
 Master WAG software structure.
 Master WAG routine operation and
Target Audience
maintenance.
 Master WAG interface data configuration.
 Master WAG service provisioning and related
skill.
Engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
648
12.3.53 CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance
Training
7d
ORP03
Lecture, Lab
be able to:
 Perform the routine and emergency operation
of CDMA PDSN equipments.
Target Audience
 Perform data configuration for equipment
interconnection and charging of PDSN.
 Implement data configuration for service of
Engineer
Prerequisites
CDMA PDSN.
Duration
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
649
12.3.54 CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and
Maintenance Delta Training
ORH20
Lecture, Lab, Demo
be able to:
2d
 Describe HA system structure and function.
 Master deference between HA and PDSN.
Target Audience
 Describe HA hardware structure.
 Master HA software structure.
 Master HA routine operation and maintenance.
Engineer
 Master HA interface data configuration and
Prerequisites
system data configuration.
 Describe principle of content based charging.
 Describe CSN/Mobile IP/Follow control feature.
Duration
Successful completion of the program of CDMA
2 working days
PDSN Operation and Maintenance.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
650
12.3.55 PS Nastar Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
PS Nastar Training
be able to:
OWT12
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
 Describe PS Nastar architecture, hardware
deployment and feature function.
Target Audience
 Grasp PS Nastar typical networking, software
installation.
 Perform client service operation, configuration
Prerequisites
and maintenance.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
651
12.3.56 PS PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Routine Operation and Maintenance training.
Successful completion of the program GGSN data
PS PRS Engineer Training
OWW01
Lecture, Lab, Demo
configuration Training.
2d
Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
 Master function and system structure of PRS.
 Master hardware deployment.
Engineer
 Master PRS operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites

Duration
communication.
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program GGSN
652
12.3.57 HCNA LTE HUAWEI Certification
Training Path
 Describe the channel structure of the radio
interface.
OEA10
Lecture, LVC
 Describe the time-domain structure in the radio
interface in UL and DL for both FDD and TDD
2d
mode.
 Describe the Frequency-domain structure in
the radio interface in UL and DL for both FDD
LTE System Overview Training
and TDD mode.
N/A
Lecture
1d
 Have a good understanding of the OFDM
principle, signal generation and processing.
 Detail the reference symbols in DL.
LTE Field Maintenance Training
 Describe MIMO technology.
N/A
Lecture, Lab
2d
 Outline MBMS for LTE.
 Have a good understanding of the SC-FDMA
principle, signal generation and processing.
EPC Principle Testing Training
OEA07
Lecture, Lab, Demo
 Describe Huawei eNodeB Family.
 Describe Huawei LTE products and application
1d
scenarios.
Target Audience
 Describe Huawei LTE products Operation and
Maintenance System.
 Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB.
Engineer
 Describe the logical structure of eNodeB.
 Describe the working principle and functions of
Prerequisites
eNodeB boards.
 Describe the procedure of eNodeB
commissioning.
Objectives
 Describe the related concept of eNodeB
software and configuration file.
be able to:
 Querying the current version of eNodeB.
 Describe the evolution of cellular networks.
 Use USB disk to commission the eNodeB.
 Summarize the evolution of 3GPP releases,
 Commission the eNodeB through LMT.
 Verify commissioning result
from release 99 to release 10.
 Power up/down the eNodeB and connect up
 Explain the logical architecture of EPS
LMT to the node.
(E-UTRAN and EPC).
 Give an overview of the interfaces in EPS.
 Find the alarm list of eNodeB.
 Describe the Evolved Packet Core (EPC).
 Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB.
 Describe the role of the MME and the S-GW.
 Find faulty hardware units and replace them.
 Describe the S1, X2 and radio-interface and

their protocol stacks.
 Describe the EPC network structure.
 Describe the radio interface techniques used in
 Describe the EPC network interface and
uplink and downlink.
653
protocol.
 Describe the EPC network working procedures.
Duration
6 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
654
12.3.58 HCNP EPC HUAWEI Certification
Training Path
management, trace management, data
management, license management,
EPC HSS Data Configuration
OEB34
Lecture
2d
USN ATCA platform Operation and
N/A
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration
Training (4G) (HC)
N/A
Lecture, Lab, Demo
structure of UGW9811.
3d
upgrade procedure.
Training (HC)
2d
N/A
Lecture, Lab, Demo
Maintenance including authorization
management, system information management,
alarm management, trace management ,log
management, license management ,patch
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration
Training (HC)
N/A
Lecture, Lab, Demo
management ,data backup and restore.
4d
Target Audience
Operation and Maintenance Engineer; Technical
Support Engineer
charging.
Prerequisites
Objectives
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 product function
and application.
be able to:
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 interface
protocol function.
structure of USN9810.
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 physical and
logical structure.
upgrade procedure.
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 board function.
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 signaling flow.
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 software
Maintenance including security management,
structure.
system information management, alarm
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 IP planning.
655
 Perform installation of operation PGW client.
 Describe Board configuration principle.
 Perform the method of adding or deleting
 Describe data configuration principles and
subscriber.
steps.
 Modify subscription according to customer
 Perform Hardware Data Configuration of
requirement.
USCDB.
 Perform configuration of subscription data.
 Perform Local Office Data Configuration of
 Describe the steps of HSS9820 data
USCDB.
 Perform Signaling Data Configuration of
configuration.
 Perform hardware and system data
configuration.
USCDB.
Duration
 Perform interface data configuration.
validity.
13 working days
Class Size
 Perform basic debugging of EPC-HSS9820.
Min 6, Max 12
656
12.3.59 HCIE EPC HUAWEI Certification
Training Path
be able to:
 Understand network structure of CSFB.
OEB33
Lecture
 Understand signaling analysis of CSFB.
1d
OEA03
Lecture, Lab, Demo
2d
 Describe USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
troubleshooting method.
 Common USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
OEB04
Lecture, Lab, Demo
3d
related troubleshooting case study.
 Perform USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
related fault located with signaling analysis.
EPC Network Planning and Design
Training
OEA07 Lecture, Case, Discussion
 Describe EPC planning and designing steps.
 Determine IP address, QoS, APN needs for
2d
different services.
Target Audience
 Determine capacity for different interfaces.
 Determine the internetworking for different
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel,PS
interfaces.
Network Planning Engineer, System Design
Engineer, Senior Engineer and Experts
Duration
Prerequisites
8 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
657
13 Mobile Softswitch(GSM/UMTS) Training Courses
Network
Planning
Prerequi
sites
13.1
WCDMA-CS Training Path
GSM and UMTS Softswitch
Core Network Principle
WBT(Pre-learning)
0.5H
GU CS Core Network
Design Overview
WBT(Pre-learning)
0.5H
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch
Core Network Design
Training
ILT
3D
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI)
Hardware System Training
ILT
Operation and Maintenance /
Commissioning (Network Construction)
MSOFTX3000(ATCA)
System and Principle
WBT(Pre-learning)
2H
UMG8900 System
Overview
WBT(Pre-learning)
Mobile SoftSwitch
ILT
2D
1H
1D
ILT
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data
ILT
6D
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA)
Training
ILT
3D
GU UMG8900 Hardware
System Training
UMG8900 Data
ILT
2D
GU UMG8900 Operation
ILT
2D
1D
GTSOFTX3000 Product
Training
10D
UGC3200 (Convergent
Gateway Office) Operation
ILT
1D
GSM-R Feature Training
ILT
GSM-R UMG8900 Product
Training
ILT
5D
SmartCare Voice Service
Quality Improvement
Training
ILT
2D
6D
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA)
Hardware System Training
ILT
1D
ILT
ILT
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI)
Training
ILT
3D
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data
5D
SEQ Analyst and Probe
ILT
3D
Maintenance Skill Enhancement
Prerequisites
Advanced Operation and Maintenance
CS O&M Training
MSS Service Provision
Training
ILT
5D
GSM/UMTS Typical
Signaling Flow Training
ILT
3D
2G/3G Core Network
Sharing Training
MSS XPTU Configuration
Training (ETSI)
ILT
1D
ILT
1D
MSS Signaling Analysis
Training
ILT
5D
MSS IP Technology
Training
ILT
5D
Advanced Troubleshooting and Emergency O&M
MSS Signaling Analysis
WBT(Pre-learning)
2.5H
AoIP Networking and
Principle
WBT(Pre-learning)
0.5H
MSS Troubleshooting
Training
ILT
5D
MSS Common Emergency
Operation Training
ILT
2D
Typical Networking Scenario
5D
ILT
2D
MSC POOL Principle
WBT(Pre-learning)
1H
AoIP Training
CSFB Training
MSC POOL Training
ILT
Network Evaluation and
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch
Core Network Evaluation
and Optimization Training
ILT
3D
658
ILT
2D
Number Translation
Training
ILT
2D
13.2
List of Mobile Softswitch(GSM/UMTS) Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
GSM-R
GTSOFTX3000 Product Training
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
659
13.3
GSM-R Training Programs
13.3.1 GTSOFTX3000 Product Training
Training Path
 Perform the connection between
GTSOFTX3000 and MGW
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware System
OMH20
Lecture
 Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office information
configuration
0.5d
 Perform data configuration between
GTSOFTX3000 to HLR
GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration
OMH22
Lecture, Lab
GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based, M3UA
6d
based)
 Perform the data configuration from
GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and ATM
GTSOFTX3000 Operation and
Maintenance
OMH21
Lecture, Lab
3.5d
GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in different
mode
 Manage equipments, for example: checking
Target Audience
board status and version
GSM-R core network monitor engineers
 Manage data, for example: backup system
Installation engineers
data, executing MML commands
Commissioning engineers
 Manage logs, for example: querying logs,
Operation and maintenance engineers
saving logs
 Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
Prerequisites
tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
A basic knowledge of telecommunication
result
Successful completion of "GTSOFTX3000
 Perform the routine operation and maintenance
Hardware System"
 Operation of replace the hardware board
Objectives
 Operation of change the cable
 Operation of system backup
be able to:
 Operation of system recovery
 Describe the MSOFTX3000 hardware
 Manage alarms (browsing alarms, querying
structures
alarms, printing alarms, dump alarm logs)
 Describe the MSOFTX3000 cascade structures
 Create performance tasks
 Describe the function, indicators, ports and
 Checking status of performance tasks
working mode of each board
 Customized performance tasks
 Explain the types and applications of different
 Dump the measurement result
fibers and cables
 Start and stop the process of BAM
 Describe the concept of Hardware
 Point out key information and its directory of
Configuration
 Perform hardware configuration
BAM
Duration
 Know how to verify hardware configuration
10 working days
660
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
661
13.3.2 GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training
Training Path
 Describe function of SIWF
 Configure SIWF
GSM-R UMG8900 Hardware System
OMH30
Lecture
 Perform operation and maintenance of SIWF
 Query equipment status
1d
 Query resource information
 Perform backup and recovery of UMG8900
GSM-R UMG8900 Operation and
Maintenance
OMH31
Lecture, Lab
 Query the service status
 Browse alarm information
2d
 Browse the performance task
 Configure System Parameters
 Configure System Time
GSM-R UMG8900 Data Configuration
OMH32
Lecture, Lab
 Configure Frames and Boards
2d
 Configure the Clock
 Configure the NMS Interface
Target Audience
 Configure the MGW Control Interface and
GSM-R core network monitor engineers
SIGTRAN Interface
Installation engineers
 Configure ATM bearer, IP bearer, TDM bearer
Commissioning engineers
 Configure signaling transfer
 Configure MGW data
Prerequisites
 Configure the link
 Perform interworking with MGW based on
A basic knowledge of telecommunication
different networking
Successful completion of "GSM-R UMG8900
 Perform interworking with BSC based on
Hardware System"
different scenarios
Objectives
 Perform interworking with MSC/PSTN based
on different networking
be able to:
 Describe UMG8900 hardware structure
Duration
 Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
 Describe UMG8900 software architecture
5 working days
Class Size
 Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe main boards' functions of UMG8900
 Describe Internal message flow of UMG8900
662
13.3.3 GSM-R Feature Training
Training Path
 Configure and verify USS1 service
 Configure and verify VBS service
GSM-R Overview
OMH01
 Configure and verify VGCS service
Lecture
 Configure and verify Multiple-Engine service
0.5d
 Configure and verify functional addressing
 Configure and verify call area restriction
OMH40
Lecture, Lab
Configure and verify location dependent
addressing service
4.5d
 Configure and verify SMC integration service
 Configure and verify access matrix service
Target Audience
 Configure and verify break-in and force release
GSM-R core network telecommunication
service
engineers
 Configure and verify missed call SMS prompt
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers
service
 Configure and verify priority cell service
Prerequisites
 Perform AC (Acknowledgement Center) server
A basic knowledge of railway telecommunication
software installation and uninstallation
 Configure AC in BAM
system
 Operate GMS(Group Management Server)
Objectives
installation
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the fundamental of GSM-R
 Describe the architecture of GSM-R system
5 working days
Class Size
 Describe the service and function of GSM-R
Min 6, Max 12
system
 Configure and verify eMLPP service
663
14 Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Courses
Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Path
Maintenance
Network
Planning
Prerequi
sites
14.1
CDMA NSS Planning and
Dimensioning Training
ILT
3D
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI)
Training
ILT
8D
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch
ILT
2D
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA)
Training
ILT
8D
CDMA UMG8900 Operation
ILT
Prerequisites
CDMA O&M Training
5D
Maintenance Skill Enhancement
CSOFTX3000 Advanced
Training
ILT
6D
CDMA UMG8900
ILT
3D
CSOFTX3000 Delta
Training
CDMA NSS Signaling
Analysis Training
ILT
2D
664
ILT
3D
14.2
List of Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
CSOFTX3000 Training Programs
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
8
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
8
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
6
6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training
Ⅳ
3
6~8
CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
5
6 ~ 12
CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Training Programs
665
14.3
CSOFTX3000 Training
14.3.1 CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe the Networking and Interfaces of
CDMA LMSD network.
 Describe the fundamental of CDMA Softswitch
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental
ORL01
Lecture
technology.
 Describe the number planning of CDMA.
2d
 Describe the service area of CDMA system.
 Describe CDMA location update flow in CDMA
Target Audience
LMSD network.
This course is designed for personnel who need to
 Describe CDMA calling/called flow in CDMA
know basic knowledge of CDMA softswitch
LMSD network.
network and Huawei CDMA NSS products.
 Describe various bear establishment flows in
Prerequisites
 None.
CDMA LMSD network.
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6，max 12
 Outline the development of CDMA Softswitch
structure.
 Describe the architecture of CDMA NSS part.
666
14.3.2 CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Systems.
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 cascade
structures.
2d
Lecture
ORL01
working mode of each board.
Prerequisites
 Explain the types and application situations of
different fibers and cables.
 Describe the internal control signaling
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(CPCI)
ORL10
Lecture
processing flows in CSOFTX3000.
1d
 Describe internal signaling processing flows in
CSOFTX3000.
 Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(CPCI)
for CSOFTX3000, and calculate parts number
ORL30
4d
and type for typical networking requirement.
 Explain the architecture of CSOFTX3000,
hardware and software components of
CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and
Maintenance(CPCI)
ORL21
CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance
system.
3d
 Manage BAM server, for example: checking its
working status and version.
Target Audience
 Use CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance
tool--LMT.
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance
Engineers;
 Manage authorities of users.
Technical Support Engineers.
 Perform operations on the alarm console.
 Manage equipments, for example: checking
Prerequisites
board status and version.
 At least one year experience of operation and
 Manage data, for example: backuping system
maintenance of GSM NSS/CDMA NSS or other
data, executing MML commands.
telecommunication equipments;
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation
saving logs.
System;
 Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
 A basic knowledge of telecommunications;
tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
 Successful completion of the programs CDMA
result.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
 Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
Objectives
tasks on performance console.
 Query the CDRs on bill console.
be able to:
 Describe the system functions of
tasks (daily, weekly and monthly).
CSOFTX3000.
 Manage iGWB server
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 key characteristics.
 Perform Checking billing system
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 Hardware
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration
667
 Verify the system status after configuration and
method and procedure.
 Configure data to new MGW.
 Configure data to new BSC.
modification.
Duration
 Configure data to new office direction.
 Perform the dynamic data configuration and
8 working days
Class Size
modification.
Min 6，max 12
validity.
668
14.3.3 CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
Training Path
CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training
8d
Systems.
Prerequisites
structures.
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA)
ORL11
2d
Target Audience
Engineers;
CSOFTX3000.
Prerequisites
 Successful completion of the programs
CSOFTX3000（CPCI) Routine Operation and
Maintenance Training and UMG8900 and
Duration
2 working days
HLR9820 Operation and Maintenance Training
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
be able to:
669
14.3.4 CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Systems.
structures.
2d
Lecture
ORL01
Prerequisites
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA)
ORL11
Lecture
2d
CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(ATCA)
ORL32
5d
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 system functions,
CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and
Maintenance(ATCA)
ORL22
structures and key characteristics.
1d
 Perform the data configuration to MGW, BSC,
Target Audience
and PSTN.
CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;
modification.
Engineers;
 Perform operation through LMT.
 Backup system data, execute MML commands,
etc.
Prerequisites
 Manage tracing tasks.
 Monitor alarms of CSOFTX3000.
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration
System;
 Configure data to new MGW.
 Successful completion of the programs CDMA
 Configure data to new BSC.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
 Configure data to new office direction.
Objectives
modification.
be able to:
validity.
CSOFTX3000.
modification.
670
Duration
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
8 working days
671
14.3.5 CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Know dual-home fundamental.
 Configure the data for dual-homing system
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training or
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) O&M Training
 Perform the operation on dual-homing network.
8d
 Perform the operation on Multi-area network.
Prerequisites
 Perform number analysis for Mobility
Management KPI.
 Perform analysis for Mobility Management KPI.
Softswitch Service Deployment
ORL31
 Perform analysis for Service KPI.
2d
 Perform analysis for System load KPI.
 Perform operation on billing system.
 Perform complex number analysis.
Special Topic
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for location
ORL33
2d
update.
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for call
processing.
CSOFTX3000 Troubleshooting
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for SMS
service.
ORL40 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Case 2 d
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for call
Supplementary service.
Target Audience
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for
performance
Engineers;
charging system.
Prerequisites
Duration
6 working days
“CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and
Class Size
Maintenance Training” and “UMG8900
Min 6，max 12
Operation and Maintenance Training”.
Objectives
672
14.3.6 CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training
 Analyze H.248 signaling protocol.
6d
 Analyze SIP signaling protocol.
Prerequisites
 Analyze MAP signaling protocol.
 Describe the detailed communication flow in
CDMA softswitch network.
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis
ORL55
 Analyze the bearer establishment flows of
3d
various cases.
 Analyze the important parameters in the
Target Audience
messages.
 Analyze and locate the signaling problem of
core network.
Engineers;
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
Operation and Maintenance Training”.
673
14.3.7 CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training
Training Path
Operation and Maintenance Training”
CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training
Objectives
6d
Prerequisites
be able to:
 Describe the concept and parameter about
core network design and planning.
CDMA NSS Design and Planning
ORL56
Lecture, Hands-on exercise,
Case
 Calculate the network signaling bandwidth.
3d
 Calculate the network voice channel
bandwidth.
 Design the signaling network.
Target Audience
 Design the traffic network.
Engineers;
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6，max 8
674
14.4
UMG8900 Training
14.4.1 CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the UMG8900 cascade structures.
ORL01
2d
Lecture
Prerequisites
processing flows in UMG8900.
 Describe the various bearer (TDM/IP)
UMG8900 Hardware System(R8) or
UMG8900 Hardware System(R9)
ORM10/11
Lecture
processing flows in UMG8900.
1d
for UMG8900, and calculate parts number and
type for typical networking requirement.
UMG8900 Data Configuration
ORM30
 Explain the architecture of UMG8900,
hardware and software components of
3d
UMG8900 O&M system.
 Use UMG8900 operation and maintenance
tool--LMT.
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance
 Perform operations on the alarm console.
ORM21
1d
 Manage equipment, for example: checking
board status and version.
Target Audience
 Manage data, for example: backuping MML
script, executing MML commands.
CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;
Operation and Maintenance Engineers;
saving logs.
 Manage tracing message, for example:
Prerequisites
creating a tracing task, checking tracing result,
saving result.
 Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
tasks on performance console.
System;
 Describe the UMG8900 data configuration
Objectives
 Edit hardware data scripts.
 Edit H.248 data scripts.
be able to:
 Edit SG data scripts.
 Describe the system functions of UMG8900.
 Edit bearer data, including TDM, IP.
 Describe the UMG8900 key characteristics.
 Complete the initial data configuration file.
 Describe the UMG8900 hardware structures.
675
Duration
modification.
5 working days
Class Size
validity.
Min 6，max 12
modification.
676
14.4.2 CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
maintenance of CDMA NSS.
Objectives
UMG89000 Operation and
be able to:
5d
 Perform trouble shooting for signaling
Prerequisites
 Perform trouble shooting for voice
 Perform trouble shooting for IP bearer
UMG8900 Troubleshooting
ORM40
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for most
2d
kind of service.
performance.
 Know the UMG8900 IP interface
UMG8900 Special Topic
ORM41
Lecture
 Perform the UMG8900 IP network planning
1d
 Describe the application of UMG8900 in MSC
pool solution.
Target Audience
 Perform operation and maintenance on
UMG8900 based on MSC pool network.
Engineers,
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
 Successful completion of the program
Min 6，max 12
UMG8900 Routine Operation and Maintenance
Training;
 At least two year experience of operation and
677
15 C＆C08 Training Courses
15.1
C＆C08 Training Path
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation
18 d
For NMS engineer, technical
support engineer
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced
15 d
For technical support engineer
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance
Training
10 d
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
678
15.2
List of C＆C08 Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
C&C08
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance
Ⅱ
18
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
15
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
10
6 ~ 12
Training
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training
679
15.3
C&C08 Training Programs
15.3.1 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Explain the basic principle and structure of the
C&C08 Switch system.
 Outline the performance of C&C08 Switch
C&C08 Switch System Overview
system.
OSC01
Lectures
0.5d
 Perform the troubleshooting for minor faults.
 Explain the alarm subsystem and perform the
routine operation.
C&C08 Switch Hardware System
 Perform the various tests and analyze the test
results.
OSC02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3.5d
 Use the common tools in the maintain
subsystem.
 Perform the routine operations in the bill
C&C08 Switch Data Configuration
management subsystem.
OSC03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
 Perform the routine operations in the traffic
8d
statistics subsystem.
 Perform the routine maintenance tasks.
 Set and maintain the office data.
C&C08 System Maintenance
 Set and maintain the user data.
5d
 Set and maintain the trunk data.
 Set and maintain the charging data.
 Describe the system structure at module, frame
C&C08 Switch Troubleshooting
and board level and the performance features
of C&C08.
1d
 Identify the hierarchy and network architecture
of AM/CM.
Target Audience
 Explain the system resource allocation, the
NMS operator, Technical support engineer
control architecture and the communication
Prerequisites
process of SM.
 Identify the general hardware structure of
 Being familiar with Windows operating system
C&C08.
 Having the basic knowledge of
telecommunication
Duration
 At least one year of experience in the operation
or maintenance of SPC switch
18 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
680
15.3.2 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
Objectives
C&C08 Switch In-depth Introduction
OSD01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
 Describe the planning and configuration
3d
principle of C&C08 switch.
 Describe the network management principle of
C&C08 switch.
C&C08 Switch Advanced Maintenance
 Perform the basic design of C&C08 switch
7d
according to requirements.
 Describe the detailed call process of C&C08
switch.
C&C08 Switch Advanced Troubleshooting
 Describe the principle of trunk line hunting.
 Describe the MTP and ISUP principle.
2d
 State the general procedures and methods of
troubleshooting.
 Describe the alarm information and use the
C&C08 Switch Introduction to Special
Subject
maintenance tool for troubleshooting.
 Perform troubleshooting for various faults.
2.5d
 Perform the whole system hardware
configuration.
 Perform the whole system software installation.
C&C08 Switch Network Planning
 Perform the advanced data setting such as
OSD05
Lectures
0.5d
number change, call failure process and
auxiliary signaling.
Target Audience
 Describe the principle of software parameter.
Specialist
 Describe the knowledge of Windows NT and
Prerequisites
SQL Server.
 Describe the loading procedure of C&C08
Having completed the C&C08 Digital SPC
hardware system.
Switching System Operation and Maintenance
Training
 Describe the principle of C&C08 clock system.
At least one year of experience in the operation or
 Describe the principle of C&C08 charging
system.
maintenance of SPC switch
Being familiar with Windows operating system
Duration
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
telecommunication
15 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
681
15.3.3 C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
hardware.
 Describe the hierarchy and network
Basic Knowledge of Intelligent Network
OSP01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
architecture of AM/CM.
 Describe the system resource allocation, the
3d
process of SM.
C&C08-SSP Hardware System
OSP02
Lectures
C&C08 SSP.
 Analyze the general malfunction of the
2d
C&C08-SSP system.
 Perform the troubleshooting of the C&C08-SSP
system.
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance
 Describe troubleshooting flow of the
4d
C&C08-SSP.
 Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
hardware.
 Describe the hierarchy and network
C&C08-SSP Troubleshooting
architecture of AM/CM.
1d
 Describe the system resource allocation, the
Target Audience
process of SM.
C&C08 SSP technical support engineer
C&C08 SSP.
Prerequisites
 Describe the basic knowledge of SS7 signaling
At least one year of experience in the operation or
system.
maintenance of SPC switch
 Describe the basic knowledge of SCCP, TCAP
Being familiar with computer operation and
and INAP protocol.
Windows operating system
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
 State the application of SS7 in the IN system.
Duration
telecommunication
10 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
682
16 IMS Training Courses
IMS Training Path
Network
Planning
Prerequi
sites
16.1
IMS System Principle
WBT(Pre-learning)
IMS Routine Maintenance
5H
WBT(Pre-learning)
4H
IMS Network Planning and
Design Training
ILT
5D
Service Layer
IMS Overview Training
ILT/LVC
2D
ATS9900 O&M Training
ILT
2D
IMS Core NE
RCS9880 O&M Training
IMS ATCA Platform
(Hardware/CGP) Training
ILT
1D
CSC3300/MRP6600 O&M
Training
ILT
2D
HSS9820(IMS) O&M
Training
ILT
1D
IMS Service Provisioning
(SPG2800) O&M Training
ILT
2D
iCG9815 (Offline Charging)
O&M Training
ILT
2D
iManager M2000 (IMS)
Client Application Training
ILT
2D
IMS Routine Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Training
ILT
2D
ILT
3D
IMS Convergent Conference
(MediaX3600) O&M Training
ILT
3D
Inter-working
UGC3200(MGCF) O&M
Training
ILT
2D
UMG8900(IMS) O&M
Training
ILT
2D
Access Layer
UAC3000 O&M Training
ILT
2D
ENS O&M Training
ILT
SE2600 O&M Training
2D
ILT
Maintenance
OSG9300&Convergent
Centrex O&M Training
ILT
2D
Advanced O&M
Technical Topics
IMS Signaling Analysis
Training
Prerequisites
ILT
IMS O&M Training
2D
IMS Number Analysis
Training
ILT
2D
IMS Maintenance in-depth
and Advanced Troubleshooting
4D
ILT
3D
5D
VoLTE in-depth Key
Technology Training
ILT
3D
SoftX3000 (AGCF) O&M
Training
ILT
2D
IMS Netwotk Key
Technology Training
ILT
4D
SE2600 Advanced O&M
Training
ILT
2D
VoLTE
VoLTE Technology
Training
VoLTE Solution
Introduction
WBT(Pre-learning)
2H
ILT
IMS IP Technology
Training
ILT
4D
Remark:
 IMS Overview Training: suit for all technical personnel and new employee.

IMS Operation and Maintenance Training (include IMS products and functional modules): suit for
O&M engineers (2nd line maintenance) of IMS Core equipment maintenance and network
management center.
683

IMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training (include IMS solutions and advanced
technical topics): suit for senior O&M engineers (3nd line maintenance or specialist) of IMS core
equipment maintenance and network management center.

IMS Network Planning and Design Training: suit for IMS network design engineers.
For further details about the training programs and courses designed, please refer the program description and
course description in the training catalog.
684
16.2
List of IMS Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Managers
IMS System Overview Training
Ⅰ
0.5
6 ~ 12
Core Network Technology Evolution Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
IMS Overview Training
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
IMS ATCA Platform (Hardware/CGP) Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
CSC3300/MRP6600 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
HSS9820 (IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
ENS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
iCG9815 (offline charging) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
UGC3200 (MGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
UMG8900(IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
ATS9900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
SE2300 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 (AGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
UAC3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
RCS9880 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
IMS O&M Training
IMS Service Provisioning (SPG2800) Operation and Maintenance
Training
OSG9930&Convergent Centrex Operation and Maintenance
Training
IMS Convergent Conference Operation and
Maintenance(MediaX3600) Training
iManager M2000 (IMS) Client Application Operation and
685
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
IMS Signaling Analysis Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
IMS Number Analysis Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
IMS Network Key Technology Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
SE2600 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
IMS IP Technology Training
Ⅲ
4
6 ~ 12
IMS Network Migration Technology Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
VoLTE Technology Training
Ⅳ
5
6 ~ 12
VoLTE In-depth Key Technology Training
Ⅳ
3
6 ~ 12
IMS Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training
IMS Advanced O&M Training for System Maintenance Engineers
IMS Maintenance in-depth and Advanced Troubleshooting
Training
Network Planning and Design Engineers
IMS Network Planning and Design Training
VoLTE Solution Maintenance Engineers
686
16.3
List of IMS Training Programs
16.3.1 IMS System Overview Training
 Describe the basic concepts, advantages,
Training Path
system architecture of IMS
 Describe the functions of the IMS network
IMS System Overview
OZA03
Lecture
elements
0.5d
 Describe the number and address planning in
IMS network
Target Audience
 Describe the basic register and session flow of
IMS
Telecom Managers
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
 A general understanding of telecommunication
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
687
16.3.2 Core Network Technology Evolution Training
Training Path
Objectives
Core Network Technology Evolution
be able to:
OZA09
Lecture
1d
 Describe the current technology application
status of core network, including the basic
Target Audience
function, networking, and application
Technical support personnel, technical specialist
 Describe the technology evolution and
Prerequisites
development direction of the fixed network and
mobile network
 Describe the core network evolution
 At least one year experience in the operation
Duration
and maintenance of telecommunication
equipments
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
688
16.3.3 IMS Overview Training
Training Path
elements
IMS Overview
OZA02
IMS network
Lecture
 Describe the IMS register flow and session flow
2d
 Describe the SIP protocol used in IMS domain,
Target Audience
including SIP messages types, structure
 Describe the SIP header fields and typical
All technical personnel
signaling flows
Prerequisites
 Outline the key features of Huawei IMS solution
in hardware system, network, services, etc
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
689
16.3.4 IMS ATCA Platform (Hardware/CGP) Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS ATCA Platform (Hardware/CGP)
OZC00
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
1d
 Describe the hardware structure, the power
system and the board functions of ATCA
Target Audience
platform, as well as the monitor system
Operation and maintenance personnel, NMC
 Perform the basic operation and maintenance,
operator, technical support personnel
the performance and alarm management by
Prerequisites
the CGP client
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
equipments
 Successful completion of IMS Overview
training
690
16.3.5 CSC3300/MRP6600 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
CSC3300/MRP6600 Operation and
Maintenance
OZC01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
2d
 Describe the location, interfaces, main
functions and basic features of
Target Audience
CSC3300/MRP6600
 Describe the data configuration procedure and
method
Prerequisites
 Complete the service data configuration
 Complete the routine maintenance tasks of
CSC3300/MRP6600
Duration
equipments
2 working days
Class Size
 Successful completion of the IMS Overview
Min 6, Max 12
Training and IMS ATCA Platform
691
16.3.6 HSS9820 (IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
HSS9820 (IMS) Operation and
Maintenance
OZC02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
1d
functions and basic features of HSS9820 in
Target Audience
IMS network
method
Prerequisites
 Complete the data configuration of HSS9820
FE
 Complete the routine maintenance tasks of
HSS9820 FE
Duration
equipments
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
692
16.3.7 ENS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
ENS Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OZC06
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
 Explain the working principle of ENUM and
DNS server
Target Audience
 Describe the system architecture of ENS
 Accomplish the data configuration in ENS for
ENUM and DNS function
Prerequisites
tasks of ENS
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
equipments
Min 6, Max 12
693
16.3.8 IMS Service Provisioning (SPG2800) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Service Provisioning (SPG2800)
OZC11
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
2d
 Describe basic concepts of IMS subscription
(IMPI and IMPU, iFC, Trigger Point, etc)
Target Audience
 Describe the service provisioning principle,
procedure and operation by SPG2800
 Complete the service provisioning by SPG2800
Prerequisites
to HSS9820
 Perform the basic service test and verification
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
equipments
Min 6, Max 12
694
16.3.9 iCG9815 (offline charging) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
iCG9815 (offline charging) Operation and
Maintenance
2d
OZC04
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
 Describe charging principle of IMS
 Describe the network location of iCG9815
Target Audience
 Describe the system functions and
specification of iCG9815
 Use iCG9815 CDR console to query the CDRs
Prerequisites
tasks (daily, weekly and monthly)
 Perform the related data configuration
 Describe the data configuration flow and
validity of subscription
equipments
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
695
16.3.10 UGC3200 (MGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe product location, interfaces,
function/features and system structure of
UGC3200 (MGCF) Operation and
Maintenance
OZE05
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
UGC3200 (MGCF) Product
 Describe UGC3200 (MGCF) system
2d
processing flows, including signaling process,
Target Audience
route process and number process
 Perform the data configuration of UGC3200
(MGCF), including local office data
configuration, interconnection data
Prerequisites
configuration, signaling data configuration,
charging data configuration and basic number
analysis data configuration
 Execute the routine operation and maintenance
tasks, including devices status check and
equipments
alarm check, etc
 Perform the basic troubleshooting
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
696
16.3.11 UMG8900(IMS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
UMG8900(IMS) Operation and
Maintenance
OZE04
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
2d
 Describe the network topology, services,
functions, system structure, board functions,
Target Audience
board indicators, networking, applications and
technical specifications of UMG8900
 Outline the service data configuration steps of
Prerequisites
UMG8900
 Perform the common service data configuration
of UMG8900 (database backup, alarm
management, device management, protocol
tracing, service management)
equipments
Duration
Training and UGC3200(MGCF) Operation and
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
697
16.3.12 ATS9900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
ATS9900 Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OZS02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
functions and basic features of ATS9900
Target Audience
method
 Complete ATS9900 number analysis
Prerequisites
configuration
 Complete ATS9900 interworking data
configuration
 List the major services supported by ATS9900
 Perform the service test and verification
equipments
 Complete the routine maintenance tasks
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
698
16.3.13 OSG9930&Convergent Centrex Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
OSG9930/Convergent Centrex Operation
and Maintenance
2d
OZS06
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
 List the major Convergent Centrex services of
ATS9900
Target Audience
 Describe the definition and signaling flow of the
Centrex services
 Perform the data configuration of Convergent
Prerequisites
Centrex
 Perform the Centrex services provision via the
SPG2800 or OSG9930
 Perform the Centrex service verification
 Perform the operation and maintenance of
OSG9930 and U-Path
equipments
Duration
Training and ATS9900 Operation and
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
699
16.3.14 IMS Convergent Conference Operation and Maintenance(MediaX3600)
Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Explain the principles and the related concepts
IMS Convergent Conference Operation
and Maintenance (MediaX3600)
OZS03
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
about multimedia conference
 Describe the typical multimedia conference
3d
working flow
Target Audience
 Explain the product location, networking,
features and functions of MediaX3600
 Perform the local office and interconnection
office data configuration
Prerequisites
tasks of MediaX3600
 Describe the troubleshooting method for the
typical cases
Duration
equipments
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
700
16.3.15 SE2300 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe related concepts of SBC, working
SE2300 Operation and Maintenance
OZD02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
principle of full proxy
 Describe the product location and the main
1d
functions of SE2300
Target Audience
 Describe the full proxy flow of SE2300
 Outline the networking applications of SE2300
 Describe the configuration flow and the key
parameters
Prerequisites
 Complete the data configuration
 Complete the routine maintenance tasks for
SE2300
Duration
1 working day
equipments
Class Size
training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
701
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OZD04
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
 Describe related concepts of SBC, working
principle of full proxy
Target Audience
 Describe main functions and features of
SE2600 in IMS network
 Describe call flow analysis
Prerequisites
 Describe hardware structure of SE2600
 Perform interconnection data configuration
 Perform service data configuration
 Perform maintenance tasks for SE2600
 Perform SE2600 troubleshooting
equipments
Duration
2 working days
training
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
702
16.3.17 SoftX3000 (AGCF) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the AGCF functions of SoftX3000
SoftX3000 (AGCF) Operation and
Maintenance
OZE02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
 Describe the SoftX3000(AGCF) hardware
structure
2d
 Explain AGCF registration process and basic
Target Audience
call flow
 Describe the SoftX3000(AGCF) data
configuration method and procedure
 Complete the data configuration and verify the
Prerequisites
system status
tasks
Duration
2 working days
equipments
Class Size
training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
703
16.3.18 UAC3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
UAC3000 Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OZE03
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
 Describe the network location, product function
and features, network structure, system
Target Audience
structure
 Describe the signaling procession procedures
of UAC3000
Prerequisites
 Configure the hardware, network element and
module data
 Configure the system data
 Configure the interworking data
 Configure the subscriber data
equipments
 Perform the routine maintenance
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
704
16.3.19 RCS9880 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
RCS9880 Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OZS08
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
3d
 Describe RCS Solution, Explain the product
location, networking, features and functions of
Target Audience
RCS9880.
 Describe the typical RCS services and
processing flow.
Prerequisites
 Perform the RCS9880 data configuration.
tasks of RCS9880.
RCS9880.
equipments
Duration
Training and Hardware Platform Training
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
705
16.3.20 iManager M2000 (IMS) Client Application Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
functions of iManager M2000 in IMS
 Describe the hardware configuration and
iManager M2000 (IMS) Client Application
2d
OZO03
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
software configuration of iManager
M2000(IMS)
 Create accounts and set the authority for
Target Audience
system operator
 Add IMS elements and build up the network
topology
 Monitor the running status of IMS elements
Prerequisites
 Perform alarm browsing and processing
 Perform log browsing and dumping
 Execute M2000 database backing up and
restoring
 Execute the IMS routine maintenance tasks via
equipments
M2000 client
Duration
training
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Outline the product location, services and
706
16.3.21 IMS Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
OZC15
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
2d
 Perform the daily routine maintenance tasks of
IMS, including check the status of the board,
Target Audience
ME, module, process, link; query the alarm info;
query CDRs; perform database backup;
perform measurement management tasks and
Prerequisites
so on
 Describe IMS troubleshooting procedure
 Perform IMS troubleshooting cases analysis
Duration
equipments
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
707
16.3.22 IMS Signaling Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Signaling Analysis
be able to:
OZB00
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
 Describe the major SIP headers function and
change in IMS registration and session flow
Target Audience
 Describe the AVPs content in the Diameter
Technical support personnel, senior NMC
messages in IMS registration flow
operation personnel, technical specialist
 Describe the signaling routing principle of the
Prerequisites
IMS session flow
 Perform the troubleshooting of IMS registration
 Successful completion of the IMS Operation
and session
 At least three years experience in the operation
Duration
equipments
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
and maintenance of HUAWEI IMS equipments
708
16.3.23 IMS Number Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Number Analysis
be able to:
OZB01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
4d
 Perform number analysis of CSC3300 and
ATS9900
Target Audience
 Perform number analysis of UGC3200 (MGCF)
 Describe number change function and execute
related configuration in CSC3300 and
Prerequisites
ATS9900
 Execute IMS Call Barring configuration
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
equipments
Min 6, Max 12
709
16.3.24 IMS Network Key Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Network Key Technology
be able to:
OZB02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
4d
 Describe IMS geography redundancy solution
(architecture, signaling flow and data
Target Audience
configuration)
 Describe Business Trunk concept and perform
the related data configuration
Prerequisites
 Describe Emergency Call solution and perform
the related data configuration
 Describe IMS access network solution
 Describe iFC principle
Duration
equipments
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
710
16.3.25 IMS Maintenance in-depth and Advanced Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Maintenance in-depth and Advanced
Troubleshooting
3d
OZB06
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
 Perform IMS advanced maintenance tasks
(CGP system administration, obtain and query
Target Audience
Log file, software patch operation and
MRP6600 system administration)
 Perform database backup and restoration
Prerequisites
 Describe the general troubleshooting principle
and procedure
 Perform the IMS registration and session
management troubleshooting
 Perform the IMS service troubleshooting
equipments
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
711
16.3.26 SE2600 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
SE2600 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OZB07
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
2d
 Configure the security and reliability feature of
SE2600.
Target Audience
 Configure the QoS control feature of SE2600.
SE2600 Technical support personnel, senior NMC
 Configure the protocol process features of
SE2600.
Prerequisites
SE2600.
 Successful completion of the SE2600
 Analyze and locate the typical trouble of
SE2600.
Duration
equipments
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
712
16.3.27 IMS IP Technology Training
Training Path
 Describe the IP networking inside IMS
 Describe the hardware of DATACOM
IMS IP Technology Training
OZD03
Lecture, Lab
equipments used in IMS
 Perform the operation and maintenance of the
4d
DATACOM equipments used in IMS
Target Audience
 Describe the IP reliability solutions in IMS
 Perform the data configuration of the IP
Core network commissioning engineers, Operation
reliability solutions
and maintenance engineers
 Outline the QoS requirements for IP bear
Prerequisites
network
 Apply the QoS methods in IMS
maintenance of IMS equipments
 When there happens the IP related trouble,
Objectives
basically complete trouble location and recover
the service
be able to:
Duration
 Outline the structure of IP Bear network and the
main protocols used
4 working days
Class Size
 Outline the IP fundamental knowledge and the
Min 6, Max 12
application in IMS
713
16.3.28 IMS Network Migration Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
IMS Network Migration Technology
be able to:
OZB10
Lecture
1d
 Describe the end-to-end flow of C5 network
migration on the IP multimedia subsystem
Target Audience
(IMS)
 Describe every solution in IMS C5 network
Prerequisites
migration
 Perform relevant tasks in network migration
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
equipments
Min 6, Max 12
714
16.3.29 IMS Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
IMS System Overview
OZA03
Lecture
elements
0.5d
IMS network
 Describe the basic register and session flow of
IMS Basic Signaling Procedure and SIP
Protocol Introduction
0.5d
OZA04
Lecture
IMS
 Describe the typical register and session
procedures in IMS system
 Describe the SIP protocol used in IMS domain,
including SIP messages types, structure
IMS Huawei Products and Solution
Introduction
OZA05
Lecture
 Describe the SIP typical signaling flows
0.5d
 Describe the ATCA Hardware of IMS
 Describe the function, feature and system
structure of Huawei IMS products
IMS Network Planning and Design
OZP01
Lecture
 Describe Huawei IMS solutions
 Describe IMS network planning and designing
3.5d
Overview
Target Audience
 Describe IMS networking structure design
Telecom Managers, IMS Network Planning and
 Describe IMS network IP interconnection
Design personnel
 Describe IMS interconnection with
PSTN/PLMN
Prerequisites
 Describe IMS access network design
 Describe IMS bandwidth calculation
 Describe IMS support system interconnection
equipments
(NMS and charging system)
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
715
16.3.30 VoLTE Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the basic concept of EPC/LTE/CS
EPC/LTE/CS Introduction
OZZ04
Lecture
 Describe the network structure of VoLTE
solution
1d
 Describe the principles and networking of
VoLTE basic calls
VoLTE Technology
OZZ05
Lecture, Lab
 Describe the eSRVCC principles, networking
and deployment
4d
 Describe the principles of IP short messages
and related networking mode in the VoLTE
Target Audience
solution
VoLTE Operation and maintenance personnel,
 Describe the main flow of IP SM in the VoLTE
technical support personnel
solution
Prerequisites
 Describe the basic procedure of VoLTE service
provisioning
 Perform the VoLTE basic call data configuration
 Perform the eSRVCC data configuration
Duration
equipments
5 working days
 Successful completion of the IMS O&M training
 Familiar with network structure and signaling
Class Size
process flow of CS/EPC
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
716
16.3.31 VoLTE In-depth Key Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
VoLTE In-depth Key Technology
be able to:
OZZ07
Lecture, Lab
3d
 Describe the E2E QoS solution in VoLTE
 Describe the ICS function and application of
Target Audience
VoLTE
VoLTE Operation and maintenance personnel,
 Describe the major IN service triggering
technical support personnel
processes in VoLTE solution
Prerequisites
 Perform the QoS and ICS data configuration
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
equipments
 Successful completion of the VoLTE
Technology Training
717
17 NGN & STP Training Courses
17.1
NGN & STP Training Path
17.1.1 NGN Training Path
NGN System Overview
Training
2d
For telecom management
engineer
718
NGN Operation and
SoftX3000 Operation and
9d
UMG8900 Operation and
4d
NGN Core Network
Elements
iManager N2000 UMS
Operation and
2d
UA5000 (NGN) Operation
1d
SG7000 (NGN) Operation
3d
MRS6100 Operation and
IAD Operation and
1d
2d
U-Path Operation and
SE2000 Operation and
1d
2d
SHLR9200 Operation and
2d
For operation and maintenance
engineer, technical support
engineer
NGN Advanced Operation
719
NGN Advanced Operation
SoftX3000 Advanced
Operation and
8d
UMG8900 Advanced
Operation and
NGN Core Network
Elements
3d
iManager N2000 UMS
2d
SE2000 Advanced
Operation and
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced
Training
2d
2d
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced
Training
1d
SHLR9200 Advanced
Operation and
1d
MRS6100 Advanced
Operation and
1d
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
720
17.1.2 STP Training Path
STP Operation and
SPS V3 (DRA) Operation
7d
3d
engineer, technical support engineer
engineer, technical support engineer
721
17.2
List of NGN & STP Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Telecom Management Engineer
Ⅰ
2
6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
9
6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
4
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
IAD Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
1
6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
8
6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅲ
1
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
7
6 ~ 12
NGN System Overview Training
NGN O&M Engineer
NGN Advanced O&M Engineer
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
STP
STP Operation and Maintenance Training
722
SANEX Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅱ
3
6 ~ 12
SPS V3
SPS V3 (DRA) Operation and Maintenance Training
723
17.3
NGN Training Programs
17.3.1 NGN System Overview Training
Training Path
architecture, services, networking and
applications of NGN
NGN System Overview
OA011
Lecture
 Describe the network topology, services and
functions of NGN equipment
0.5d
 Outline the functions of NGN protocols
 Outline the features, advantages, actuality and
NGN Product Overview
OA012
Lecture
development trend of NGN
 Outline the components, services, networking
1d
and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution
 Describe the network topology, services and
functions of NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS
NGN Service Description
solution
OA013
Lecture
0.5d
 Outline the system structure, networking,
applications and technical specifications of
NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS solution
Target Audience
 Describe the functions, characteristics,
Telecom management personnel
applications and uses of all services (including
Prerequisites
basic voice services, supplementary services
and IN services) supported by Huawei U-SYS
 A general understanding of
solution
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the structure of the
Min 6, Max 12
telecommunication network
 Describe the basic concepts, system
724
17.3.2 SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
technical specifications of SoftX3000
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance
OAX01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
SoftX3000, and execute the common service
9d
data configuration (local office data
Target Audience
configuration, charging data configuration,
media gateway data configuration, MRS data
Operating and maintenance personnel, technical
configuration, protocol data configuration, SS7
support personnel
signaling data configuration, routing data
Prerequisites
configuration, trunk data configuration, number
 Familiar with computer operation and Windows
analysis data configuration, subscriber data
configuration)
system
of SoftX3000 (operator authority management,
database backup and restoration, data
and maintenance of telecommunications
consistent checking between the host and BAM,
equipment
log management, alarm management, device
management, media gateway management,
Objectives
protocol and signaling management, trunk
circuit management, subscriber management,
be able to:
bill management, traffic statistics)
 Describe the basic concepts, system
architecture, services, networking and
of iGWB
applications of NGN
 Perform the common troubleshooting of
 Outline the components, services, networking
and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution
SoftX3000
Duration
 Explain the functions, features, applications,
9 working days
terms, stack structure and messages of NGN
protocols (MGCP, H.248, SIP, SIGTRAN and
Class Size
H.323)
Min 6, Max 12
725
17.3.3 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance
OAU01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
technical specifications of UMG8900
4d
UMG8900, and execute the common service
Target Audience
data configuration (MGW data configuration, IP
bearer data configuration, TG data
configuration, AG data configuration, SG data
support personnel
configuration)
Prerequisites
of UMG8900 (database backup, log
management, alarm management, device
system
management, protocol tracing, service
management, POTS subscriber testing)
UMG8900
equipment
Duration
Objectives
4 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
726
17.3.4 iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Explain the functions and applications of SNMP
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and
Maintenance
OAN01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
functions, system structure, networking,
2d
Target Audience
iManager N2000 UMS
NMS operator, operating and maintenance
of iManager N2000 UMS (network topology
personnel, technical support personnel
management, network element management,
Prerequisites
network alarm monitoring, network
performance monitoring, environment and user
system
right management)
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
727
17.3.5 MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance
OAM01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
2d
technical specifications of MRS6100
Target Audience
MRS6100, and execute the system data
configuration
support personnel
 Perform the voice file loading
Prerequisites
of MRS6100 (log management, alarm
system
management, device management, message
tracing)
Duration
2 working days
equipment
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
728
17.3.6 SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and
Maintenance
OAS01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
technical specifications of SG7000
3d
Target Audience
SG7000, and execute the common service
configuration, MTP data configuration, M3UA
support personnel
data configuration)
Prerequisites
of SG7000 (database backup, log management,
alarm management, device management,
system
signaling tracing)
SG7000
Duration
equipment
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
729
17.3.7 SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
procedure of NGN network intelligentizing
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance
OAS03
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
board indicators, signaling procedure,
2d
networking, applications and technical
Target Audience
specifications of SHLR9200
SHLR9200, and execute the common service
support personnel
Prerequisites
configuration, MTP data configuration, SCCP
data configuration, subscriber data
configuration)
system
of SHLR9200 (log management, alarm
management, device management, signaling
tracing, service data management)
equipment
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the concepts, principle, networking,
applications, services and service processing
730
Training Path
OAE01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300)
2d
Target Audience
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300), and execute
the common service data configuration (SNMP
data configuration, signaling PROXY and
support personnel
media PROXY data configuration, IADMS
Prerequisites
PROXY data configuration)
of SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (log
system
management, alarm management, device
management, signaling proxy and media
PROXY debugging, IADMS PROXY
debugging)
equipment
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Explain the working principle of PROXY
731
17.3.9 UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and
Maintenance
OAG01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
technical specifications of UA5000
1d
Target Audience
UA5000, and execute the common service
data configuration (hardware data configuration,
MG interface data configuration, POTS service
support personnel
data configuration)
Prerequisites
of UA5000 (database backup, log management,
alarm management, device management,
system
subscriber testing)
Duration
equipment
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
732
17.3.10 IAD Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the network topology, product
IAD Operation and Maintenance
OAI01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
classification, services, functions, system
structure, networking, applications and
1d
technical specifications of IAD
Target Audience
IAD, and execute the common service data
configuration (MG data configuration,
support personnel
subscriber data configuration)
Prerequisites
of IAD (log management, alarm management,
system
device management)
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
733
17.3.11 U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
U-Path Operation and Maintenance
OAP01
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
1d
U-Path
Target Audience
 Perform the software installation of U-Path
 Perform the service configuration of U-Path
 Outline the related data configuration on
support personnel
SoftX3000 side
Prerequisites
of U-Path (log management, system status
system
browsing, and bill management)
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
734
17.3.12 SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Execute the service data configuration of
SoftX3000 (number changing data
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OAX02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
configuration, call barring data configuration)
8d
SoftX3000 (using of database tool, traffic
Target Audience
statistics, system security and defense)
 Perform the troubleshooting of SoftX3000
 Describe the principle, processing procedure,
Prerequisites
operation and original bill format of NGN
 Successful completion of the NGN Operation
charging system, and describe the system
structure and configuration of iGWB
 At least a half year of experience in the
 Describe the principle, application, data
operation and maintenance of NGN
planning and data configuration of NGN dual
home, and perform the routine maintenance of
Objectives
NGN dual home
 List the means of improving voice quality of
be able to:
 Explain the command parameters and call
processing procedure of NGN protocols, and
NGN
Duration
perform the common problem analysis and
processing of NGN protocols
8 working days
Class Size
 Describe the working principle and service
Min 6, Max 12
processing procedure of SoftX3000
735
17.3.13 UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the working principle and service
processing procedure of UMG8900
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OAU02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
UMG8900 (PRI data configuration, R2 data
3d
configuration), and outline the related data
Target Audience
configuration on SoftX3000 side
UMG89000 (testing management, performance
Prerequisites
statistics, using of software tool)
 Perform the troubleshooting of UMG8900
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
736
17.3.14 iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
iManager N2000 UMS (test management,
authority and domain based management,
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced
OAN02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
subscriber service provisioning, OSS
interconnection)
2d
 Perform the system administration of iManager
Target Audience
N2000 UMS (user accounts management,
UMS user management, log management,
service and process management, database
Prerequisites
management, file and disk management,
database backup and restoration)
 Perform the troubleshooting of iManager
N2000 UMS
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
737
17.3.15 MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OAM02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
1d
 Describe the working principle, announcement
principle and service processing procedure of
Target Audience
MRS6100
 Perform the language conversion of voice
Prerequisites
 Perform the voice conversion and voice loading
 Perform the troubleshooting of MRS6100
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
738
17.3.16 SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
2d
OAS02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
SG7000 (MTP load sharing data configuration,
Target Audience
SCCP load sharing data configuration)
Prerequisites
 Perform the troubleshooting of SG7000
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
739
17.3.17 SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OAS04
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
1d
 Explain the stack structure, functions,
messages and applications of MAP+
Target Audience
 Execute the custom-made service data
configuration of SHLR9200
Prerequisites
 Perform the troubleshooting of SHLR9200
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
740
17.3.18 SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the working principle, security, QoS
and reliability of SE2000
SE2000 Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
OAE02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
Series(SE2200/SE2300)
2d
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (security
Target Audience
data configuration, QoS data configuration,
reliability data configuration)
 Perform the troubleshooting of SE2000
Prerequisites
Series(SE2200/SE2300)
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
741
17.3.19 UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
1d
OAG02
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
be able to:
 Describe the working principle of UA5000
Target Audience
UA5000 (system maintenance, DSP resources
maintenance)
Prerequisites
 Perform the troubleshooting of UA5000
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
742
17.4
STP Training Programs
17.4.1 STP Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
System
 State the format of TUP, ISUP and SCCP
SS7 Signaling System
OST01
Lecture
message and the meaning of the message
which are often used
1.5d
 State the signaling procedures of TUP, ISUP
and SCCP
 Trace and analyze the signaling message
SG7000 Hardware System
OST02
Lecture
 Describe SG7000 system structure and
0.5d
 State the cabinet, frame, board and the
performance features of SG7000
SG7000 Operation and Maintenance
 Describe SG7000 logical architecture and
OST03
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
5d
signaling flow
 Describe the terminal and alarm system of
SG7000
Target Audience
 Configure the hardware data and service data
Personnel who maintain STP equipment
 Implement the common operation of
Prerequisites
maintenance such as message tracing and link
management
or maintenance of STP or other switch
 Describe the MNP service flows
equipment
 Configure the MNP data
 Being familiar with computer operation
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the basic concepts of SS7 Signaling
System
 Describe the architecture of SS7 Signaling
743
17.4.2 SANEX Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Outline the function and structure of rack,
subrack and boards of DSS
SANEX System Overview
OC131
Lecture
 Describe the power system and cable
connection of DSS
1d
 Outline the structure of SANEX software
 Perform the SHELL operation
SANEX Operation and Maintenance
OC132
Lecture, Lab
 Create the SHELL task
 Perform the basic operation of DSS system
2d
 Perform the routine maintenance of DSS
system
Target Audience
 Perform the operation of alarm console,
Personnel who maintain SANEX equipment
performance, trace Console, and integrated
Prerequisites
analysis console
Duration
or maintenance of STP or other switch
3 working days
equipment
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
744
17.4.3 SPS V3 (DRA) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the system architecture of SPS,
including the hardware structure, software
SPS V3 (DRA) Operation and
Maintenance
OAS05
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
structure
 Explain the SPS protocols and interfaces
3d
 Describe the SPS data configuration flows
Target Audience
 Perform the DRA (SPS V3) data configuration,
Operating and maintenance engineer, Technical
including the hardware data configuration,
support engineer
basic data configuration, signaling interworking
data configuration, function and feature data
Prerequisites
configuration
 Perform DRA (SPS V3) routine operation and
 At least one year of experience in operation
maintenance, including the routine
and maintenance of telecom field
maintenance tasks, routine maintenance
 General understanding of telecommunications
commands, logs and alarm checking
 Perform DRA (SPS V3) Troubleshooting
and data communications
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Class Size
 Describe Diameter basic protocol
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the DRA (SPS V3) product location,
typical application, network structure, the basic
function and features
745
18 CN OSS Training Courses
18.1
CN OSS Training Path
18.1.1 iManager M2000 Training Path
iManager M2000V2
System Administrator
Training (SUN)
ILT
5D
iManager M2000V2 Client
Training
ILT
2D
iManager M2000V2
Training (HP)
ILT
5D
iManager M2000V2
Training (ATAE Cluster)
ILT
3D
iManager PRS Operation
ILT
2D
746
18.2
List of CN OSS Training Programs
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
iManager M2000
iManager M2000V2 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ
2
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (SUN)
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (HP)
Ⅲ
5
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
3
6 ~ 12
Ⅲ
2
6 ~ 12
iManager
M2000V2 System Administrator Training (ATAE
Cluster)
iManager PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
747
18.3
iManager M2000 Training Programs
18.3.1 iManager M2000V2 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 State the functions of M2000 system
 Conduct basic operations on M2000 client
iManager M2000 System Overview
ONW11
Lecture
 Construct and manage the topology structure
of the entire network
0.5d
 Learn and monitor the running status of the
entire network by browsing the topology view
iManager M2000 Client Management
ONW22
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Fault Management Basic Concept
 Outline Handling Alarm Procedure
1.5d
 Complete Handling Alarm tasks
 Describe the role of performance management
Target Audience
in the M2000
Network monitor
 Perform performance management operations
M2000 system manager
 Describe M2000 configuration management
module function
Prerequisites
 Complete daily maintenance tasks through MIT
System
and LMT
Duration
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Know the system structure of M2000 system
748
18.3.2 iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (SUN)
Training Path
 Master how to import and export database
 Describe M2000 SUN Single Server network
iManager M2000 System Solution and
Networking
ONW13
Lecture
system structure, logical, hardware, software
structure
0.5d
 List M2000 server file system composing
 List M2000 system user type
iManager M2000 Operation System and
Database Management (SUN)
1d
ONW30
Lecture, Lab
 Perform powering on/powering off the M2000,
monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore
 Perform M2000 routine maintenance tasks
 Describe M2000 SUN HA network system
iManager M2000 Server Operation and
Maintenance (SUN HA)
ONW25
Lecture, Lab
structure, logical, hardware, software structure
1d
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation
ONW27
Lecture, Lab, Demo,
managing cluster resources, monitoring system
status, M2000 database management, system
2.5d
backup and restore
Discussion
Target Audience
 Describe user type in M2000 system
M2000 Server maintenance engineer
 Master how to create, modify, delete user
Prerequisites
information
 Manage user group in M2000 system
Master Solaris basic operations
 Manage user network right and operation right
Master Sybase database basic operations
 Complete monitor user state
Objectives
 Complete M2000 system log management
 Master NEs status checking methods
be able to:
 Describe M2000 system software structure
 Know M2000 hardware and software structure
 Describe system software updating procedure
 Describe M2000 software modules structure
and methods
and modules functions
 Perform NEs mediation software installation
 List M2000 server typical configuration
and updating
 Describe M2000 server networking
 Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore
 Describe Solaris 10 system management
base knowledge
commands
 Master how to backup and restore M2000 data
 Describe files system structure
 Know the base knowledge of M2000 system
 Perform system management operation
emergency maintenance
 Describe Sybase15 database modules
 List M2000 system emergency scene
 Describe Sybase15 database operation
 Master the methods and steps of M2000
commands
system emergency maintenance
 Implement start and stop data process
 Know M2000 dangerous operations
749
 Master normal Trouble Shooting methods
Duration
 Describe Northbound interface functions in
M2000 system
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
750
18.3.3 iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (HP)
Training Path
 Master how to import and export database
 Describe M2000 HP Single Server network
iManager M2000 System Solution and
Networking
ONW13
Lecture
system structure, logical, hardware, software
structure
0.5d
Database Management (HP)
1d
ONW31
Lecture, Lab
monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore
 Describe M2000 HP HA network system
iManager M2000 Server Operation and
Maintenance (HP HA)
ONW26
Lecture, Lab
structure, logical, hardware, software structure
1d
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation
ONW27
Lecture, Lab, Demo,
managing cluster resources, monitoring system
status, M2000 database management, system
2.5d
backup and restore
Discussion
Target Audience
 Describe user type in M2000 system
M2000 Server maintenance engineer
 Master how to create, modify, delete user
Prerequisites
information
 Manage user group in M2000 system
Master Linux SUSE system basic operations
 Manage user network right and operation right
Master Oracle database basic operations
 Complete monitor user state
Objectives
 Complete M2000 system log management
 Master NEs status checking methods
be able to:
 Describe M2000 system software structure
 Know M2000 hardware and software structure
 Describe system software updating procedure
 Describe M2000 software modules structure
and methods
and modules functions
 Perform NEs mediation software installation
 List M2000 server typical configuration
and updating
 Describe M2000 server networking
 Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore
 Describe Linux SUSE10 system management
base knowledge
commands
 Master how to backup and restore M2000 data
 Describe files system structure
 Know the base knowledge of M2000 system
 Perform system management operation
emergency maintenance
 Describe Oracle10g database modules
 List M2000 system emergency scene
 Describe Oracle10g database operation
 Master the methods and steps of M2000
commands
system emergency maintenance
 Implement start and stop data process
 Know M2000 dangerous operations
751
 Master normal Trouble Shooting methods
Duration
 Describe Northbound interface functions in
M2000 system
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
752
18.3.4 iManager M2000V2 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)
Training Path
function of OSMU
iManager M2000V2 System Overview ATAE Cluster
ONW17
Lecture
0.5d
maintenance OSMU
Database Management (ATAE Cluster)
1d
ONW36
Lecture, Lab
 Describe Northbound Interface Definition and
Function
 Perform Northbound Interface Interconnection
iManager M2000V2 ATAE Cluster Server
1.5d
ONW29
Lecture, Lab
Commissioning
 Handle Northbound Interface Common
Troubleshooting
Target Audience
 Explain the meaning of O
 M user, NE user, mode 1, mode 2 NE
Network management operator
 Manage OM user and NE user
Prerequisites
 Set security policy parameters
 Monitor the user status
 Describe Oracle storage and SQL language
Objectives
 Describe M2000 database
 Perform the M2000 database Usage viewing
be able to:
 Describe the concept and features of SUSE
 Describe the basic concepts and principles of
Linux system
ATAE cluster
 Describe the ATAE hardware structure and its
 Perform common operating system commands
Duration
function
3 working days
 Map between principles and the corresponds
hardware module
Class Size
 Master the networking and typical application
Min 6, Max 12
scenario of ATAE Cluster scheme
753
18.3.5 iManager PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe PRS Network Topology
 Describe Architecture of PRS
Performance Report System Overview
ONW15
Lecture
 Describe Functions of PRS
 Perform Typical Configurations of PRS
0.5d
 Describe Technical Specifications of PRS
 Master how to power on and power off the PRS,
Performance Report System Operation
ONW35
Lecture, Lab
set the server parameters for the PRS system,
manage the clients of the PRS system,
1.5d
manage PRS system logs, monitor the PRS
system, manage PRS processes and services,
Target Audience
manage the PRS system database, manage
Network Performance analyzing and maintenance
files and disks of the PRS system
engineer
Prerequisites
 Know routine maintenance of the PRS System
Duration
Being familiar with MS Windows Operation System
A basic knowledge of mobile communications
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 1
be able to:
754

2014 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training

Transcription

Similar documents

Eudemon1000E-X V2R1 规格一纸通

Mobile Backhaul im Test

TWDM PON with WDM overlay NonAnimated